Home Decisions Meetings News
← Back to Cabinet

Cabinet

Thursday 10th October 2024 • View on LB Hillingdon’s website
Meeting documents
👥 Attendance details📄 Agenda frontsheet PDF 412 KB📦 Public reports pack PDF 16 MB📦 Agenda reports pack - Cabinet Agenda B PDF 1 MB📝 Printed minutes PDF 411 KB
Read the text of: Agenda frontsheet PDF 412 KB (5 pages)
Lloyd White Head of Democratic Services London Borough of Hillingdon, Phase II, Civic Centre, High Street, Uxbridge, UB8 1UW Putting our residents first CABINET To all Members of the Cabinet: Ian Edwards, Leader of the Council (Chair) Jonathan Bianco, Deputy Leader of the Council & Cabinet Member for Property, Highways & Transport (Vice-Chair) Martin Goddard, Cabinet Member for Finance Douglas Mills, Cabinet Member for Corporate Services Susan O'Brien, Cabinet Member for Children, Families & Education Jane Palmer, Cabinet Member for Health & Social Care Eddie Lavery, Cabinet Member for Residents' Services Date: THURSDAY, 10 OCTOBER 2024 Time: 7.00 PM Venue: COMMITTEE ROOM 6 - CIVIC CENTRE, HIGH STREET, UXBRIDGE UB8 1UW Meeting Details: The public and press are welcome to attend and observe the meeting. For safety and accessibility, security measures will be conducted, including searches of individuals and their belongings. Attendees must also provide satisfactory proof of identity upon arrival. Refusal to comply with these requirements will result in non- admittance. This meeting may be broadcast on the Council’s YouTube channel. You can also view this agenda online at www.hillingdon.gov.uk Published: Wednesday, 2 October 2024 Contact: Mark Braddock Tel: 01895 250470 Email: mbraddock@hillingdon.gov.uk Useful information for residents and visitors Watching & recording this meeting You can watch the public part of this meeting on the Council's YouTube channel, live or archived after the meeting. Residents and the media are also welcome to attend in person, and if they wish, report on the public part of the meeting. Any individual or organisation may record or film proceedings as long as it does not disrupt proceedings. It is recommended to give advance notice of filming to ensure any particular requirements can be met. The Council will provide seating areas for residents/public, high speed WiFi access to all attending and an area for the media to report. The officer shown on the front of this agenda should be contacted for further information and will be available to assist. When present in the room, silent mode should be enabled for all mobile devices. Travel and parking Bus routes 427, U1, U3, U4 and U7 all stop at the Civic Centre. Uxbridge underground station, with the Piccadilly and Metropolitan lines, is a short walk away. Limited parking is available at the Civic Centre. For details on availability and how to book a parking space, please contact Democratic Services. Please enter via main reception and visit the security desk to sign-in and collect a visitors pass. You will then be directed to the Committee Room. Accessibility For accessibility options regarding this agenda please contact Democratic Services. For those hard of hearing an Induction Loop System is available for use. Emergency procedures If there is a FIRE, you will hear a continuous alarm. Please follow the signs to the nearest FIRE EXIT and assemble on the Civic Centre forecourt. Lifts must not be used unless instructed by a Fire Marshal or Security Officer. In the event of a SECURITY INCIDENT, follow instructions issued via the tannoy, a Fire Marshal or a Security Officer. Those unable to evacuate using the stairs, should make their way to the signed refuge locations. Notice Notice of meeting and any private business The London Borough of Hillingdon is a modern, transparent Council and through effective Cabinet governance, it seeks to ensure the decisions it takes are done so in public as far as possible. Much of the business on the agenda for this Cabinet meeting will be open to residents, the wider public and media to attend. However, there will be some business to be conside red that contains, for example, confidential, commercially sensitive or personal information. Such business is shown in Part 2 of the agenda and is considered in private. Further information on why this is the case can be sought from Democratic Services. This is formal notice under The Local Authorities (Executive Arrangements) (Meetings and Access to Information) (England) Regulations 2012 to confirm that the Cabinet meeting to be held on: 10 October 2024 at 7pm in Committee Room 6, Civic Centre, Uxbridge will be held partly in private and that 28 clear days public notice of this meeting has been given. The reason for this is because the private (Part 2) reports listed on the agenda for the meeting will contain exempt information under Part 1 of Schedule 12A to the Local Government Act 1972 (as amended) and that the public interest in withholding the information outweighs the public interest in disclosing it. An online and a hard copy notice at the Civic Centre in Uxbridge indicates a number associated with each report with the reason why a particular decision will be taken in private under the categories set out below: (1) information relating to any individual (2) information which is likely to reveal the identity of an individual (3) information relating to the financial or business affairs of any particular person (including the authority holding that information) (4) information relating to any consultations or negotiations, or contemplated consultations or negotiations, in connection with any labour relations matter arising between the authority or a Minister of the Crown and employees of, or office holders under, the authority. (5) Information in respect of which a claim to legal professional privilege could be maintained in legal proceedings. (6) Information which reveals that the authority proposes (a) to give under any enactment a notice under or by virtue of which requirements are imposed on a person; or (b) to make an order or direction under any enactment. (7) Information relating to any action taken or to be taken in connection with the prevention, investigation or prosecution of crime. Notice of any urgent business To ensure greater transparency in decision -making, 28 clear days public notice of the decisions to be made both in public and private has been given for these agenda items. Any exceptions to this rule are the urgent business items on the agenda marked *. For such items it was impracticable to give sufficient notice for a variety of business and service reasons. The Chairman o f the relevant Select Committee has been notified in writing about such urgent business. Notice of any representations received No representations from the public have been received regarding this meeting. Date notice issued and of agenda publication 2 October 2024 London Borough of Hillingdon Agenda 1 Apologies for Absence 2 Declarations of Interest in matters before this meeting 3 To approve the minutes of the last Cabinet meeting 1 - 14 4 To confirm that the items of business marked Part 1 will be considered in public and that the items of business marked Part 2 in private Cabinet Reports - Part 1 (Public) 5 Draft Uxbridge Town Centre Vision for public engagement (Cllr Eddie Lavery) 15 - 32 6 Safeguarding Partnership Annual Report (Cllr Susan O'Brien / Cllr Jane Palmer) 33 - 104 7 REFERRAL FROM FULL COUNCIL: Options to Increase Controls for Houses of Multiple Occupation (Cllr Eddie Lavery) 105 - 120 8 London Borough of Hillingdon Digital Strategy (Cllr Douglas Mills) 121 - 152 9 Consultation on Review of Strategic Climate Action Plan (Cllr Eddie Lavery) 153 - 164 10 Transport for London Local Implementation Plan - Annual Spending Submission (Cllr Jonathan Bianco) 165 - 182 11 POLICY FRAMEWORK: Youth Justice Plan 2024-2029 (Cllr Susan O'Brien) 183 - 226 12 Monthly Council Budget Monitoring Report (Cllr Martin Goddard) - TO FOLLOW - 13 Public Preview of matters to be considered in private (All Cabinet Members) 227 - 230 Cabinet Reports - Part 2 (Private and Not for Publication) 14 Civic Centre Transformation: NHS Licence to Occupy at the Civic Centre, Uxbridge (Cllr Jonathan Bianco) 231 - 236 15 Disposal of Fountains Mill, High Street, Uxbridge (Cllr Jonathan Bianco) 237 - 248 16 Disposal of garage site and land at Hilton Close, Uxbridge (Cllr Jonathan Bianco) 249 - 256 The reports in Part 2 of this agenda are not for publication because they involve the disclosure of information in accordance with Section 100(A) and Part 1 of Schedule 12 (A) to the Local Government Act 1972 (as amended), in that they contain exempt information and that the public interest in withholding the information outweighs the public interest in disclosing it. 17 Any other items the Chairman agrees are relevant or urgent

Text extracted automatically from the PDF, so layout, tables and images are not shown. Open the original PDF on LB Hillingdon’s website.

Read the text of: Printed minutes PDF 411 KB (16 pages)
_________________________________________________________________________ - Page 1 - Decisions & Minutes CABINET 7pm, Thursday, 10 October 2024 Meeting held at Committee Room 6 - Civic Centre, High Street, Uxbridge UB8 1UW Decisions Published on: 11 October 2024 Decisions come into effect from: 5pm, 18 October 2024, or as stated Cabinet Members Present: Ian Edwards (Chair) Jonathan Bianco (Vice-Chair) Martin Goddard Douglas Mills Susan O'Brien Jane Palmer Eddie Lavery Members also Present: Jan Sweeting Scott Farley Kamal Kaur Peter Curling June Nelson Barry Nelson-West 1. APOLOGIES FOR ABSENCE All Cabinet Members were present. 2. DECLARATIONS OF INTEREST IN MATTERS BEFORE THIS MEETING No interests were declared by Members present. 3. TO APPROVE THE MINUTES OF THE LAST CABINET MEETING The minutes and decisions of the Cabinet meeting held on 12 September 2024 were agreed as a correct record. 4. TO CONFIRM THAT THE ITEMS OF BUSINESS MARKED PART 1 WILL BE CONSIDERED IN PUBLIC AND THAT THE ITEMS OF BUSINESS MARKED PART 2 IN PRIVATE It was confirmed that items of business marked Part 1 would be considered in public and those marked Part 2 in private. The Leader of the Council drew the public’s attention to the preview of confidential reports available for greate r transparency of Council business. _________________________________________________________________________ - Page 2 - 5. DRAFT UXBRIDGE TOWN CENTRE VISION FOR PUBLIC ENGAGEMENT RESOLVED: That Cabinet: 1) Agrees the draft Uxbridge Town Centre Vision (Appendix 1) and summary document (Appendix 2) for public engagement for a pe riod of at least eight weeks to secure residents’ feedback on the proposed Vision. 2) Authorises the Corporate Director for Central Services, in conjunction with the Cabinet Member for Residents’ Services, to make any minor textual changes to the Vision, prior to the public engagement exercise. 3) Notes that following the period of public engagement, and the views received, a final Vision will be reported back to Cabinet for approval. Reasons for decision Cabinet agreed to undertake wider public engagement o n the draft Uxbridge Town Centre Vision. The Cabinet Member for Residents’ Services introduced the draft Vision, emphasising the importance of further consultation to build on previous community engagement. It was explained that t he Vision aimed to adapt U xbridge’s vibrant office sector and r etail centres and bring about diverse leisure offerings. Key proposals included better navigation around the town centre, increased residential space and developing the Civic Centre site as a community hub, including th e new library. The Cabinet Member noted that the vision was intended to guide future planning applications and provide a clear picture for the community and potential developers. The Leader of the Council highlighted the financial challenges facing the C ouncil but expressed optimism about t he future and the ongoing efforts to reinvent Uxbridge town centre. Alternative options considered and rejected Cabinet could have decided that the Vision be adopted without further engagement, but considered this wou ld have not built on the positive community response following the initial engagement exercise. Relevant Select Committee Residents’ Services Expiry date for any scrutiny call-in / date decision can be implemented (if no call-in) This matter can be call ed in by the relevant select committee by 5pm, Friday 18 October 2024. If not called-in, Cabinet’s decisions can then be implemented. Officer(s) to action Julia Johnson Directorate Central Services Classification Public - The report and any background papers relating to this decision by the Cabinet are available to view on the Council's website or by visiting the Civic Centre, Uxbridge. _________________________________________________________________________ - Page 3 - 6. SAFEGUARDING PARTNERSHIP ANNUAL REPORT RESOLVED: That the Cabinet: 1. Notes the Annual Report and is assured that the partnership continues to provide leadership and scrutiny of the safeguarding arrangements for Hillingdon residents.   2. Notes the way in which the partnership has responded to the challenges posed by changing local, national and international contexts.  3. Notes the strategic priorities for safeguarding for 2024-25.     Reasons for decision Cabinet received a report on the adult and children safeguarding partnerships’ performance over the year and the safeguarding priorities for the year ahead. The Cabinet Member for Health & Social Care informed Cabinet of the work undertaken by partnerships to protect residents, adults with care and support needs and vulnerable children. The Cabinet Member thanked Susie Gladish, the report author, and r ead a statement from the Independent Scrutineer praising the strong partnership and leadership in safegua rding arrangements. The report highlighted ongoing engagement with consultation groups, the identification of common concerns such as neglect and physi cal abuse and the collaboration with various agencies like the LBH MASH team, Hillingdon Hospital, and the Police. Key initiatives included addressing structural inequalities, suicide prevention and exploitation. The Cabinet Member emphasised the successes in partnership working and urged everyone to review the comprehensive report. The Cabinet Member for Ch ildren, Families & Education also spoke on the report in respect of the children’s aspect, highlighting the partnership’s efforts to meet the increasing complexity of needs for vulnerable children in Hillingdon. The Cabinet Member noted there was a rise in emotional and psychological needs among children and mentioned the Council’s outstanding rating from the recent Ofsted inspection, which also recognis ed strong partnership working. The annual report emphasised collaborative efforts to adopt a child -centred approach and the work of various subgroups, including those focused on child sexual abuse, contextual safeguarding and educational safeguarding. The vision for the partnership was to ensure every child feels safe, healthy, and has opportunities to thrive. The Cabinet Member thanked the officers and partnership organisations for their immense work in safeguarding children. The Leader of the Council pr aised the report and the effective partnership, acknowledging the often, unrecognised efforts to protect vulnerable residents. _________________________________________________________________________ - Page 4 - Alternative options considered and rejected None. Relevant Select Committee Children, Families & Education Health & Social Care Expiry date for any scrutiny call-in / date decision can be implemented (if no call-in) This matter is not for call-in, as noting only. Officer(s) to action Suzi Gladish Directorate Children’s Services Classification Public - The report and any background papers relating to this decision by the Cabinet are available to view on the Council's website or by visiting the Civic Ce ntre, Uxbridge. 7. REFERRAL FROM FULL COUNCIL: OPTIONS TO INCREASE CONTROLS FOR HOUSES OF MULTIPLE OCCUPATION RESOLVED: That the Cabinet: 1. Notes the process and requirements, including the gathering of evidence and concerns, required for the consideration of an Additional Licensing Policy for Houses of Multiple Occupation (HMO) and authorises the Corporate Director of Place to gather all the necessary data and present to the Cabinet Member for Resident’s Services (subject to the Cabinet Members agreement on additional expenditure). 2. Upon the advice of the Corporate Director of Place that the data collated has been ga thered in accordance with the appropriate legislation, and upon review it supports the concept of an additional licensing scheme, whilst taking into account any additional resources required, then subject to the agreement of the Cabinet Member for Resident s Services, authorises the necessary consultation on an additional licensing scheme, taking into full consideration any equality impact assessment and the Council’s social housing allocation policy. 3. Authorises the Corporate Director of Central Services to prepare evidence to assess whether an extension to the part -borough Small HMO Article 4 Direction (non -immediate) can be justified and present to the Cabinet Member for Resident’s Services. 4. Upon the advice of the Corporate Director of Central Services an d Director of Planning, Regeneration & Environment that the evidence gathered supports the extensions of the HMO Article 4 Direct ion, then subject to the agreement of the Cabinet Member for Residents’ Services _________________________________________________________________________ - Page 5 - authorises officers to prepare an Article 4 Di rection extending the withdrawal of permitted development rights for small HMOs to cover all wards in the borough. 5. Agree that the outcomes of any consultations relating to additional licensing be reported back to Cabinet to consider any further determinations on such matters. Reasons for decision Following the Full Council passing a motion on 11 July 2024, resolving to address issues regarding controls on Houses in Multiple Occupation, Cabinet received and agreed a report on the matter. The Cabinet Mem ber for Residents’ Services introduced the report and highlighted two main concerns: the growth of small HMOs under permitted development rights, which did not require planning permission, and the standards in some private rented properties. Two measures w ere proposed to address these issues: an Article 4 directive to withdraw permitted development rights for HMOs, requiring plannin g permission, and a licensing scheme to improve standards in the private housing sector, including HMOs. Both measures would ne ed robust data to support their implementation and avoid challenges. Councillor Lavery urged councillors to encourage residents to participate in the consultation process to provide the necessary evidence for future decisions. Alternative options considered and rejected Cabinet could have continued with the current arrangements or consider ed instead the use of other powers to deal with ASB and environmental issues relating to HMO’s. Relevant Select Committee Residents’ Services Expiry date for any scrutiny call-in / date decision can be implemented (if no call-in) This matter can be called in by the relevant select committee by 5pm, Friday 18 October 2024. If not called-in, Cabinet’s decisions can then be implemented. Officer(s) to action Richard Webb / Stephanie Waterford / Julia Johnson / Debbie Weller / Michelle Greenidge Directorate Place / Central Services Classification Public - The report and any background papers relating to this decision by the Cabinet are available to view on the Council's w ebsite or by visiting the Civic Centre, Uxbridge. _________________________________________________________________________ - Page 6 - 8. LONDON BOROUGH OF HILLINGDON DIGITAL STRATEGY RESOLVED: That Cabinet: 1. Approves Hillingdon’s Digital Strategy 2024-27 in the Appendix. 2. To deliver the Strategy: a) Agrees the programm es and projects as set out in the report for the remainder of 2024/25 and 2025/26; b) Authorises the release of the remaining approved capital budget for 2024/25 and 2025/26 to deliver this; c) Delegates authority to the Chief Digital & Information Officer and Corporate Director of Finance (S151), in consultation with the Cabinet Member for Corporate Services, to incur expenditure within this budget and make all necessary procurement decisions on the programmes and projects set out in the report, reporting decisi ons for transparency as required and; d) Agrees that any variations to specific projects within the programme for 2024/25 and 2025/26 be subject to i) being within the Strategy’s objectives, ii) being within the approved budget and associated aggregate savings for the financial year and iii) having the agreement of the Chief Digital & Information Officer and Corporate Director of Finance (S151), in consultation with the Cabinet Member for Corporate Services. 3. Agree to receive an annual report going forward, se tting out progress on the Strategy and delivery of savings targets, seeking agreement to the programmes and projects for the upcoming financial year and seeking further delegated authority to successfully implement the programme. Reasons for decision Cabinet agreed Hillingdon’s new Digital Strategy, which set o ut a clear vision for the Borough and the Council, for the next three years. Cabinet also agreed the programme of projects for the ensuing years and provided delegated authority for its effective delivery. The Cabinet Member for Corporate Services introduced the report, citing the ambitious three -year investment program aimed at enhancing the efficiency of the authority. The Cabinet Member emphasised the need to modernise and transform outdated proc esses, and by re -engineering these processes, the Council would create significant savings and ensure the maintenance of crucial frontline services. As part of the Strategy, the Cabinet Member highlighted the importance of leveraging the vast amounts of da ta held by the local authority, to make it easily accessible and understandable for staff, thereby improving their decision -making processes. Other critical aspects of the Strategy explained were plans to revamp the _________________________________________________________________________ - Page 7 - Council’s website to enhance user experi ence, so residents could quickly find the information and services they need and also invest in staff training to maximise the benefits of new technologies. The Leader of the Council supported the strategy, noting the significant investment of £9 million and the expected high return on investment, underscoring the necessity of a robust digital strategy for a modern local authority. Alternative options considered and rejected The Cabinet could have agreed to operate and develop digital services without a strategy, amended the programme of projects or only have agreed to deliver projects which delivered a more immediate return on investment sacrificing longer -term benefits. Relevant Select Committee Corporate Resources & Infrastructure Expiry date for any scrutiny call-in / date decision can be implemented (if no call-in) This matter can be called in by the relevant select committee by 5pm, Friday 18 October 2024. If not called-in, Cabinet’s decisions can then be implemented. Officer(s) to action Darren Persaud / Matthew Wallbridge Directorate Digital & Intelligence Classification Public - The report and any background papers relating to this decision by the Cabinet are available to view on the Council's website or by visiting the Civic Centre, Uxbridge. 9. CONSULTATION ON REVIEW OF STRATEGIC CLIMATE ACTION PLAN RESOLVED: That the Cabinet: 1) Approves the Strategic Climate Action Plan Review to be consulted upon. 2) Approves the Consultation Strategy and for the public consultation to be undertaken in accordance with it. Reasons for decision Following the Council’s climate declaration in 2020 and the first Strategic Climate Action Plan adopted in 2021, Cabinet agreed to a review of the Plan and public consultation on it. The Cabinet Memb er for Residents’ Services introduced the report, noting the progress that had been made to -date and the proposed actions for the next three years. Highlights mentioned included a 54% reduction in the Council’s carbon footprint and ongoing efforts to furth er reduce emissions through improvements in _________________________________________________________________________ - Page 8 - Council buildings and fleet purchases, including electric and more efficient vehicles. The report also addressed the impact of the changing climate and weather patterns on flooding within the Borough, with the Cabinet Member noting that completed relief projects had successfully mitigated recent flooding events. Alternative options considered and rejected Cabinet could have decided not to meet its commitment to review the Plan. Relevant Select Committee Residents’ Services Expiry date for any scrutiny call-in / date decision can be implemented (if no call-in) This matter can be called in by the relevant select committee by 5pm, Friday 18 October 2024. If not called-in, Cabinet’s decisions can then be implemented. Officer(s) to action Ian Thynne Directorate Central Services Classification Public - The report and any background papers relating to this decision by the Cabinet are available to view on the Council's website or by visiting the Civic Centre, Uxbridge. 10. TRANSPORT FOR LONDON LOCAL IMPLEMENTATION PLAN - ANNUAL SPENDING SUBMISSION RESOLVED: That the Cabinet approve, in principle, the proposed bid outlined in this report for funds from Transport for London (TfL) to implement the Council’ s Local Implementation Plan (LIP) and d elegate authority to the Cabinet Member for Property, Highways and Transport to agree any changes or additions prior to the submission deadline and to submit the Council's new three -year Local Implementation Plan Delivery Programme bid by the deadline. Reasons for decision Cabinet agreed to progress the Council’s bid to Transport for London for funds to deliver the Council’s Local Implementation Plan through various transport projects in the Borough. The Cabinet Me mber for Property, Highways and Transport explained that the Plan stemmed from the Mayor of London setting his transport strategy with priorities such as safer corridors, cycle training, bus priority, and better bus partnerships. Each London borough would then bid for funding based on this strategy. The Cabinet Member expected that the Council’s baseline funding would be approximately £1.5 million per annum, similar to previous years, but noted that final allocations would depend on the Mayor’s budget decisions. _________________________________________________________________________ - Page 9 - Alternative options considered and rejected None. Relevant Select Committee Corporate Resources & Infrastructure Expiry date for any scrutiny call-in / date decision can be implemented (if no call-in) This matter can be called in by the relev ant select committee by 5pm, Friday 18 October 2024. If not called-in, Cabinet’s decisions can then be implemented. Officer(s) to action Sophie Wilmot Directorate Place Directorate Classification Public - The report and any background papers relating to this decision by the Cabinet are available to view on the Council's website or by visiting the Civic Centre, Uxbridge. 11. POLICY FRAMEWORK: YOUTH JUSTICE PLAN 2024-2029 RESOLVED: That Cabinet: 1. Considers the findings and overall positive response from the consultation which has informed the final proposed Hillingdon Youth Justice Service Strategy 2024-2029. 2. Recommends to the Full Council the adoption of the five-year strategy, as a policy framework document. Reasons for decision Following consu ltation, Cabinet agreed to recommend the Youth Justice Service Strategy to full Council for adoption. The Cabinet Member for Children, Families & Education noted the statutory duty of local authorities to submit a youth justice plan [strategy] and explained that Hillingdon’s strategy aimed to establish clear priorities for youth justice, assist in the development and performance management of work streams and provide a framework for collaboration with partner organisations. The Cabinet Member reviewed th e outcomes of the public consultation, which Cabinet considered, along with feedback from the Select Committee . On the service itself, the Cabinet Member noted that whil st there were no immediate financial pressures, there were potential risks su ch as increased demand for services, high remand accommodation costs, and possible funding reductions need to be monitored. _________________________________________________________________________ - Page 10 - Alternative options considered and rejected None. Relevant Select Committee Children, Families & Education Expiry date for any scrutiny call-in / date decision can be implemented (if no call-in) Not for call-in and decision comes into immediate effect. This is because the Plan is a policy framework document and will now be referred to the Full Council for decision. Officer(s) to action Nuzhat Ilyas Directorate Children’s Services Classification Public - The report and any background papers relating to this decision by the Cabinet are available to view on the Council's website or by visiting the Civic Centre, Uxbridge. 12. MONTHLY COUNCIL BUDGET MONITORING REPORT RESOLVED: That the Cabinet: 1) Note the budget monitoring position and treasury management update as at August 2024 (Month 5), noting the actions proposed by officers as outlined in Part A of this report. 2) Approve the financial recommendations set out in Part B of this report below: a. Agrees the rebasing proposal to process a budget virement and credit the corporate centre with £14.1m to the support Service Operating Budgets. Reasons for decision The Cabinet Member for Finance introduced the monthly Council budget monitoring report, addressing the financial position as of 31 August 2024 and a progress update on the zero-based budgeting (ZBB) project. It was noted in the report there was a projected overspend of £32.4 million, which could be reduced to £6.6 million through identified savings and the release of balance sheet items. The total savings identified so far amounted to £39.6 million, with some savings expected in future financial years. The Cabinet Me mber emphasised that the savings targeted areas such as streamlining back -office functions, digitisa tion and income maximisation, without cutting key frontline services. The Cabinet Member acknowledged the substantial financial challenges, in-year budget pressures and shortfalls on income targets. Despite these challenges, the Cabinet Member stated that Hillingdon had managed its cash flow and borrowing effectively. _________________________________________________________________________ - Page 11 - The Cabinet Member noted that the newly appointed Corporate Director of Finance was leading the ZBB process and that he had also formally instructed the Corporate Director to prepare a financ ial improvement plan to strengthen operational and financial controls and promote the enhanced use of digital data. Furthermore, Cabinet was informed that operational improvements had reduced the in-year deficit for the Dedicated Schools Grant, though a significant deficit remained. The Housing Revenue Account was on track, with plans for an enhanced capital programme to increase housing stock and reduce homelessness pressures. The Leader of the Council emphasised the importance of acknowledging the financial challenges facing the Council and mentioned a recent meeting with London Council leaders and their finance directors, where they discussed the pressu res on local authorities and their expectations from the upcoming Government budget which the Leader hoped would not exacerbate the Council’s financial situation. Alternative options considered and rejected None. Relevant Select Committee Corporate Resources & Infrastructure Expiry date for any scrutiny call-in / date decision can be implemented (if no call-in) Cabinet’s decision in 2 (a) only can be called in by the relevant select committee by 5pm, Friday 18 October 2024. If not called -in, Cabinet’s d ecisions can then be implemented. Officer(s) to action Richard Ennis Directorate Corporate Director of Finance Classification Public - The report and any background papers relating to this decision by the Cabinet are available to view on the Council's w ebsite or by visiting the Civic Centre, Uxbridge. 13. PUBLIC PREVIEW OF MATTERS TO BE CONSIDERED IN PRIVATE RESOLVED: That Cabinet note the reports to be considered later in private and Part 2 of the Cabinet agenda and comment on them as ap propriate for public information purposes. Reasons for decision The Leader of the Council introduced the report which provided a public summary of the matters to be discussed in the private part of the Cabinet meeting later, increasing the Council’s tran sparency. One report was highlighted which related to issuing the NHS a license to occupy a wing of the Civic Centre. The Leader explained that this arrangement was expected to be financially beneficial for the Council and would further strengthen the exis ting partnership with the NHS, particularly on safeguarding arrangements. _________________________________________________________________________ - Page 12 - Alternative options considered and rejected These were set out in the public Cabinet report. Relevant Select Committee Expiry date for any scrutiny call-in / date decision can be implemented (if no call-in) This matter is not for call-in, as noting only. Officer(s) to action Mark Braddock Directorate Central Services Classification Public - The report and any background papers relating to this decision by the Cabinet are avai lable to view on the Council's website or by visiting the Civic Centre, Uxbridge. 14. CIVIC CENTRE TRANSFORMATION: NHS LICENCE TO OCCUPY AT THE CIVIC CENTRE, UXBRIDGE RESOLVED: That the Cabinet: 1. Authorises a Licence to Occupy to the NHS of the 2 South Quadrant at the Civic Centre on the terms set out in this report, and as shown on the plan at Appendix 1. 2. Delegates all future decisions regarding the implementation of this matter to the Corporate Director of Place, in conjunction with the Cabinet Member for Property Highways and Transport Reasons for decision The Cabinet Member for Property, Highways and Transport introduced a report, which Cabinet agreed , for a Licence to Occupy to the NHS for office space at the Civic Centre, Uxbridge as part of the Civic Centre transformation and plans for more joined up local public services. The L eader of the Council thanked the Chief Executive for his efforts in securing this. Alternative options considered and rejected Alternative options considered by Cabinet were set out in the confidential report. Relevant Select Committee Corporate Resources & Infrastructure Expiry date for any scrutiny call-in / date decision can be Cabinet’s decisions on this matter can be calle d in by a majority of the select committee by 5pm, Friday 18 October 2024. If not called-in, Cabinet’s decisions can _________________________________________________________________________ - Page 13 - implemented (if no call-in) then be implemented. Officer(s) to action Gary Penticost Directorate Place Directorate Classification Private - Whilst the Cabinet's dec isions above are always made public, the officer report relating to this matter is not because it was considered in the private part of the meeting and contained information relating to the financial or business affairs of any particular person (including the Authority holding that information) and the public interest in withholding the information outweighed the public interest in disclosing it in accordance with Section 100(A) and paragraph 3 of Part 1 of Schedule 12 (A) to the Local Government Act 1972 (as amended). 15. DISPOSAL OF FOUNTAINS MILL, HIGH STREET, UXBRIDGE RESOLVED: That the Cabinet: 1) Declares that following the closure of the Fountains Mill, 81 High Street, Uxbridge UB8 1JR as a Young People’s Centre, the site is now surplus to requirements; the Property is shown edged red on Plan A below. 2) Authorises the unconditional sale of the Property Fountains Mill, 81 High Street, Uxbridge UB8 1JR on the open market on the terms and conditions as detailed in this report. 3) Delegates all other necessary decisions regarding the sale and disposal to the Corporate Director of Place, in conjunction with the Cabinet Member for Property, Highways and Transport. Reasons for decision The Cabinet Member for Property, Highways and Transport introd uced a report, which Cabinet agreed, on the disposal and sale of Fountains Mill in Uxbridge, a former young people’s centre, as the site was now surplus to requirements. Alternative options considered and rejected Alternative options for the site were co nsidered by Cabinet, as set out in the confidential report. Relevant Select Committee Corporate Resources & Infrastructure Expiry date for any scrutiny call-in / date decision can be implemented (if no call-in) Cabinet’s decisions on this matter can be c alled in by a majority of the select committee by 5pm, Friday 18 October 2024. If not called-in, Cabinet’s decisions can then be implemented. _________________________________________________________________________ - Page 14 - Officer(s) to action James Raven Directorate Place Classification Private - Whilst the Cabinet's decisions abov e are always made public, the officer report relating to this matter is not because it was considered in the private part of the meeting and contained information relating to the financial or business affairs of any particular person (including the Authori ty holding that information) and the public interest in withholding the information outweighed the public interest in disclosing it in accordance with Section 100(A) and paragraph 3 of Part 1 of Schedule 12 (A) to the Local Government Act 1972 (as amended). 16. DISPOSAL OF GARAGE SITE AND LAND AT HILTON CLOSE, UXBRIDGE RESOLVED: That the Cabinet: 1) Declare the garage site at Hilton Close, Uxbridge, UB8 2QJ as surplus to requirements; the Property is shown edged red in Appendix A. 2) Note that a planning application for 2x three -bedroom dwellings has been approved at Planning Committee, subjec t to a Section 106 legal agreement and conditions. 3) Authorise the disposal of the garage site at Hilton Close with the method of disposal delegated to the C orporate Director of Place, in conjunction with the Cabinet Member for Property, Highways and Transport. 4) Delegate authority to the Corporate Director of Place, in conjunction with the Cabinet Member for Property, Highways and Transport, to make any furthe r necessary decisions with regard to the implementation of Cabinet’s decisions. Reasons for decision The Cabinet Member for Property, Highways and Transport introduced a report, which Cabinet agreed, on the disposal and sale of a garage site at Hilton Cl ose, Uxbridge that was under -utilised and prone to anti -social behaviour, with the Leader of the Council also welcoming plans for its conversion to residential use. Alternative options considered and rejected Alternative options for the site were consid ered by Cabinet, as set out in the confidential report. _________________________________________________________________________ - Page 15 - Relevant Select Committee Corporate Resources & Infrastructure Expiry date for any scrutiny call-in / date decision can be implemented (if no call-in) Cabinet’s decisions on this matter can be calle d in by a majority of the select committee by 5pm, Friday 18 October 2024. If not called -in, Cabinet’s decisions can then be implemented. Officer(s) to action Tom Prevezer Directorate Place Directorate Classification Private - Whilst the Cabinet's decis ions above are always made public, the officer report relating to this matter is not because it was considered in the private part of the meeting and contained information relating to the financial or business affairs of any particular person (including th e Authority holding that information) and the public interest in withholding the information outweighed the public interest in disclosing it in accordance with Section 100(A) and paragraph 3 of Part 1 of Schedule 12 (A) to the Local Government Act 1972 (as amended). 17. ANY OTHER ITEMS THE CHAIRMAN AGREES ARE RELEVANT OR URGENT No other items were considered. The meeting closed at 19:38pm Internal Use only Implementation of decisions & scrutiny call-in When can these decisions be implemented by officers? Officers can implement Cabinet’s decisions in these minutes only from the expiry of the scrutiny call -in period, unless otherwise stated in the minutes above, which is: 5pm, Friday 18 October 2024 However, this is subject to the decision not being called in by Councillors on the relevant Select Committee. Upon receipt of a valid call -in request, Democratic Services will immediately advise the relevant of ficer(s) and the Cabinet decision must then be put on hold. Councillor scrutiny call-in of these decisions Councillors on the relevant Select Committee shown in these minutes for the relevant decision made may request to call-in that decision. The call -in request must be before the expiry of the scrutiny call-in period above. Councillors should use the Scrutiny Call-in App (link below) on their devices to initiate any call -in request. Further advice can be sought from Democratic Services if required: Scrutiny Call-In - Power Apps (secure) Notice These decisions have been taken under The Local Authorities (Executive Arrangements) (Meetings and Access to Information) (England) Regulations 2012. _________________________________________________________________________ - Page 16 - This Cabinet meetin g was also broadcast live on the Council’s YouTube channel here for wider resident engagement. Please note that these minutes and decisions are the definitive record of proceedings by the Counci l of this meeting. If you would like further information about the decisions of the Cabinet, please contact the Council below: democratic@hillingdon.gov.uk Democratic Services: 01895 250636 Media enquiries: 01895 250403

Text extracted automatically from the PDF, so layout, tables and images are not shown. Open the original PDF on LB Hillingdon’s website.

Attendance
Present: Councillor Ian Edwards, Councillor Jonathan Bianco, Councillor Martin Goddard, Councillor Douglas Mills, Councillor Susan O'Brien, Councillor Jane Palmer, Councillor Eddie Lavery, Councillor Peter Curling, Councillor Scott Farley, Councillor Kamal Preet Kaur, Councillor June Nelson, Councillor Barry Nelson-West, Councillor Jan Sweeting

Agenda

1. Apologies for Absence
All Cabinet Members were present.
2. Declarations of Interest in matters before this meeting
No interests were declared by Members present.
3. To approve the minutes of the last Cabinet meeting PDF 389 KB
The minutes and decisions of the Cabinet meeting held on 12 September 2024 were agreed as a correct record.
📄 To approve the minutes of the last Cabinet meeting PDF 389 KB
Read the text of this document (13 pages)
_________________________________________________________________________ - Page 1 - Minutes / Decisions CABINET Thursday, 12 September 2024 Meeting held at Committee Room 6 - Civic Centre, High Street, Uxbridge UB8 1UW Decisions published on: 13 September 2024 Decisions come into effect on: From 5pm 20 September 2024 or as stated Cabinet Members Present: Ian Edwards (Chair) Jonathan Bianco (Vice-Chair) Douglas Mills Susan O'Brien Jane Palmer Eddie Lavery Members Also Present: Peter Curling June Nelson Kamal Kaur Scott Farley Sital Punja Stuart Mathers 1. APOLOGIES FOR ABSENCE Apologies were received from Councillor Martin Goddard 2. DECLARATIONS OF INTEREST IN MATTERS BEFORE THIS MEETING No interests were declared by Members present. 3. TO APPROVE THE MINUTES OF THE LAST CABINET MEETING The minutes and decisions of the Cabinet meeting held on 25 July 2024 were agreed as a correct record. 4. TO CONFIRM THAT THE ITEMS OF BUSINESS MARKED PART 1 WILL BE CONSIDERED IN PUBLIC AND THAT THE ITEMS OF BUSINESS MARKED PART 2 IN PRIVATE It was confirmed that items of business marked Part 1 would be considered in public and those marked Part 2 in private. The Leader of the Council drew the public’s attention to the preview of confidential reports available for greater transparency of Council business. _________________________________________________________________________ - Page 2 - 5. OPTIONS TO THE REDUCE THE IMPACTS ON COMMUNITIES OF TAXIS AND PRIVATE HIRE VEHICLES WAITING IN RESIDENTIAL STREETS NEAR HEATHROW AIRPORT RESOLVED: That the Cabinet: 1) Agrees that public consultation will be undertaken on the introduction of a Public Spaces Protection Order prohibiting private hire vehicle and taxi vehicles waiting on the roadside near Heathrow Airport. 2) Receives a further report when the consultation has concluded and an equality impact asses sment has been prepared to decide whether to introduce a Public Spaces Protection Order and, if so, the scope of that Order. Reasons for decision The Cabinet Member for Residents’ Services introduced a report on options to reduce the impact of taxis and private hire vehicles waiting in residential streets near Heathrow Airport. The Cabinet Member outlined the plan for a consultation on a proposed Public Spaces Protection Order (PSPO) to improve the lives of residents in the wards surrounding Heathrow Airport by controlling the waiting of private hire vehicles in this area. This issue had been a long-standing nuisance, with 4,775 Fixed Penalty Notices (FPNs) issued for other offences by these vehicles in the last 12 months, and 93 complaints received since April via the Heathrow Nuisance Portal. The Cabinet Member noted that the problem had grown since private hire vehicles began obtaining business via apps, and that now included some licensed taxis. Both groups had waiting facilities within the Airport’s boundary, but often chose not to use them. The Cabinet Member explained that the proposed PSPO would prevent private hire vehicles from waiting in the three wards surrounding the airport: Heathrow Villages, Pinkwell and West Drayton. This approach was prefe rred over extending parking controls, which would impact residents and require an observation period. The PSPO would make it an offence for any vehicle used for hire or reward purposes to park or wait within the restricted area unless collecting or droppin g off passengers, residing in the area, or if the business was based there. The PSPO would require no observation period and could be enforced by fixed or mobile cameras. The results of the consultation would return to Cabinet for a final decision. The Cab inet Member thanked Richard Webb, the Director of Community Safety & Enforcement, for his work on the paper. Cabinet agreed to the consultation and t he Leader of the Council welcomed the development, noting the significant impact of waiting vehicles on re sidents and the limitations of current enforcement methods. _________________________________________________________________________ - Page 3 - Alternative options considered / risk management Alternative options considered by the Cabinet, but discounted, were to maintain the status quo, more engagement with the taxi trad e or further parking restrictions on vehicles waiting in streets near the airport. Relevant Select Committee Residents’ Services Expiry date for any scrutiny call-in / date decision can be implemented (if no call - in) Cabinet’s decisions can be called in by a majori ty of the select committee by 5pm, Friday 20 September 2024. Officer(s) to action Richard Webb Directorate Place Classification Public The report and any background papers relating to this decision by the Cabinet are available to view on the Council's w ebsite or by visiting the Civic Centre, Uxbridge. 6. CARERS' STRATEGY DELIVERY PLAN UPDATE RESOLVED: That Cabinet notes highlights against the Carers’ Strategy delivery plan activity for 2023/24 and the priorities for 2024/25. Reasons for decision The Cabinet Member for Health & Social Care presented a r eport, which Cabinet noted, highlighting key developments in the Carers Strategy Delivery Plan, which also supported the joint Health and Well -Being Strategy and the Better Care Fund Plan. A draft of the report had been discussed with the Health and Social Care Committee and the Cabinet Member thanked their comments. The Cabinet Member noted that the 2021 census showed 22,465 people identified as carers in the Borough, a number believed to hav e risen. Furthermore, in March, 563 adult carers were surveyed with a 30% return rate, showing 34% could take a break from caring for more than 24 hours, up from 20% in 2021/22 and higher than the England average of 16.7%. The Cabinet Member explained th at the main support for carers was through the Carer Support Service contract between the Council and Carers Trust Hillingdon. In respect of the work done to support carers over the last year, the Cabinet Member pointed out this had included 2,596 short br eaks, 56 residential weekends for young carers, 144 family member s attending trips, 29 holiday activity sessions, 91 carers receiving crisis counselling and 207 receiving family support. Additionally, it was welcomed that a new information pack had been produced for carers and that carer leads were now re -established in all 41 GP practices across the Borough. In respect of carer assessments, the Cabinet Member noted that the Council had conducted 875 assessments, including 244 by the Carers Trust. In _________________________________________________________________________ - Page 4 - 2023/24, 4,789 carers in the Borough received respite or care service s, with an increase in direct payments from 170 to 204, along with carer benefits secured for 233 families - the highest since the contract had begun. The Cabinet Member welcomed that the C arers Strategy Delivery Plan demonstrated a shared commitment to supporting carers across the Council, NHS and its other partners. Cabinet noted the report. Alternative options considered / risk management None were considered by the Cabinet. Relevant Select Committee Health & Social Care Expiry date for any scrutiny call-in / date decision can be implemented (if no call - in) N/A – report for noting only Officer(s) to action Gary Collier Directorate Adult Social Care and Health Classification Public The report and any background papers relating to this decision by the Cabinet are available to view on the Council's website or by visiting the Civic Centre, Uxbridge. 7. REVIEW OF STATEMENT OF GAMBLING POLICY RESOLVED: That the Cabinet: 1) Agrees to a public consultation for the draft Statement of Gamblin g Policy to take place between 13th September 2024 and 25th October 2024. 2) Notes that a further report will be submitted to Cabinet, post consultation, highlighting any consultation responses for Cabinet to consider for inclusion in the final policies. 3) Notes that the Statement of Gambling Policy is then required to be referred to the full Council for adoption as a policy framework document. Reasons for recommendation The Cabinet Member for Re sidents’ Services introduced the draft Statement of Gambling Poli cy, which was being reviewed in accordance with legislative requirements. The Cabinet Member explained that no significant changes were proposed, and the revisions were primarily a matter of tidying up existing provisions. It was noted that the Policy would ultimately need to be adopted by the full Council as part of the Council’s policy framework. Cabinet, therefore, agreed to undertake a six-week public consultation on the draft policy and receive a further report back. _________________________________________________________________________ - Page 5 - Alternative options considered and rejected None, as Cabinet noted that there was a legal requirement under the Gambling Act 2005 to review the policy every 3 years. Relevant Select Committee Residents’ Services Expiry date for any scrutiny call-in / date decision can be implemented (if no call - in) N/A – Cabinet’s decisions come into immediate effect as this is a Policy Framework Document. Officer(s) to action Daniel Ferrer Directorate Place Classification Public The report and any background papers relating to this decision by the Ca binet are available to view on the Council's website or by visiting the Civic Centre, Uxbridge. 8. MONTHLY BUDGET MONITORING REPORT RESOLVED: That the Cabinet: 1. Note the update provided and the approach being taken in reviewing the financial position for 2024/25. 2. Approve the financial recommendations set out in Part B of the report below: a. Note the request to continue existing operational arrangements with The Forward Trust and Farol whilst new contracts are agreed, and formal governance approved. b. Approves a public consultation exercise on the Council’s local Council Tax Reduction Scheme with a view to reforming the scheme with effect from April 2025, and delegates authority to t he Chief Executive, in consultation with the Leader of the Council and Cabinet Member for Finance, to agree the detailed consultation proposals for publication. Reasons for decision In the absence of the Cabinet Member for Finance, the Leader of the Coun cil read a statement from him. The statement noted that the repor t before Cabinet did not provide new financial information but instead described the ongoing budget process, which would lead to a comprehensive update soon. The Cabinet Member’s statement explained that the Council was currently facing financial pressures due to increased demand for services like housing, social care, and asylum provision and the impact of inflation, constrained by central Government grant funding. It was further stated that an intensive zero -based budgeting exercise was underway, _________________________________________________________________________ - Page 6 - examining processes and cost structures, identifying options for income maximisation, structural consolidation and efficiency savings. The new Corporate Director of Finance was assessing these option s, with results to be reported in October as part of the month five budget monitoring process. In respect of the other financial recommendations in the report, the Leader of the Council moved these for consideration, which Cabinet agreed. These related t o the continuation of two contracts following the new financial controls put in place and the proposal to start a public consultation on potential revisions to the Council Tax Reduction Scheme. Alternative options considered and rejected None. Relevant Select Committee Corporate Resources & Infrastructure Expiry date for any scrutiny call-in / date decision can be implemented (if no call - in) Cabinet’s decision (2b) can be called in by a majority of the select committee by 5pm, Friday 20 September 2024. Officer(s) to action Directorate Classification Public The report and any background papers relating to this decision by the Cabinet are available to view on the Council's website or by visiting the Civic Centre, Uxbridge. This item was also circulated less than 5 clear working days before the Cabinet meeting and it was considered by the Chairman to be urgent, and therefore, considered. 9. PUBLIC PREVIEW OF MATTERS TO BE LATER CONSIDERED IN PRIVATE RESOLVED: That Cabinet note the reports to be considered later in private and Part 2 of the Cabinet agenda and comment on them as appropriate for public information purposes. Reasons for decision The Leader of the Council introduced the report which provided a public summary of the matters t o be discussed in the private part of the Cabinet meeting later, increasing the Council’s transparency. Alternative options considered and rejected These were set out in the public Cabinet report. _________________________________________________________________________ - Page 7 - Relevant Select Committee Expiry date for any scrutiny call-in / date decision can be implemented (if no call-in) This matter is not for call-in, as noting only. Officer(s) to action Mark Braddock Directorate Central Services Classification Public - The report and any background papers relating to this de cision by the Cabinet are available to view on the Council's website or by visiting the Civic Centre, Uxbridge. 10. PROPERTY DECISIONS IN RESPECT OF THE CURRENT UXBRIDGE LIBRARY, HIGH STREET FOLLOWING THE DECISION TO RELOCATE THE LIBRARY TO THE CIVIC CENTRE SITE IN UXBRIDGE RESOLVED: That the Cabinet: 1) Notes that Cabinet on 15 th February 2024, having regard to the Equalities Impact Assessment and the benefits of a step free, one -floor library and taking into account the views expressed by l ibrary service users, agreed to the relocation of Uxbridge Library from UB8 1HD (High Street, Uxbridge) to UB8 1UW (Middlesex Suite & Civic Centre, Uxbridge) subject to satisfactory planning approval being granted and the closure of the existing site at a time to be determined by the Cabinet Member for Residents’ Services. 2) Notes that planning permission was granted on 16 July 2024 for the relocation of Uxbridge Library to the UB8 1UW (Middlesex Suite Civic Centre Uxbridge). 3) Declares that following the rel ocation of Uxbridge Library to the Civic Centre, that the library at UB8 1HD (High Street, Uxbridge) will be surplus to requirements due to access and equality issues and no further use for the asset by alternate Council services due to an inability to resolve CO2e emissions issues and the lack of evacuation lifts. The property is shown edged red and edged blue on the plan at Appendix 1; 4) Authorises the unconditional sale of Uxbridge Library on the open market on the terms and conditions as detailed in this report. 5) Authorises a deed of variation and licence to assign the lease of part of Uxbridge Library on the terms and conditions set out in this report. The lease comprises the first and second floor of 12 High Street Uxbridge dated 12 June 1987 the demis e is shown edged blue on the plan at Appendix 1. _________________________________________________________________________ - Page 8 - 6) Delegates the future sale and all necessary decisions regarding the disposal to the Corporate Director of Place, in consultation with the Cabinet Member for Property, Highways & Transport and the Cabinet Member for Residents’ Services. Reasons for decision Cabinet noted its decision earlier in the year to relocate Uxbridge Library nearby to the Civic Centre site in Uxbridge, with planning permission for this granted in July. Cabinet agreed that the curren t library would be surplus to requirements upon the opening of the new library, due to access and equality issues, and therefore, authorised its sale on the open market and delegated the future sale decision. Alternative options considered / risk management Alternative options were co nsidered by the Cabinet, as set out in the confidential report. Relevant Select Committee Corporate Resources & Infrastructure Expiry date for any scrutiny call-in / date decision can be implemented (if no call-in) Cabinet’s decisions can be called in by a majority of the select committee by 5pm, Friday 20 September 2024. Officer(s) to action James Raven Directorate Place Classification Private - Whilst the Cabinet's decisions above are always made public, the officer rep ort relating to this matter is not because it was considered in the private part of the meeting and contained information relating to the financial or business affairs of any particular person (including the Authority holding that information) and the publ ic interest in withholding the information outweighed the public interest in disclosing it in accordance with Section 100(A) and paragraph 3 of Part 1 of Schedule 12 (A) to the Local Government Act 1972 (as amended). 11. CONTRACT AWARD FOR WASTE SERVICES RESOLVED: That the Cabinet: 1) Accept the tender from Powerday PLC for the removal and processing of bulky items and street cleansing material and the collection and processing of excavated material from the borough’s cemeteries on behalf of the London Borough of Hillingdon for a four-year period from 1 November 2024 to 31 October 2028 and at the total value of £4,728,121. _________________________________________________________________________ - Page 9 - 2) Furthermore, agree that this includes the provision to extend the contract for a two -year period, delegating approval o f any extension to the Leader o f the Council and Cabinet Member for Residents’ Services, in consultation with the Corporate Director of Place. Reasons for decision Following a procurement process, Cabinet agreed to accept a tender for the removal and processing of bulky items and street cleansing material, as well as the collection and processing of excavated material from the Borough’s cemeteries. Alternative options considered / risk management These were considered by Cabinet, as set out in the confidential report. Relevant Select Committee Residents’ Services Expiry date for any scrutiny call-in / date decision can be implemented (if no call-in) Cabinet’s decisions can be called in by a majority of the select committee by 5pm, Friday 20 September 2024. Officer(s) to action Anna Humphries Directorate Place Classification Private - Whilst the Cabinet's decisions above are always made public, the officer report relating to this matter is not because it was considered in the private part of the mee ting and contained information relating to the financial or business affairs of any particular person (including the Authority holding that information) and the public interest in withholding the information outweighed the public interest in disclosing it in accordance with Section 100(A) and paragraph 3 of Part 1 of Schedule 12 (A) to the Local Government Act 1972 (as amended). 12. SOCIAL CARE CATERING SERVICES RESOLVED: That Cabinet: 1) Agrees to extend the contract with Caterplus Services Ltd for the provision of Social Care Catering Services in the following services which the Council directly provide: 4 Extra Care settings, 3 Early Years services and catering staff for Queens Walk Adult Resource Centre. Cabinet agrees that this is for a p eriod of 18 months from the 23 March 2024 to the 22 September 2025 at an estimated cost of £1,375k in line with the revenue budget, noting that cost savings are expected to be made from transformation work over the period of the contract. _________________________________________________________________________ - Page 10 - 2) Delegates authority to the Corporate Directo r of Adult Social Care and Health, in consultation with the Cabinet Member for Health and Social Care or Cabinet Member for Children, Families & Education as appropriate, to vary the contract in order to make incremental transformative changes to promote independence for residents and to maximise efficiencies and achieve the budget savings target, within these catering services with the intention to change and reduce dependency on these services where appropriate. Reasons for decision Cabinet agreed to th e extension of the catering contract for key social care and nursery establishments and agreed to progress with changes to the catering services provided to ensure efficiency and promote independence for residents. Alternative Options considered and rejected Cabinet could have decided not to provide catering services, consider alternate procurement approaches or charge residents the full cost of the meals. Relevant Select Committee Health & Social Care Children, Families & Education Expiry date for any scrutiny call-in / date decision can be implemented (if no call-in) Cabinet’s decisions can be called in by a majority of either select committee by 5pm, Friday 20 September 2024. Officer(s) to action Jan Major / Tanya Bedoyian Directorate Adult Social Care & Health / Resources Classification Private - Whilst the Cabinet's decisions above are always made public, the officer report relating to this matter is not because it was considered in the private part of the meeting and contained information relat ing to the financial or business affairs of any particular person (including the Authority holding that information) and the public interest in withholding the information outweighed the public interest in disclosing it in ac cordance with Section 100(A) and paragraph 3 of Part 1 of Schedule 12 (A) to the Local Government Act 1972 (as amended). 13. FLEET REPLACEMENT PROGRAMME RESOLVED: That the Cabinet: 1. Accept the tender from MOTUS VAUXHALL for a one -off purchas e to supply 7 x Diesel Small Va ns (L2H1), 2 x Diesel Small Vans (L2H1 inc tow bar and chapter 8), 23 x Diesel Medium Vans (L2H1) at a total cost of £814,000. _________________________________________________________________________ - Page 11 - 2. Accept the tender from RENAULT for a one -off purchase to supply 9 x Diesel Medium Vans L2H2 at a total cost of £259,290. 3. Accept the tender from MOTUS MAXUS for a one -off purchase to supply 2 x 3.5 Tonne High Top Van L3H3, 2 x Diesel Caged Tippers with Tool Pod, 10 x 3.5T Diesel Tippers with Tool Pod, 1 x Diesel 3.5T Tipper, 3 x Diesel 3.5T Tippers w ith Tail Lift, 3 x Diesel 3.5T Beavertail Vehicles at a total cost of £748,476. 4. Accept the tender from FIAT for a one -off purchase of 2 x Diesel 3.5T tipper at a total cost of £62,610. 5. Delegate authority to the Corporate Director of Finance, in consultat ion with Cabinet Member for Finance, to purchase up to 32 electric vehicles at a total cost of £1,142k. 6. Approve the capital release of £3,329k to purchase the fleet vehicles from the 2024/25 Purchase of Vehicles budget (Appendix A). Reasons for decision Cabinet agreed a suite of cont racts to replace the Council’s fleet of vehicles which were reaching the end of their serviceable life and, as of September 2023, were subject to daily ULEZ fees. Cabinet noted that this would also ensure the fleet was more environmentally friendly. Alternative options considered and rejected Cabinet could have continued to operate the existing fleet for a further short period of time, or hire/lease replacement vehicles, which was discounted for not providing value for money. Relevant Select Committee Corporate Resources & Infrastructure Expiry date for any scrutiny call-in / date decision can be implemented (if no call-in) Cabinet’s decisions can be called in by a majority of the select committee by 5pm, Friday 20 Septemb er 2024. Officer(s) to action Steve Gunter / Michelle Kenyon Directorate Resources Classification Private - Whilst the Cabinet's decisions above are always made public, the officer report relating to this matter is not because it was considered in the p rivate part of the meeting and contained information relating to the financial or business affairs of any particular person (including the Authority holding that information) and the public interest in withholding the information outweighed the public interest in disclosing it in accordance with Section 100(A) and paragraph 3 of Part 1 of Schedule 12 (A) to the Local Government _________________________________________________________________________ - Page 12 - Act 1972 (as amended). 14. LAND OPPOSITE 90 PEMBROKE ROAD, RUISLIP RESOLVED: That the Cabinet: 1) Declares that the land opposite 90 Pembroke Road Ruislip HA4 8NX is surplus to requirements. The Property is shown edged red on the disposal plan at Appendix 1 2) Authorises the unconditional sale of the freehold interest in the Property on the open market. 3) Delegates author ity to the Corporate Director of Place, in consultation with the Cabinet Member for Property Highways & Transport, to make any further necessary decisions with regard to the disposal. Reasons for decision Cabinet agreed to proceed with the sale of the fr eehold interest in the land opp osite 90 Pembroke Road Ruislip, agreeing that it was not required to support any services. Alternative options considered and rejected These were considered by Cabinet, as set out in the confidential report. Relevant Select Committee Corporate Resources & Infrastructure Expiry date for any scrutiny call-in / date decision can be implemented (if no call-in) Cabinet’s decisions can be called in by a majority of the select committee by 5pm, Friday 20 September 2024. Officer(s) to action James Raven Directorate Place Classification Private - Whilst the Cabinet's decisions above are always made public, the officer report relating to this matter is not because it was considered in the private part of the meeting and contained information relating to the financial or business affairs of any particular person (including the Authority holding that information) and the public interest in withholding the information outweighed the public interest in disclosing it in accordance with Section 100(A) and paragraph 3 of Part 1 of Schedule 12 (A) to the Local Government Act 1972 (as amended). _________________________________________________________________________ - Page 13 - 15. ANY OTHER ITEMS THE CHAIRMAN AGREES ARE RELEVANT OR URGENT Item 8 – Monthly Budget Monitoring Report was agreed as a late item an d considered in Public. There were no further additional items considered by the Cabinet. The meeting closed at 19.22pm Internal Use only* Implementation of decisions & scrutiny call-in When can these decisions be implemented by officers? Officers can implement Cabinet’s decisions in these minutes only from the expiry of the scrutiny call -in period, unless otherwise stated in the minutes above, which is: 5pm, Friday 20 September 2024 However, this is subject to the decision not being called in by Coun cillors on the relevant Select Committee. Upon receipt of a valid call -in request, Democratic Services will immediately advise the relevant officer(s) and the Cabinet decision must then be put on hold. Councillor scrutiny call-in of these decisions Councillors on the relevant Select Committee shown in these minutes for the relevant decision made may request to call-in that decision. The call -in request must be before the expiry of the scrutiny call-in period above. Councillors should use the Scrutiny Call-in App (link below) on their devices to initiate any call -in request. Further advice can be sought from Democratic Services if required: Scrutiny Call-In - Power Apps (secure) Notice These decisions have been taken under The Local Authorities (Executive Arrangements) (Meetings and Access to Information) (England) Regulations 2012. This Cabinet meeting was also broadcast live o n the Council’s YouTube channel here for wider resident engagement. Please note that these minutes and decisions are the definitive record of proceedings by the Council of this meeting. If you would like further information about the decisions of the Cabinet, please contact the Council below: democratic@hillingdon.gov.uk Democratic Services: 01895 250636 Media enquiries: 01895 250403

Text extracted automatically from the PDF, so layout, tables and images are not shown. Open the original PDF on LB Hillingdon’s website.

4. To confirm that the items of business marked Part 1 will be considered in public and that the items of business marked Part 2 in private
It was confirmed that items of business marked Part 1 would be considered in public and those marked Part 2 in private. The Leader of the Council drew the public’s attention to the preview of confidential reports available for greater transparency of Council business.
5. Draft Uxbridge Town Centre Vision for public engagement PDF 281 KB
RESOLVED: That Cabinet: 1) Agrees the draft Uxbridge Town Centre Vision (Appendix 1) and summary document (Appendix 2) for public engagement for a period of at least eight weeks to secure residents’ feedback on the proposed Vision. 2) Authorises the Corporate Director for Central Services, in conjunction with the Cabinet Member for Residents’ Services, to make any minor textual changes to the Vision, prior to the public engagement exercise. 3) Notes that following the period of public engagement, and the views received, a final Vision will be reported back to Cabinet for approval. Reasons for decision Cabinet agreed to undertake wider public engagement on the draft Uxbridge Town Centre Vision. The Cabinet Member for Residents’ Services introduced the draft Vision, emphasising the importance of further consultation to build on previous community engagement. It was explained that the Vision aimed to adapt Uxbridge’s vibrant office sector and retail centres and bring about diverse leisure offerings. Key proposals included better navigation around the town centre, increased residential space and developing the Civic Centre site as a community hub, including the new library. The Cabinet Member noted that the vision was intended to guide future planning applications and provide a clear picture for the community and potential developers. The Leader of the Council highlighted the financial challenges facing the Council but expressed optimism about the future and the ongoing efforts to reinvent Uxbridge town centre. Alternative options considered and rejected Cabinet could have decided that the Vision be adopted without further engagement, but considered this would have not built on the positive community response following the initial engagement exercise. Relevant Select Committee Residents’ Services Expiry date for any scrutiny call-in / date decision can be implemented (if no call-in) This matter can be called in by the relevant select committee by 5pm, Friday 18 October 2024. If not called-in, Cabinet’s decisions can then be implemented. Officer(s) to action Julia Johnson Directorate Central Services Classification Public - The report and any background papers relating to this decision by the Cabinet are available to view on the Council's website or by visiting the Civic Centre, Uxbridge.
📄 Draft Uxbridge Town Centre Vision for public engagement PDF 281 KB
Read the text of this document (5 pages)
Cabinet Report – 10 October 2024 (Part 1 Public) DRAFT UXBRIDGE TOWN CENTRE VISION FOR PUBLIC ENGAGEMENT Cabinet Member & Portfolio Cllr Eddie Lavery Cabinet Member for Residents’ Services Responsible Officer Corporate Director of Central Services Report Author & Directorate Julia Johnson, Director of Planning, Regeneration and Environment Central Services Directorate Papers with report Appendix 1 – Draft Uxbridge Vision Document (circulated separately, copies online and Group Offices) Appendix 2 – Summary Consultation Document HEADLINES Summary To seek approval to commence public engagement on the draft Uxbridge Town Centre Vision Putting our Residents First Delivering on the Council Strategy 2022-2026 This report supports our ambition for residents / the Council of: Enjoy access to green spaces, leisure activities, culture and arts This report supports our commitments to residents of: A Thriving Economy Financial Cost There are no direct financial costs associated with the recommendations to this report. The proposed work will be funded from existing General Fund budget resources within the Strategic Planning and Regeneration service. Select Committee Residents’ Service Select Committee Relevant Ward(s) Uxbridge, Hillingdon West RECOMMENDATIONS That Cabinet: 1) Agrees the draft Uxbridge Town Centre Vision (Appendix 1) and summary document (Appendix 2) for public engagement for a period of at least eight weeks to secure residents’ feedback on the proposed Vision. 2) Authorises the Corporate Director for Central Services, in conjunction with the Cabinet Member for Residents’ Services, to make any minor textual changes to the Vision, prior to the public engagement exercise. 3) Notes that following the period of public engagement, and the views received, a final Vision will be reported back to Cabinet for approval. Cabinet Report – 10 October 2024 (Part 1 Public) Reasons for recommendation The draft Uxbridge Town Centre Vision has been developed following a period of initial evidence gathering and engagement with over 800 local stakeholders in the summer of 2023. The draft Vision document seeks to establish a direction for future development and activity within Uxbridge town centre. Public engagement on the draft Vision document will provide the opportunity to test the emerging proposals with local stakeholders before the Vision is adopted by the Council. Alternative options considered / risk management The Vision could be adopted without further engagement, but this would not build on the positive community response following the initial engagement exercise. Select Committee comments The Residents’ Services Select Committee will consider and provide any comments on the Vision, as part of the engagement exercise, at its meeting in November 2024. SUPPORTING INFORMATION 1. Background In response to the ‘Thriving Economy’ commitment in the Council Strategy 2022-2026 and as part of setting out a new spatial vision for the borough in the emerging Local Plan , the council is seeking to create a new blueprint for Uxbridge town centre. Uxbridge is the largest town centre in Hillingdon and is intended to serve a wider metropolitan catchment area. It plays a crucial role in the overall economy of the borough with a mixture of offices, retail and restaurants that are well connected by public transportation. However, Uxbridge town centre , like many urban centres, face s several economic challenges. These include increasing retail vacancy rates, competition from larger retail hubs, changes in office space demand and the need for diversification beyond traditional retail. Addressing these economic challenges requires a coordinate d response. To this end, Hillingdon Council has commissioned a vision for Uxbridge town centre, led by Allies and Morrison Urban Practitioners, supported by Avison Young, Urban Flow, Brunel University, and JA Projects. The Vision aims to provide a strategic framework for the future of Uxbridge, addressing movement, development, public realm strategies, and short -term revitalisation actions. Community engagement has been a crucial aspect, with feedback shaping the proposals. 2. The Emerging Vision The proposed vision for Uxbridge town centre is to transform it into a vibrant, inclusive space where people can live, work, visit, play, and socialise. The town will focus on sustainability, healthy living, excellent walking and cycling routes, and high -quality public transport. It aims to blend its historical legacy with contemporary needs, fostering a sense of community and inclusivity. Cabinet Report – 10 October 2024 (Part 1 Public) 3. Key Issues and Themes I. Economic Resilience: While not declining, the town centre’s economy is vulnerable with high vacancy rates. The vision emphasi ses diversifying the economic offer, repurposing spaces to meet changing demands, and better serving residents' needs.  Principles: Diversify the offer, repurpose to meet demands, better serve residents.  Strategic Moves: Create a leisure and culture focus, support the office market, establish the Civic Centre as a community hub, improve public transport, and introduce residential spaces. II. Serving Local Communities : The town centre needs to better cater to its local population, addressing the demand for leisure and cultural activities.  Principles: Enhance community engagement, provide diverse activities.  Strategic Moves : Engage local educational institutions, support community - oriented spaces and services. III. Enhancing the Environment : The town’s public realm and built environment have potential but are currently underutilised. Improvements in transport infrastructure, green spaces, and overall town character are essential.  Principles: Restore connections, enhance public spaces.  Strategic Moves: Improve cycling and bus connections, introduce green spaces, and revitalise key areas like the High Street and Windsor Street. 4. Frameworks The draft vision includes detailed frameworks for movement, land use, and sustainability:  Movement Framework : Focuses on improving transport connectivity, safety, and accessibility.  Land Use Framework: Proposes mixed-use development to foster ec onomic and social vitality.  Sustainability Framewor k: Emphasi ses green infrastructure, energy efficiency, and climate resilience. 5. Delivery The Vision is also supported by a delivery strategy that outlines short-term and long-term actions to realise the vision. Short-term actions include physical and non-physical interventions to attract more people and create a stronger identity for the town centre . Continuous community engagement and coordinated efforts across various domains will be crucial for success ful implementation. Cabinet Report – 10 October 2024 (Part 1 Public) 6. Proposed Engagement It is proposed to undertake public engagement on the emerging Vision which will be led by the council’s Strategic Planning and Regeneration Service . The engagement will seek to gain feedback on the proposed approach, add additional comments and build support for the ongoing delivery of the vision. An executive summary of the vision has also been produced to ensure the draft vision is accessible to wide range of stakeholders. The engagement will primarily be carried out online via survey and workshops, including activities within Uxbridge town centre. The engagement on the draft Vision will be promoted using Hillingdon People, the council’s website and social media. It will also be promoted using a network of community and cultural organisations including the Uxbridge BID. 7. Outputs Following the engagement, the responses received will be summarised in an Engagement report and any proposed updates will be presented to Cabinet to consider as part of a subsequent adoption report. 8. Financial Implications There are no direct financial costs associated with the recommendations to this report. The proposed work will be funded from the existing General Fund budget within the Strategic Planning and Regeneration Service. RESIDENT BENEFIT & CONSULTATION The benefit or impact upon Hillingdon residents, service users and communities? The proposed Vision for Uxbridge town centre will promote coordinated investment which will have important economic and environmental benefits as well as providing opportunities for the provision of new homes. Consultation carried out or required As set out in the main body of the report. CORPORATE CONSIDERATIONS Corporate Finance Corporate Finance have reviewed this report and concur with the Financial Implications set out above, noting there are no direct financial implications associated with the recommendations contained in this report. However, it is noted that the new Vision, once finalised and reported back to Cabinet will need to consider the financial implications for the Council at this time. Cabinet Report – 10 October 2024 (Part 1 Public) Legal Approval of the vision is a Cabinet function. The vision will not form part of the Council’s development plan but would be a material consideration in the Council’s decision -making as the Local Planning Authority. BACKGROUND PAPERS NIL

Text extracted automatically from the PDF, so layout, tables and images are not shown. Open the original PDF on LB Hillingdon’s website.

📄 Uxbridge Vision summary document , item 5. PDF 2 MB
Read the text of this document (12 pages)
www.hillingdon.gov.uk UXBRIDGE Town Centre Vision summary document A long-term plan to unlock more opportunities for local residents and businesses, and ensure Uxbridge continues to thrive. 2 Introduction Uxbridge is a vibrant, bustling town centre with a rich heritage. It’s home to our civic hub, award-winning green spaces, a variety of businesses, retail and leisure activities, and homes for residents. During the past 20 years, major town centres across the country have faced many challenges which have threatened their long-term viability. Uxbridge is no different. That’s why this vision aims to address various current issues the area faces. Alongside our new Local Plan, it will guide future development, the use of space and attract investment into the town centre. We want to make Uxbridge an even better place to live, work and do business. The vision also aims to increase footfall and ensure the area remains a viable and thriving retail centre long into the future. In 2023, the council commissioned a team led by Allies and Morrison Urban Practitioners and Brunel University to engage with more than 1,000 community voices and other stakeholders to identify some themes to ensure the ongoing prosperity of Uxbridge town centre. The four key themes identified were: • Public realm improvement: Creation of new spaces that will encourage the community to visit the town centre more and support its businesses. These include a new series of permanent and temporary public spaces. • New activities: A programme of interventions, such as pop-up shops, maker spaces, and exhibitions that bring new organisations into the town centre. • Better links: The improvement of connections with surrounding areas, notably St Andrews Park, Fassnidge Park and Brunel University London to bring more footfall into the centre, especially in the evenings. • More town centre living: Options for increasing opportunities to live within the town centre. Using the themes identified and responses from community voices, we have co-designed a draft Uxbridge Town Centre Vision. This is now your opportunity to tell us what you think of it. I urge residents, businesses and partners to have their say. Your feedback will inform our approach to delivery and applications for funding. Cllr Eddie Lavery Cabinet Member for Residents’ Services 3 Research and engagement activity conducted by Brunel University London • 1,097 people spoken to via interviews, focus groups, walkalongs, drop ins and an exhibition event. • Meetings with key stakeholders, landowners and local groups. • Initial findings from social media, council officer input and local evidence. What’s happened so far and next steps Draft vision to be considered by the council’s Cabinet (October 2024) Further engagement (Until February 2025) Adoption by Cabinet (May 2025) Funding and delivery approach agreed (Autumn 2025) Start delivery of larger interventions (2026) The council will seek to deliver quick wins and smaller interventions during this period to ensure that we respond to local need and address immediate issues. All dates shown are indicative and subject to change and Cabinet approval. 4 Issues identified in Uxbridge town centre 5 Issue 3: Enhancing the environment Transport infrastructure dominates the town centre and the quality of the public realm requires improvement. Residents and visitors feel that public safety and the ability to walk and cycle freely within and into the town centre are key issues that should be addressed. Issue 1: Building economic resilience The town centre is vulnerable due to high retail and commercial vacancy rates. Central Uxbridge is inflexible and difficult to navigate. Issue 2: Serving local communities Uxbridge town centre’s offer is not matching the needs of local communities; with an under-representation of produce, health, beauty and professional services, culture and leisure uses. Uxbridge is dominated by chain retail and not appealing to groups such as students and those who do not drink alcohol. 6 We will use a range of short and long-term projects and interventions to address the issues outlined in this document. We will work with partners to find creative solutions and apply for funding to help us deliver the larger projects. Proposed interventions Addressing Issue 1: Building economic resilience What we need to do: Adapt the town centre to meet changing economic needs. How we are going to do it: Repurpose the economy to support the office market at the heart of the town centre. What we need to do: Diversify the town centre offer and create reasons for people to visit and spend time in Uxbridge with a focus on fun, leisure, culture and creativity. How we are going to do it: Create a focus for leisure and culture, particularly to address gaps in the current offer , such as night-time activities, and experience-based commercial offers. Addressing Issue 2: Serving local communities What we need to do: Better serve residents’ daily needs and bring communities together within the town centre, increasing visits and time spent there. How we are going to do it: Establish the Civic Centre as a community hub – consider different ways that the building and its forecourt can be better used to encourage community uses and activity in this area of the high street. How we are going to do it: Introduce new residential development opportunities into the town centre to provide the opportunity to support Uxbridge at all hours of the day and bring new residents to the community. How we are going to do it: Future-proof public transport accessibility by remodelling the bus interchange to create a new public square and a set of easily accessible bus stops. 7 Addressing Issue 3: Enhancing the environment What we need to do: Restore effortless connections - reconnect the town centre with the surrounding green spaces and make travel more accessible. How we are going to do it: Strengthen the transport connections into the town centre from the immediate local area, including improved bus and cycling routes. How we are going to do it: Enable Uxbridge residents to easily visit the town centre by foot by reallocating and relocating highway infrastructure. This will be done with the aim of maintaining the routes’ important strategic highway function. What we need to do: Enhance our public spaces, providing more opportunities to gather and relax, aside from shopping or leisure activities. How we are going to do it: Enhance the heart of the high street by reprioritising pedestrian movement along Windsor Street and the station square. How we are going to do it: Return a green character to the town centre and celebrate its wider green links by restoring the connections along the canal, to local parks and complexes, and other centres. 8 What the future of Uxbridge could look like 9 Key Reconfigure junctions to prioritise active travel Create a new bus link between York Road and Belmont Road via Bakers Road Re-position bus stops on-street via an orbital bus link Relocate bus garage Introduce high quality pedestrianised areas in the town centre Introduce high quality pedestrian routes into the town centre from surrounding neighbourhoods Introduce high quality cycle links and junctions Create interesting routes/ loops for pedestrians in mews and alleyways Strengthen the park and canal link for pedestrians and cyclists Improve crossing Junctions to prioritise pedestrians, cyclists and buses 10 Contact For more information, contact the Strategic Planning and Regeneration Service: localplan@hillingdon.gov.uk or visit: www.hillingdon.gov.uk/uxbridge-vision 11 Produced by Hillingdon Council September 2024 14751

Text extracted automatically from the PDF, so layout, tables and images are not shown. Open the original PDF on LB Hillingdon’s website.

📄 Uxbridge Town Centre Vision - Full Document (25MB) , item 5. PDF 24 MB
Read the text of this document (108 pages)
UXBRIDGE Town Centre Vision September 2024 CONTENTS PROJECT TEAM Allies and Morrison Urban Practitioners Avison Young Urban Flow Brunel University JA Projects 1 INTRODUCTION 1 2 VISION 1 4 3 PRINCIPLES AND STRATEGIC MOVES 2 4 4 FRAMEWORKS 7 4 5 A CTION ON THE GROUND 1 00 All plans in this document have been prepared using Ordnance Survey mapping data used under licence © Crown copyright Ordnance Survey 2023 OS licence 09121572 London Borough of Hillingdon Fig 1.1: Historic posters for transport in Uxbridge produced in the early 1900s. Source: London Transport Museum collection (permission requested), various 4 1.1 Introduction Hillingdon Council has commissioned a team led by Allies and Morrison Urban Practitioners to prepare a vision for Uxbridge Town Centre. Allies and Morrison Urban Practitioners are leading the masterplanning process and are supported by Avison Young (economy and property), Urban Flow (transport), Brunel University (community engagement) and JA Projects (short term interventions). Hillingdon Council is reviewing the Local Plan, and this Town Centre Vision will provide an updated vision for Uxbridge as a part of this Local Plan review. The Uxbridge Town Centre Vision will be a strategic piece that sets out a high-level vision and framework for the future of Uxbridge. It will include a movement strategy, development strategy and public realm strategy, alongside a delivery plan for short term as well as short term interventions for revitalisation. The proposals will be closely informed and shaped by community engagement led by Brunel University. This document follows a baseline analysis stage which provided a detailed assessment of Uxbridge Town Centre and the immediate hinterland areas. It established an evidence base to inform a set of principles and priorities for the vision. This Town Centre Vision focuses on Uxbridge’s centre. Its purpose is to provide a clear framework for decision making - steering investment priorities, setting principles for development and intervention and providing the basis for landowners and investors to confidently progress plans. The vision is based on an extensive evidence base and active community engagement. Many stakeholders and representatives have given their time generously and are eager to see the vision delivered once it is agreed. The vision will act as a key document, setting a strategy to achieve parts of the new Local Plan. This document will be corporately adopted as Council policy, and as such will direct funding and investment decisions immediately. The document is a 15 year vision and therefore stretches beyond existing planning policy but will address the new Local Plan period. Hillingdon Council would appreciate feedback on all proposals from the public and local stakeholders. The Council will not be able to take all ideas forward, however , consultation will provide a basis for a focus for investment and future priorities for Uxbridge Town Centre. 5 The Uxbridge Town Centre Vision provides an exciting opportunity to explore a thoughtful and locally specific response to the issues affecting high streets and town centres across the country, and to embrace the assets and roles which make the town centre such a key positive feature for Uxbridge and its residents. The first phase of community engagement ran between June and August 2023 and wide variety of activities to consult diverse user groups including key stakeholders, community leaders, office workers, business owners, students, and local residents. The methods used include ethnographic observation, experiential mapping, on-street interviews, walk arounds, focus groups, drop in sessions, surveys, social media analysis and a public exhibition. In total 1,097 people participated in the various community consultation activities. This baseline report draws in findings from the community engagement at key points. This includes area-specific findings where appropriate e.g. Windsor Street and Civic Centre, a summary at the end of each chapter of headline messages relating to each theme, as well as interview quotes throughout the analysis. The second phase of engagement will take place in Summer 2024 and will test the content of this Draft Town Centre Vision. Fig 1.2: Photographs of engagement events and activities 6 7 1.2 Why we need a vision Purpose of the study A coherent framework for future activity and investment The purpose of the town centre vision is to establish a long term strategy within which short term interventions can be delivered. The framework must encompass a movement and transport strategy, a development and renewal strategy, a land use framework and a public realm strategy. Some key aspects that the vision must explore are: Public realm vitality: creation of new spaces to socialise that will encourage the community to visit the town centre more and support its businesses. These include a new series of permanent and temporary public spaces. New activities: A programme of interventions such as pop-up shops, maker spaces, and exhibitions that bring new organisations into the town centre. Better links: The improvement of connections with surrounding areas, notably St. Andrews Park, Fassnidge Park and Brunel University, to bring more footfall into the centre, especially in the evenings. Residential intensification: options for increasing opportunities to live within the town centre. Context Policy context This document sits within a unique policy context, which was thoroughly reviewed during the baseline stage. The review was important to understand the huge amount of work that has already been done examining Uxbridge town centre. The policy context underpins the vision, understanding how the project can build upon existing policy and where there may be gaps in understanding/proposals. Previous work The vision is not starting from scratch. Much work has been done before and the team have absorbed these studies and built on them to establish a comprehensive framework for future change. This includes 2016 We Made That Strategy, 2017 DK-CM report and 2021 Re- imagining Uxbridge High Street by Brunel University for the Hillingdon Chamber of Commerce. Source: Love Uxbridge BID 8 Baseline activities (stage 1) Engagement activities: • 1,097 people spoken to via interviews, focus groups, walkarounds, drop ins and exhibition event • User group analysis • Meetings with key stakeholders, landowners and local groups • Initial findings (detailed report to follow in Sept) • Social media analysis Urban design analysis: • Character analysis and mapping • Public realm analysis and comparison with previous studies • Climate change considerations (mitigation and adaptation) Movement analysis: • Meetings with Transport for London, Greater London Authority and Hillingdon officers • Data gathering • Analysis of wider regional connections • Impact assessments of built form on active travel Economic, social and commercial evidence base: • Examination of Uxbridge’s economy/office base • Examination of Uxbridge’s high street mix • Demographic analysis and trends • Implications of retail and office shifts Source: Love Uxbridge BID 9 Vision study area boundary The core study boundary is the designated town centre boundary (shown in red on the adjacent plan). However , the baseline analysis has also looked at the immediate areas around this boundary, as well as the wider catchment for the town centre. In addition to the town centre boundary there are two additional sites identified by Hillingdon Council for consideration. The study area considers the major retail and commercial spaces, transport interchanges and contains numerous stakeholders. Strategic connections Uxbridge town centre is approximately 15 miles west of Central London, located right on the western edge of Greater London. It a Metropolitan Centre and the commercial and civic focus for the London Borough of Hillingdon. Uxbridge station is in the centre of the High Street and is the western terminus for the Metropolitan and Piccadilly underground lines. Despite the direct links into central London, the journey time is relatively long, especially in the context of the connections that Hayes and West Drayton have through the Elizabeth. The central reaches West Ruislip nearby. These east-west connections are stronger , however , than the north-south movement throughout the borough. London Heathrow airport is south of Uxbridge but not easily accessed. Many studies have examined rapid bus transit between Uxbridge and Heathrow, however , they have been deemed unviable. 1.3 Location and study area 10 HIGH STREET YORK ROAD OXFORD ROAD ROCKINGHAM ROAD HONEYCROFT HILL BELMONT ROAD HAREFIELD ROAD COWLEY ROAD HILLINGDON ROAD HILLINGDON ROAD PARK ROAD Fig 1.3: Study area - Uxbridge town centre boundary and additional adjacent opportunity sites. Source: © Crown copyright Ordnance Survey 2023 OS licence 09121572 Fig 1.4: Location plan - Uxbridge sits at the western edge of Greater London. Source: © Crown copyright Ordnance Survey 2023 OS licence 09121572 11 HIGH STREET OXFORD ROAD ROCKINGHAM ROAD BELMONT ROAD HAREFIELD ROAD COWLEY ROAD Tube station The Charter Building The Pavilions Police Station Buckinghamshire New University Fassnidge Park Civic Centre 12 BELMONT ROAD Tube station YORK ROAD HONEYCROFT HILL HILLINGDON ROAD HILLINGDON ROAD PARK ROAD © Crown copyright Ordnance Survey 2023 OS licence 09121572 The Chimes Sainsbury’s St Andrew’s ParkCivic Centre Uxbridge College 13 2 VISION 2.1 A vision for Uxbridge WELCOME TO UXBRIDGE Uxbridge will establish an identity as a welcoming town centre for all. Local people are hugely invested in the town centre but they need it to evolve and catch up with their current needs and to more proactively respond to future trends. It will be a place where people can live, work, visit, play, socialise, network, exercise, stay and meet daily needs . It will celebrate its past, but live in the present, welcoming visitors and encouraging inclusive community living. Sustainability and healthy living will be at the heart of the town’s future with excellent walking and cycling routes connecting neighbourhoods and the town centre, with high quality public transport services. 16 17 2.2 Issues to be addressed The Uxbridge Town Centre Vision project started with an extensive analysis of the town centre. At the outset a set of hypotheses about how the town centre performs were established. These hypotheses were informed by early conversations with stakeholders, and were then tested through data analysis, surveys and community engagement. The result was a set of conclusions that nuances some of the assumptions that many stakeholders had about the town centre: 1. The town centre’s economy is not declining, but it is vulnerable. 2. The town centre could serve its local population better . 3. The town centre has a comparatively small population, but this is already growing and there is scope for significantly more. 4. The town centre is not realising its potential, particularly in relation to its built fabric, public realm and overall character - many parts of the centre have hidden qualities that could be much better celebrated. 5. The town centre has been undermined by layers of transport infrastructure, particularly road infrastructure. 6. The town centre has lost some of its innate flexibility over time with the introduction of large format buildings and major roads, but there is scope to re- introduce greater adaptability. These conclusions informed a set of three core themes that the strategy should focus on addressing: • Building economic resilience • Better serving local communities • Enhancing the Environment Under each of these themes, the team have developed core principles for future change and strategic moves that should be made to support change on the ground. Chapter 3 outlines the three key issues that have emerged from the baseline findings, the principles that relate to each issue and strategic moves to address the issue. A breakdown of their relationship can be found on this spread. Unlike many other centres, the town centre’s economy is not declining, however it is vulnerable. Vacancy rates in the town centre are problematic, both for retail and commercial space. As the town centre has absorbed previous changes and responded to market demands, the physical nature of the town centre has become increasingly inflexible. Major roads and roundabouts now inhibit access into the town centre and development, whilst large format buildings mean the permeability of the town centre has been reduced with block footprints becoming much larger and the routes through them lost. The vision needs to re-introduce greater flexibility to allow the town centre to more deftly adapt and change to future needs. There is demand for new activities in the town centre. Local people want to see the town centre provide for greater leisure and cultural uses in particular . Ambitions for existing education institutions to have more of a town centre presence would bring a new element into the heart of the town centre, and the strategy should embrace this opportunity. Issue: Building economic resilience Principle: Diversify the offer Strategic move: Create a focus for leisure and culture Principle: Re-purpose to meet changing demands Strategic move: Re-purpose the economy to support office market at the heart of the town centre 18 Principle: Better serve residents needs Strategic move: Establish the Civic Centre as a community hub Strategic move: Future proof public transport accessibility Strategic move: Introduce new residential into the town centre The baseline analysis has shown that the town centre has been undermined by layers of transport infrastructure, particularly road infrastructure. Community engagement has also emphasised how local people feel the quality of the environment in the town centre has become degraded, reducing the experience of users. There is a need to address existing conflicts and safety concerns to create safe and attractive walking and cycling routes into the town centre. Despite having a great historic legacy, the town centre is not realising its potential. In many parts of the centre the true character of the buildings and spaces has been hidden where it could be celebrated. Outside of the town centre, there are fantastic parks and landscape features, but inside the town centre there is limited green space and planting. This poses a risk as the climate changes and new greening needs to be introduced to ensure the centre is attractive and comfortable in the coming decades. Principle: Restore effortless connections Strategic move: Improve strategic connections for cycling and buses Strategic move: Enable local access whilst protecting highway function Principle: Recapture a network of public spaces Strategic move: Restore a green character to the town centre and celebrate its wider green links Strategic move: Release the heart of the High Street and Windsor Street Issue: Serving local communities Issue: Enhancing the Environment There is currently a mismatch between local communities’ needs and what the town centre provides. Uxbridge needs to address under-representation of produce, health, beauty and professional services, culture and leisure to rise to the market changes and create a destination that can serve all daily needs for surrounding communities. The town centre should be less dominated by chain retail and more influenced by the demographics of the local population which would suggest greater diversity and the support local entrepreneurs. Local communities including Brunel students are in need of evening social and leisure activities that do not involve drinking alcohol. Young people are typically seeking these activities out in central London rather than Uxbridge, which takes away from the centre’s local economy. In contrast to most other town centres, Uxbridge has a comparatively small residential population. Whilst some conversions and new developments are helping to grow this, there is a need to encourage more people to live in the town centre to both support vibrancy and viability. 19 2.3 Town centre strengths Uxbridge Town Centre has many strengths, as highlighted through the baseline analysis and community engagement to date. The following bullet points summarise the findings: • The high street is protected from through traffic and largely pedestrianised. • The bus station is right in the heart of the town centre and right next to the tube station. • The centre boasts an historic high street with significant sections of historic frontages and buildings intact. • The town centre has large number of students present within its catchment (Brunel University, Buckinghamshire University and Uxbridge College). • The countryside is right on its doorstep – three rivers, the Grand Union Canal, London Loop route – 8 mins to Fassnidge Park, 9 mins to Grand Union Canal and River Colne and 11 mins to Dowding Park. • Has direct public transport connections into Central London and surrounding neighbourhoods (e g Hillingdon, Ruislip, Ealing, Harrow and Wembley) via the Piccadilly Line and Metropolitan Line. • Well connected to the South East and the country as a whole due to proximity of both the M25 and M40. • Large and growing local economy with higher levels of economic output than competitor town centres. • Economic mix is dominated by more productive office based sectors including Professional, Scientific and Technical Services and Information and Communication These sectors are supported by relatively good quality office stock across the centre. • Hosts a number of high profile economic anchors that drive interest and footfall (e g Buckinghamshire New University, Coca Cola, Mitsubishi, Hertz, Herbalife, GiffGaff and General Mills), as well as others within its catchment including Brunel University and the Uxbridge Industrial Estate. • Serves an important civic function linked to the presence of Hillingdon Civic Centre, Uxbridge Magistrates Court and the Hillingdon Metropolitan Police HQ. • Home to some manufacturing activity and located close to the North Uxbridge Industrial Estate which is an important economic driver and attractor . • Comparatively young, diverse and growing population which sustains local expenditure and creates vibrancy. • Relatively mixed retail offer catering to different groups and demographics via a range of comparison and convenience occupiers. Retail vacancy rates are an ongoing challenge but not as much as in other parts of the country. • The Chimes offers a comparatively high quality retail environment complemented by other non retail uses including the popular Odeon cinema which is well patronised by students and residents. • Delivery of large scale residential schemes around the edge of the Town Centre is deepening and extending the town centre catchment. • Local people are invested and committed to the town centre. • The library has consistently been identified as one of the strongest features of the town centre. It is well loved by local people and is considered a central hub, an important civic space and an attraction for visitors. • The town centre is used by a great variety of social groups from diverse ethnic and economic backgrounds. • It is experienced as a functional and practical town centre that people come to for their everyday needs and considered a “convenient” place to do shopping or run errands. • The high street is highly valued by users as a social space. • The cultural diversity of the population is starting to be well reflected in food shops and restaurants/ cafés. 20 “Getting to Uxbridge is easy, I’m absolutely happy with the buses.” (Resident, white British woman, 70s) “People want to become part of [Uxbridge’s] identity. And that’s predicated primarily on the environment that’s created. One of the factors of environment is architecture, and a branding of the place.” (Business Owner, British-Asian man, 50s) “The Civic Centre square just reminds me of the nice plazas and squares that you get in other European countries. So it gives us a flavour, especially during the summertime.” (Resident, British-Asian woman, 40s) “People come in and they come in to shop and they come in for the social interaction as well.” (Uxbridge BID) 21 2.4 What we want to know through public engagement The community engagement findings from stage 1 have been extremely helpful in understanding the needs and desires of the Uxbridge’s communities. These findings underpin the Town Centre Vision as it moves forward. The following bullets summarise the suggestions from community stakeholders for the future of Uxbridge Town Centre: • Balancing future developments with the existing aspects of the town centre that people cherish – both its functional aspects and the features which enable social interactions and participation in the life of the community. • Developing strategies that expand the town centre’s civic and social functions towards an enhanced public realm, easing pedestrian and cycling access, offering more social spaces for encounters and free activities. • A focus on increasing the independent retail and food offering which takes into account the diverse demographic of Uxbridge. • Developing strategies to highlight the town centre’s important and rich architecture and to inform about the nearby green and blue spaces. • Enhancing the physical environment of the town centre by incorporating more ‘green infrastructure’ and creating comfortable, shady spaces and water features. • Developing a visible and regular programme of community and youth events and leisure that will simultaneously provide natural surveillance and feelings of safety and promote the social life of Uxbridge. • Develop partnerships with local businesses, corporations and services for training and job opportunities for young people living and studying in the Uxbridge area. • Continuing to engage Uxbridge’s citizens in future planning processes for the area. • The next stage of this project will look at the vision and objectives that should steer future change. This will involve exploring particular opportunities and understanding the degree of change needed in each location to achieve these objectives. The team has started to identify some principles and key moves that might shape early thinking in the next stage and these are set out here. 22 2.4 What we want to know through public engagement The next stage of public engagement is about testing the draft principles, strategic moves and frameworks with local people and stakeholders. We want to gauge whether the strategy has encapsulated everything and if there are any additions that people would like to see. The feedback will help inform the final draft of the Uxbridge Town Centre Vision. The public engagement will help further reveal the priorities for the town centre, where change should be focused and where investment prioritised. The public engagement will take the form of an online survey, stakeholder workshops and an in-person pop up event in Uxbridge town centre. The programme for the public engagement is yet to be finalised. 23 3 PRINCIPLES AND STRATEGIC MOVES This section explores the three key issues that Uxbridge town centre is currently facing, as set out in the previous chapter . Principles are set out that address each of the issues with Strategic moves that are actionable moves to make positive change. This first spread provides a brief summary of each of the issues, principles and strategic moves. The town centre is vulnerable due to high retail and commercial vacancy rates. Central Uxbridge is inflexible with a rigid movement network and vacant, large footprint buildings. Principle: Re-purpose to meet changing demands It is key to work out Uxbridge already has and what its strengths are, to ensure that development is sustainable. Strategic move: Re-purpose the economy to support office market at the heart of the town centre • Considering the future of large footprint office blocks that are mostly vacant in the town centre to adapt to the market’s current position Principle: Diversify the offer Creating reasons for people to visit and spend time in Uxbridge with a focus on fun, leisure, culture, creativity. This principle is about making the town centre fit for the future. Strategic move: Create a focus for leisure and culture • Enhancing the leisure and culture offer , particularly focusing this shift around the eastern end of the High Street. 3.1 Introduction Issue: Building economic resilience 26 Uxbridge Town Centre’s offer is not matching the needs of the local communities; with an under representation of produce, health, beauty and professional services, culture and leisure uses. Uxbridge is dominated by chain retail and not appealing to groups such as Brunel students and those who do not drink alcohol. Principle: Better serve residents needs Ensuring that the day to day needs of different types of people and communities are met within Uxbridge town centre to increase visits and dwell times. Strategic move: Establish the Civic Centre as a community hub • Considering different ways that the Civic Centre and its forecourt can be better used to encourage community uses and activity in this area of the High Street. Strategic move: Introduce new residential into the town centre • New homes in the town centre provides the opportunity to support Uxbridge at all hours of the day and introduce a new community. Strategic move: Future proof public transport accessibility • Remodelling the bus interchange to create a new public square and a set of legible and easily accessible bus stops. Transport infrastructure dominates the town centre and the quality of the public realm is poor . Residents and visitors feel that public safety and the ability to walk and cycle freely within and into the town centre are key issues that should be addressed. Principle: Restore effortless connections Understanding the important of restoring the quality of the environment and the experience in the town centre is to reconnect the High Street with its hinterland. Strategic move: Improve strategic connections for cycling and buses • Strengthening sustainable connections from the immediate hinterland into Uxbridge town centre. Strategic move: Enable local access whilst protecting highway function • Re-prioritise, reallocate and relocate highway infrastructure with the aim of maintaining the route’s important strategic highway function. Principle: Recapture a network of public spaces Emphasising the importance of high-quality public spaces that provide a place to dwell and sit aside from shopping and activities. Strategic move: Release the heart of the High Street and Windsor Street • Supporting local heritage and re-prioritising pedestrian movement in the very centre of Uxbridge. Strategic move: Restore a green character to the town centre and celebrate its wider green links • Restoring the strategic connections along Canal, to the local parks and complexes and other centres. Issue: Serving local communities Issue: Enhancing the Environment 27 Key issue 1: Building economic resilience 28 29 3.2 Building economic resilience Ensuring a resilient town centre economy In contrast to other town centres Uxbridge’s economy is not declining, but it is vulnerable due to high and ever-rising office vacancies. It also has an over- representation of declining chain retail versus other town centre uses. Diversification of uses and activities in the town centre is needed to ensure the town centre remains attractive and resilient. Large office buildings pose a particular challenge for the Uxbridge. The town centre has a vast amount of office space, much of it in large format buildings. This space makes an important contribution to the local economy, but represents a vulnerability moving forward. The Atrium and Charter Building have already been re-orientated towards more flexible workspace, but many other buildings present challenges and the vision will need to explore opportunities for adaptation and transformation, including introducing different niche commercial typologies. Fig 3.1: Office Vacancy Rates by Town Centre (2018-2022) Source: CoStar , 2023 Embracing the significant education sector Uxbridge is in the enviable position of having two universities and a major college. However , at present the town centre does not benefit hugely from this. Giving these institutions more of a role and presence in the town centre is a major opportunity which should be embraced. Diversity of activities The baseline analysis has shown there is a high proportion of comparison retail in the town centre but an under-representation of leisure, cultural and community uses. Community engagement has reinforced this message that local people would like there to be more to do in the town centre. “It is lacking in choices of restaurants. You used to have a Pizza Express … at the back end of The Chimes, you used to have three restaurants which have closed. So you have very little choice if you want to have a gathering or an occasion, other than fast, convenience food” (Resident, white British woman, 50s) “It’s a very nice space if you want to hang out with friends and eat or shop, but there’s not many activities you can actually do.” (Visitor response to ‘What do you like about Uxbridge?’ At the Echoes of Uxbridge exhibition) 30 Fig 3.2: High Street Unit Composition by Town Centre, 2022. Source: Experian GOAD, 2023 The Atrium The Charter Building The Quays Capital Court Pemberton House Occupied office space Refurbished flexible office/ alternative occupier Converted to residential Vacant office buildings Civic Centre Harman House 31 3.3 Principle 3.4 Re-purpose to meet changing demands The first principle is all about working with what already exists, to be sustainable and avoid major development disruptions in the centre. The strategy should embed the circular economy in its approach and look to re-use and adapt buildings and spaces to better respond to changing market and consumer demand. This principle will involve the following: • Re-purpose vacant shop units - identify preferred and viable new uses for existing vacant units, to bring back the High Street and shopping centres to their fullest potential. • Re-imagine large office buildings - protect the most viable and logical office buildings for employment use, and find new viable uses for others (both those that are currently vacant and those at risk of vacancy in the short-medium term). This could involve potentially creating a playbook for how to approach the adaptation of office buildings into the future. • Enhance existing but under-used public spaces including squares, green spaces and hidden spaces. Employ a light touch approach to improvements with the re-use of materials and furniture. • Improve the environmental performance of existing buildings as part of re-purposing, to ensure they remain attractive in the long term. • Identify those existing buildings that represent significant re-use challenges and consider future options. Re-use precedents: The Foundry commercial and community use building in Vauxhall (image courtesy of Architecture 00); Re- Tuna shopping mall in Sweden (image courtesy of Lina Östling); refurbished Faculty of History, Cambridge; and innovation and workspace in former Urania cinema building in Zagreb (image courtesy of Studio 3LHD and Jure Živković). 32 Good things already happening • The Charter Building is a great example of how a large format office building can be re-purposed - into a successful flexible work space in the heart of the town centre. • The Piazza has seen investment into the historic buildings to create a new, interesting, attractive destination. Further investment and occupiers are needed to restore this area’s vibrancy. • Randall Place Apartments sensitively adapted the building of a former art-Deco department store to create new home. Case study: Urania Cinema • The Urania Cinema in Zagreb has been transformed from its former cinema use into a series of public spaces that are used for cultural events and small offices. The building has kept its original structure but has been adapted to suit the needs of the immediate community and market. The project has successfully integrated new flexible, cultural uses into the existing historic fabric. This is an effective precedent for considering the future of the former Regal Cinema in Uxbridge. Fig 3.3: Existing assets to be celebrated and/or their use intensified 33 Strategic move 3.5 Re-purpose office blocks outside of the core A large part of re-purposing in the town centre will be a focus on office buildings. Given the volume of office stock in Uxbridge, a strong strategy is needed. This strategic move is about considering the future of the large footprint office blocks outside of the centre’s core, in order to adapt to the current market and strengthen the town’s economic position. This includes the following: • Re-purpose the economy to support the office market at the heart of the town centre. • Protect the area’s ‘best’ office stock (i.e. assets that are high quality, flexible, well-located and meet changing occupier needs) while allowing the selective release of less appropriate stock. • Support existing office buildings within good proximity of the tube station and car parks (such as Charter House and Belmont House). • Allow underused office blocks outside of this zone to re-purpose to other uses (such as community services, educational uses and residential flats), as long as support is provided to relocate existing tenants into other office blocks in the area. A criteria based approach will be established to determine which office blocks should be retained or re-purposed/re-developed. For each block a range of factors will be considered such as the existing vacancy rate, quality, EPC rating and potential for refurbishment. The most important criteria will, however , be the building’s proximity to the tube station given the area around this node is likely to be the most attractive in the town centre from a market demand perspective. Maintaining a core of office stock in this zone will also be important for supporting town centre vitality during the working week, particularly during the daytime and early evening. Fig 3.4: Plan showing the proposed strategy to support office stock in proximity to the tube station 34 PRECEDENT: Angel Building, London The building was previously a 1980s post-modern office block, given a new life and look by AHMM. The development includes new uses including a public house, cafe, art spaces and flexible working spaces as well as commercial office spaces. It has responded to the changing markets and brought a new type of visitor to the building aside from office workers. Angel Building has activated previously bare frontages, improved the public realm and widened the pavement width to improve the pedestrian experience. Sustainability principles are key to this project. Two examples are the structure and the wrapping. The original concrete structure has been retained and extended to save embodied carbon. It has also been wrapped in new glazing, to create a new look and aid with innovative heating solutions. In total, the project has saved 7,400 tons of embodied carbon dioxide, while providing 40 per cent more functional space than in its previous state. Images- © AHMM Architects 35 3.6 Principle 3.7 Diversify the offer The strategy should be about creating reasons for people to visit and spend time in the town centre beyond meeting their day-to-day needs - with a focus on fun, leisure, culture, creativity. This principle is about trying to make the town centre fit for the future and enhancing the evening and night time offering. This is a priority that came directly from the community engagement, from people of all ages. It will involve the following: • Introduce more leisure uses, to allow activities in the centre beyond shopping. • Explore scope for cultural uses as well as establish events programme, in coordination with the BID and Chamber of Commerce. • Expand the breadth of food and drink - support independent restaurants and food outlets, embrace non-alcohol based food and beverage. This is especially important for young people and university students; as discovered by the community engagement findings. • Introduce more free events and activities - the vision should identify spaces and intervene to make them work. • Emphasise the library function and former Regal cinema as key cultural nodes in the town centre. • Embrace universities as part of the town centre - explore opportunities for Brunel University to have a town centre presence in the form of an Innovation Hub (this would require c. 2,000-3,500 sqm). 36 Retirement co-ho u s i n g , Chipping BarnetRetirement co-ho u s i n g , Chipping Barnet Tem porary work spaces by M e a n w hile Space, Wood Green Tem porary work spaces by M e a n w hile Space, Wood Green University buil d i n g , Manchester University buil d i n g , Manchester Residential neighbourhood, S to c k h olm Residential neighbourhood, S to c k h olm Self Space, m e n t a l health careSelf Space, m e n t a l health care Royal Festival H all, South Bank Royal Festival H all, South Bank F &B and retail, Bracknell F &B and retail, Bracknell W aterside Park housin g , N e wham W aterside Park housin g , N e wham Pla y g ro u n d and leisure, Peckham Levels Pla y g ro u n d and leisure, Peckham Levels Fig 3.5: Diagram showing the potential uses to be encouraged for different parts of the town centre Leisure, retail and culture Retail, service and community Employment and residential Commercial and residential Civic, community and social Image source: © Jan Kattein Architects Image source: © Luke O’Donovan and PTEa Image source: © Alice Giddings, Metro Image source: © Ewan Munro Good things already happening • The Love Uxbridge BID has held a programme of highly popular events in the town centre, illustrating the demand for these types of activities. • At the eastern end of The Chimes, the former Debenhams unit is earmarked for new leisure uses. This is planned to include a range of family leisure activities. • Over the last couple of years the High Street has seen the introduction of food and drink outlets that are less alcohol-focused, such as the various waffle outlets and Bubble Tea shops. Case study: Peckham Levels • Peckham Levels is a major creative and cultural hub that was formerly an underused multi-storey car park. The building now provides a huge diversity in uses from a children’s play area, to SME offices to a 3D printing lab. The benefits of the project include over 450 new jobs, over 20% of studios rented below market price as well as boosting the area’s cultural identity and local economy. Peckham Levels is a strong example of the provision of new uses, diversification of a town centre’s offer , within the parameters of an existing building to support the circular economy. Stre a t h a m Space Project Stre a t h a m Space Project Image source: © Nick Caville, Fuse Architects 37 Strategic move 3.8 Create a focus for leisure and culture A strong message from community engagement is that as part of the diversification of the town centre people would like to see a much enhanced leisure and cultural offer . This strategic move is about considering a shift in the offer for the eastern end of the High Street towards this leisure and culture demand. This will evolve the High Street offer so it is fit for the future, and better reflects rapidly changing consumer demand for ‘experiences’ and attracts a broader audience. The strategic move involves the following: • Establish new leisure and cultural uses in the town centre. • Focus these uses on the southern half of the High Street and The Piazza. • Support planned new uses in the former Debenhams unit. • Re-invigorate The Piazza and link across to a revitalised Civic Centre forecourt for events. • Adapt the former Regal Cinema into a new leisure/ cultural venue. • Support existing F&B, leisure and cultural uses on the High Street in this section through inward investment and licensing, enabling a vibrant and diverse daytime and evening economy with leisure uses that support physical and mental health. By concentrating new leisure and cultural activities in this location a new role and vitality can be established for the southern section of the high street. It would build on many of the uses already there and coming soon, and would be supported by investment in existing public spaces to support outdoor events and activities. Fig 3.6: Diagram showing the spatial extent of the proposed leisure and cultural use focus 38 PRECEDENT: Gravity at Southside, Wandsworth Gravity is an innovative mixed-leisure facility that includes bowling, various games, mini golf, go karting and more all integrated with new technologies. It provides 100,000 sqft over three floors. The facility appeals to people of all ages including families and young people. It is versatile in its ability to attract children and families during the day with activities and live music, and young adults at night with a cocktail bar . Gravity takes up a significant amount of space in Wandsworth’s Southside shopping centre in previously vacant units. It has addressed vacancy issues, provided a new type of leisure activity as well as attracting more people into Wandsworth town centre. Images sourced from Gravity - copyright permission requested 39 Key issue 2: Better serving local communities 40 Key issue 2: Better serving local communities 41 3.9 Better serving local communities A town centre that addresses its local population The baseline analysis found that the town centre could serve its local population better than it currently does. It was clear that the range of uses in the town centre has not adjusted to the changes in catchment population over the last 10-20 years, nor to some of the wider market trends. The community engagement confirmed that while much of the local population is loyal to the centre, they do not feel it meets their needs fully. Addressing under-represented uses Produce, health, beauty and professional services, as well as culture and leisure uses are currently under- represented in the town centre. When compared to other similar sized town centres in the wider area, Uxbridge has significantly less of these uses and services. The town centre is the most accessible node locally and therefore is a very logical location to boost community services such as health care. The opportunity to establish an NHS health hub in the town centre should be embraced to help meet local demand and ease access to the range of NHS services. Diversifying the offer to meet local ethnic and cultural demographics There is a healthy diversity in offer of independent food shops along Windsor Street and in distinct areas such as the Arcade. Providing a variety in offer of the retail stores and services to better suit the demographics of all local communities would strengthen the town centre’s ability to be a destination for all. Changing lifestyle trends as well as changing demographics in the residential neighbourhoods around Uxbridge mean there is much greater demand for evening economy activities that do not involve Fig 3.7: Age profile of Uxbridge Town Centre’s immediate catchment (2020) Fig 3.8: Population living within the centre by Town Centre (2011 and 2020) 42 3.9 Better serving local communities 6 Neighbourhood Development Neighbourhood Development Summary The cornerstone of this new operating model is the development of 6 Integrated Neighbourhood Teams co-located in 6 Integrated Neighbourhood Hubs. 1. Integrated Neighbourhood Teams  We propose to fully implement the recommendations of the Fuller Stocktake and create integrated neighbourhood teams which are built from Primary Care and which adopt a population health management approach to tackling health inequalities. These integrated teams will have 3 core functions: 1. Provision of Same Day Urgent Primary Care for people with non complex needs who regularly seek same day access to Primary Care (33% of all GP attendances) delivered through 3 Super Hubs. 2. Proactive Care through risk stratification, case finding and enhanced case management for the 6,000 Hillingdon population cohort most at risk with an emphasis on multi morbidity/ Frailty in the first instance delivered via our Care Connection Teams and Care Home Support Service 3. Preventative and anticipatory Care for a range of population health JSNA priorities with an emphasis on Hypertension, Anxiety/Depression and Obesity working through neighbourhood community champions and associated mobilisation of community assets.  The 6 Integrated Neighbourhood Teams in Hillingdon will be built upon the 6 existing Primary Care Networks. In addition to Primary Care, the teams will include integrated Community Nursing, Care Connection Teams, Care Home Support, MSK Therapy, Podiatry, ARRS Therapists, Community Mental Health and aligned Adult Social Care. Each Neighbourhood Team will have access to a third sector offer and mobilised community assets relevant to that neighbourhood.  We have agreed that each Neighbourhood Team will have a Joint Leadership Team with the PCN CD as the Clinical Director which is representative of the HHCP Partnership and supported by an ‘employment passport’ that will enable staff to work flexibly across care setting.  We are exploring options to provide integrated neighbourhood teams with a common digital record and task allocation platform. Community Physical Health • Community Nursing • Care Connection Teams • Care Home Support • Integrated Therapies General Practice 3 x Neighbourhood SDPC Hubs • Same Day UC for Non Complex Patients • Diagnostics inc Bloods, X-ray, ECG, Swabs • OPAT Community Mental Health Hubs • CMHT, PCMH • Psychology • Psychotherapy • Employment Proactive & Anticipatory Care, Whole Population Health Same Day Urgent Care 6 x Integrated Neighbourhoods Third Sector and Community Assets Community Social Care Pharmacy, Dentistry & Optometry drinking alcohol. Uxbridge is well located to meet this significant demand. Supporting bus travel as a key transport mode Uxbridge’s location on the boundary between London and South Buckinghamshire means in many instances buses are the most important public transport service. There is a need to ensure the town centre embraces this reality and makes arriving, travelling and interchanging by bus a smooth and attractive experience. Many local people expressed concern about the quality of the Bakers Road interchange, in particular its safety after dark. Investing in civic pride Local people are loyal and invested in Uxbridge town centre, but many have found it increasingly difficult to feel proud of the town centre over recent years. Residents and local businesses would like to see investment into interventions that will support civic pride such as event spaces and an events programme, communication and promotion of activities, signage and maps. Meeting the needs for a growing population The baseline analysis highlighted the comparatively small population that live in the town centre compared to other town centres such as Watford or Ealing. There are significant housing needs locally and the town centre could offer a great location for sustainable living. Some residential development has come forward in recent years, but there is scope for significantly more. Any new housing development in the centre should be closely informed by the nature of housing needs, ensuring it provides the best quality housing in the most appropriate locations for the people that can most benefit from a town centre location. Fig 3.9: NHS Diagram outlining the planned strategy for health care across Hillingdon, with the scope for Uxbridge to be one of three Super Hubs in the borough “I know that footfall is up, but that doesn’t necessarily convert to spend. And I think we need as a town centre to strengthen our retail and hospitality offer. Because I think people are here, but getting them to part with their money … So we need to make sure that offer is here in the town centre and they don’t go elsewhere to spend the money.” (Mike Crane, Uxbridge BID) “One of the things I would focus on is making Uxbridge more exciting. Obviously, there are shops that are easy to use but how can you make it more exciting?” (Andy Sharma, Hillingdon Chamber of Commerce) 43 3.10 Principle 3.11 Better serve residents’ needs The town centre must meet the day-to-day needs of the local population. It is about making sure people can buy food, see their GP, visit the bank, get their medication, borrow a book etc. This will give Uxbridge Town Centre a new role for its local communities, being able to fulfil more of their daily needs. This will involve: • Re-orientate the mix to make it more locally focused and inclusive. • Address under-representation of produce, health, beauty and professional services, culture and leisure uses. • Continue to diversify what is on offer in Uxbridge to meet local ethnic and cultural demographics. • Introduce more community uses, in particular establish an NHS Super Hub within the town centre (the NHS Super Hub requires 2,000 sqm). • Address the lack of homes in the town centre and provide new housing to serve local population’s needs. • Reduce the extent of core retail uses - consider defining areas and frontages that make sense for core retail, and let less viable locations move away from retail use to find more suitable functions. Community precedents: Town centre living in Hounslow; F&B with local market in Southwark; refurbished Westgate shopping centre in Oxford; and reworked retail and leisure in Walthamstow (all images © Allies and Morrison). 44 Good things already happening • St Andrew’s Park and Randall Place Apartments are new residential developments in and on the edge of the town centre that have brought new residents into the town centre. • The NHS is planning to restructure healthcare throughout the borough, and sees Uxbridge Town Centre as a good location for a Superhub facility. • Ossulton Court Almshouses to the west of the town centre is a high quality development of apartments for local elderly people. Case study: Lampton Road • Lampton Road, Hounslow is an example of integrated town centre living, on the site of an outdated and inefficient 1970s building. The homes are affordable, well integrated with the surrounding blocks, well connected by foot into Hounslow centre and have a good level of greenery. The homes come in different forms and have provided housing for a diversity of household types in a central location, strengthening the local economy. This is a positive example when considering the potential for Uxbridge town centre to cater for a range of housing needs in a high quality format. Fig 3.10: Diagram showing roles of the broad zones within the town centre 45 Strategic move 3.12 Establish the Civic Centre as a community hub A strong message that came through from the community engagement was the need to better provide for community uses and services in the town centre. An equally common comment was how people found the Civic Centre to be an unwelcoming building and space. This strategic move is about reconsidering and applying ambition to the future role of the Civic Centre. This involves the following: • Establish the town centre as a the focus for community services and activities with the Civic Centre playing a crucial role as the focus for civic activities. • Opening up the Civic Centre campus as a welcoming hub - bringing in more services beyond Council departments and reworking the forecourt and reception area to be much more community orientated. • Opportunity to incorporate a new NHS Superhub as part of this hub either within a vacant campus building or a large unit on the High Street. • Use of vacant high street spaces for community uses - groups, activities, services, attractions, and encourage new community ideas such as a mending and upcycling hub. • Revamping the Civic Centre forecourt space on the High Street into a vibrant community space would re- establish it as the focus for larger events and could include outdoor cinema, outdoor theatre and music, as well as a complementary external market space to the Pavilions. Fig 3.11: Plan showing the focus for the community hub around the Civic Centre 46 PRECEDENT: Barking Town Square Strategic move 3.12 Establish the Civic Centre as a community hub Barking Town Square was in need of a welcoming civic space, as previously the space was used as a parking space. It has been transformed into a attractive, human-scale area with a strong identity. There are high-quality planters and street furniture which allow for sitting and dwelling as well as a large space that is now used for public arts and events. This has improved the interface between Barking Town Hall and the public realm - a great precedent for the Civic Centre forecourt and surrounds. Image credit: muf architecture / art 47 Civic Centre Square Relatively modest interventions to the Civic Centre forecourt could have a significant impact in both opening up the Civic Centre as a welcoming community hub and creating a space for cultural events and community activities. The interventions could include: • Rationalising some of the planters to open up the space - creating clearer sight lines to entrances and a more flexible and larger open area for events. • Introducing a lightweight structure at the western edge of the square to provide a covered cafe and community space fronting onto the space. • Introducing banner posts along the edge of the square to promote and advertise events. Fig 3.12: Illustrative sketch of how the Civic Centre forecourt could be transformed 48 Fig 3.13: Existing view of Civic Centre forecourt 49 Strategic move 3.13 Introduce new residential into the town centre Introducing new residential into the town centre creates the opportunity to support the centre at all times of day and bring a new community into the town centre. This strategic move involves: • Encourage residential homes into the town centre on a more significant scale than has happened to date. • Introduce high quality and well-designed schemes in the short-medium term to set the tone and ensure town centre living is well considered before adding volumes of new homes. • Grow the residential population within the town centre boundary providing for a range of housing needs including: • Flats with good private and communal open space; • Student residential developments; • Smaller house types, not just flats - such as mews and narrow townhouses; • Retirement communities; and • Specialist products - in particular affordable/social housing. • Ensure enhanced links are delivered to properly link emerging residential developments such as St Andrews into the town centre. There are a number of vacant or underused buildings that would offer good opportunities for well designed conversions to residential. Existing buildings such as the former Paralex building and The Atrium could be converted to residential to serve community needs. Other buildings such as Fountain’s Mill and Beaufort House would offer great scope as student residential conversions for post-graduate accommodation. Ossulton Court Al m s h ouses, Uxbridge Ossulton Court Al m s h ouses, Uxbridge Town centre h o u s i ng, PeckhamTown centre h o u s i ng, Peckham Town centre ho u s i n g, Earl’s CourtTown centre ho u s i n g, Earl’s Court W aterside Park h o u sing, Newham W aterside Park h o u sing, Newham Fig 3.14: Plan showing the ambition to explore the introduction of new homes in the town centre Image source: © Burgess Estates - copyright permission requested Image source: © Peter Barber - copyright permission requested Image source: © Allies and Morrison Image source: © Allies and Morrison 50 PRECEDENT: Lampton Road, Hounslow Images © Allies and Morrison Lampton Road, Hounslow is a housing development on a Council owned site adjacent to the town centre. A series of housing blocks arranged around courtyard spaces create medium - high density homes next to Hounslow town centre. A range of different housing typologies enables the scheme to cater for a wide range of households and housing needs, all with private outdoor space. Each of the blocks represent different precedents that could be introduced on infill or redevelopment sites in the town centre. 51 Fountain’s Mill The Fountain’s Mill building is a great heritage asset, but one that has sadly been vacant for some time. The re-use of this building could significantly enhance the northern end of the High Street and help support the green link connection along the Fray River . The following could be considered: • The Mill building would make a great home for student residential provision, creating space for post-graduates from local universities with the scope to have communal facilities at ground floor . • There would be scope to introduce a sensitive extension in the yard space, fronting on to the High Street to extend the use of the site. • The piece of leftover land on the north side of the Mill building could be converted into a new pocket park that would set up the link along the Fray River . Short term residential potential The conversion of existing and underused buildings in the town centre could deliver much needed housing in the short term. For example, together , the Fountain’s Mill site and Beaufort House could deliver around 120 post graduate student residential units. Other buildings could deliver much needed residential homes. For example, the conversions of the former Paralex building, The Atrium and Harman House together could deliver over 390 new residential flats alongside refurbished office space and community uses. Just these five sites illustrate the potential to realise town centre living in the short to medium term. Fig 3.15: Illustrative sketch showing how the Fountain’s Mill building could be restored and extended as a student residential hub in the town centre 52 Fig 3.16: Existing view 53 Strategic move 3.14 Future proof public transport accessibility A key focus for future proofing public transport in Uxbridge is to remodel the bus interchange as an efficient and attractive through street. This will release turning space to create a new public square and a set of legible and easily accessible bus stops. The existing bus garage would be relocated to a new all electric bus garage facility away from the town. Alongside remodelling the bus interchange, there is also a need to re-plan existing bus routes to improve the coverage around the town centre and wider communities not currently well-served by bus services. Across the town centre there will be improvements to bus legibility, take up and reliability of services through the introduction of orbital bus stops and integrated cycle facilities (hire/stands) and information hubs around the outside of town centre, alongside improved walking and cycling routes from these hubs to the core. Where possible, additional bus routes would be extended and created that better link up the town centre to the wider region including the Home Counties, Brunel University, health care, schools and leisure facilities. Bus shelter i n M a nchester, UKBus shelter i n M a nchester, UK ‘Bee Stops’ i n L eicester, UK‘Bee Stops’ i n L eicester, UK Bus stops in Bourg - e n-Bresse, FranceBus stops in Bourg - e n-Bresse, France Fig 3.17: Plan showing the proposed bus orbital route and town centre interchange Image require copyright permission to be secured

Text extracted automatically from the PDF, so layout, tables and images are not shown. Only the start of this long document is shown here. Open the original PDF on LB Hillingdon’s website.

Relevant Select Committee
Expiry date for any scrutiny call-in / date decision can be implemented (if no call-in)
Officer(s) to action
Directorate
Classification
6. Safeguarding Partnership Annual Report PDF 454 KB
RESOLVED: That the Cabinet: 1) Notes the Annual Report and is assured that the partnership continues to provide leadership and scrutiny of the safeguarding arrangements for Hillingdon residents. 2) Notes the way in which the partnership has responded to the challenges posed by changing local, national and international contexts. 3) Notes the strategic priorities for safeguarding for 2024-25. Reasons for decision Cabinet received a report on the adult and children safeguarding partnerships’ performance over the year and the safeguarding priorities for the year ahead. The Cabinet Member for Health & Social Care informed Cabinet of the work undertaken by partnerships to protect residents, adults with care and support needs and vulnerable children. The Cabinet Member thanked Susie Gladish, the report author, and read a statement from the Independent Scrutineer praising the strong partnership and leadership in safeguarding arrangements. The report highlighted ongoing engagement with consultation groups, the identification of common concerns such as neglect and physical abuse and the collaboration with various agencies like the LBH MASH team, Hillingdon Hospital, and the Police. Key initiatives included addressing structural inequalities, suicide prevention and exploitation. The Cabinet Member emphasised the successes in partnership working and urged everyone to review the comprehensive report. The Cabinet Member for Children, Families & Education also spoke on the report in respect of the children’s aspect, highlighting the partnership’s efforts to meet the increasing complexity of needs for vulnerable children in Hillingdon. The Cabinet Member noted there was a rise in emotional and psychological needs among children and mentioned the Council’s outstanding rating from the recent Ofsted inspection, which also recognised strong partnership working. The annual report emphasised collaborative efforts to adopt a child-centred approach and the work of various subgroups, including those focused on child sexual abuse, contextual safeguarding and educational safeguarding. The vision for the partnership was to ensure every child feels safe, healthy, and has opportunities to thrive. The Cabinet Member thanked the officers and partnership organisations for their immense work in safeguarding children. The Leader of the Council praised the report and the effective partnership, acknowledging the often, unrecognised efforts to protect vulnerable residents. Alternative options considered and rejected None. Relevant Select Committee Children, Families & Education Health & Social Care Expiry date for any scrutiny call-in / date decision can be implemented (if no call-in) This matter is not for call-in, as noting only. Officer(s) to action Suzi Gladish Directorate Children’s Services Classification Public - The report and any background papers relating to this decision by the Cabinet are available to view on the Council's website or by visiting the Civic Centre, Uxbridge.
📄 Safeguarding Partnership Annual Report PDF 454 KB
Read the text of this document (6 pages)
Cabinet report – 10 October 2024 (Part 1 Public) SAFEGUARDING PARTNERSHIP ANNUAL REPORT Cabinet Members & Portfolios Cllr Jane Palmer - Cabinet Member for Health and Social Care Cllr Susan O’Brien - Cabinet Member for Children, Families and Education Responsible Officers Corporate Director of Children’s Services (DCS) Corporate Director of Adult Social Care & Health (DASS) Report Author & Directorate Suzi Gladish Children’s Services Directorate Papers with report Safeguarding Partnership Annual Report Easy Read Annual Report You Said, We Did, What Next? HEADLINES Summary The Safeguarding Annual Report summarises the work undertaken by Hillingdon Safeguarding Partnership to support and safeguard Hillingdon's residents: adults with care and support needs and vulnerable children and their families. The report summarises the work of the strategic partnership in 2023-2024, providing an overview of progress against the agreed priorities, the impact of learning from practice, and the findings of quality assurance activity. Putting our Residents First Delivering on the Council Strategy 2022-2026 This report supports our ambition for residents / the Council of: Be / feel safe from harm This report supports our commitments to residents of: Thriving, Healthy Households Financial Cost There are no additional financial implications arising from this report. Select Committee Health and Social Care Select Committee Children, Families and Education Select Committee Ward(s) All Cabinet report – 10 October 2024 (Part 1 Public) RECOMMENDATIONS That the Cabinet: 1. Notes the Annual Report and is assured that the partnership continues to provide leadership and scrutiny of the safeguarding arrangements for Hillingdon residents.   2. Notes the way in which the partnership has responded to the challenges posed by changing local, national and international contexts.  3. Notes the strategic priorities for safeguarding for 2024-25.     Reasons for recommendation(s) To inform the Cabinet of the way in which safeguarding partnership performed the year before and which are the safeguarding priorities for the year ahead. Alternative options considered / risk management None Select Committee comments The Children, Families & Education has considered the Annual Report as part of their monitoring role of Council services and made the following comments: “The Select Committee welcomes this report, which provides comprehensive information in respect to the safeguarding of our children, young people and families. We acknowledge the hard work being undertaken by all partners. As the need for support increases, we would recommend that there continues to be a strong focus on capacity, clear communication and consistency across the partnership." SUPPORTING INFORMATION In September 2019 the Hillingdon Safeguarding Partnership arrangements were launched in line with the statutory requirements set out in the Children and Social Work Act 2017 and Working Together to Safeguard Children 2018 . In December 2023 an update to Working Together to Safeguard Children was issued .  The local authority shares equal responsibility with our statutory partners, the NWL NHS Integrated Care Partnership Group and Metropolitan Police, to safeguard children and young people.         The Care Act 2014 placed a statutory duty on each Safeguarding Adults Board to produce an Annual Report, outlining the work undertaken to achieve its strateg ic objectives, the work of each member to implement the Safeguarding Adults Boards’ strategy and detailing the findings of any Safeguarding Adult Reviews and subsequent required actions.  Cabinet report – 10 October 2024 (Part 1 Public) In promoting this joint approach, both boards are scrutinised and held to account through the multiagency Executive Leadership Group. The group is chaired by a member of the NHS Northwest London Integrated Care Board and attended by the senior representatives of the safeguarding partners (Police and Local Authority).      The joint approach to safeguarding children and adults has been reinforced by the implementation of shared chairing arrangements across the three senior strategic Boards, with responsibility rotating through the three statutory partners on an annual basis.      The report provides an overview of the actions taken across the local partnership to prevent and respond to abuse, neglect, and self -neglect in the year 202 3-2024. It sets out how we have discharged our duties to ensure that we learn from practice and provide strategic leadership that strives to continuously develop safeguarding practice in the borough.   There is shared and equal responsibility for safeguarding between the three statutory partners, the Local Authority, Metropolitan Police Service and NHS North West London Integrated Care Board. This approach is reinforced by the rotation of chairing responsibility across the three senior strategic Boards, the Executive Leadership Group, Safeguarding Adults Board and Safeguarding Children Partnership Board.     2023-2024 marked another busy year for the Hillingdon Safeguarding Partnership. The Partnership has striven to meet an increase in complexity of need for those adults and children requiring safeguarding support and intervention. We have seen a particular r ise in the emotional and psychological needs of children, families, adults, and their carers. Many of our residents have experienced significant financial hardship due to the cost -of-living crisis with the associated stresses that this generates. This increase in complexity of need occurs in a context of increased pressure on safeguarding agencies, rising inflation, and the associated implications for public sector organisations providing services in a challenging financial context. Each of the statutory partners has navigated areas of challenge in respect of recruitment and retention, and restructure of services. This rise in need impacts across all sectors, including universal services like our schools and primary care, to those services providing targe ted and specialist support and intervention. In December 2023 the Department for Education published an update to ‘Working Together to Safeguard Children’. This is the underpinning Guidance for the Safeguarding Children Arrangements, with applicability to operational and strategic services, and to every agency working with children and families. We are in the process of identifying the Lead and Delegated Safeguarding Partners ahead of publishing an update to our 2019 Arrangements by the end of the calendar year. During the year 2023-2024 there was considerable scrutiny of local services. Our local authority children’s social care services were subject to Ofsted Inspection and graded as an Outstanding service, with specific recognition of the strengths in partnership working. The process of CQC inspection of Adult Social Care has been completed with reporting in the next financial year. The Metropolitan Police Service has responded to the findings of the Casey Review and HMICRFS Inspection of adolescent safeguarding services through the development of the New Met for London initiative. The CQC has also undertaken inspection Cabinet report – 10 October 2024 (Part 1 Public) of Maternity Services at the Hillingdon Hospital. These focussed inspections take place in a context of routine regulatory activity for our schools, residential services, and care providers. This year our Independent Scrutineer, Alan Caton OBE, was commissioned to review the effectiveness of our senior strategic boards: the Safeguarding Children’s Partnership Board, the Safeguarding Adults Board, and the Executive Leadership Group and to consi der the functioning of our safeguarding arrangements within statutory partners and relevant agencies. The Independent Scrutineer concluded that: ‘…there continues to be many strengths to the safeguarding arrangements for both children and adults across Hil lingdon. I have found a strong partnership that is open to scrutiny and challenge and one that strives to continually learn and improve practice… I have not come across any areas of poor practice or weaknesses in service provision… There is strong leadership from the ELG and a clear sense of joint and equal responsibility from the three safeguarding partners. The partnership is one that is built on high support, high challenge and where difficult conversations are encouraged.’ The Report sets out how the multiagency strategic partnership contributes to safeguarding practice in the Borough, outlining the progress made against the agreed priorities of the Safeguarding Partnership. Each priority has a dedicated subgroup, with an agreed plan of work that, broadly, seeks to develop practice using a framework of prevention, identification, and response.     Our approach to learning from practice through quality assurance, reflective and statutory review ensures that we focus on practice and system development t o reduce the risks of serious harm to adults or children. This includes direct engagement with frontline practitioners across the Partnership.     Identified learning informs our training provision with a diverse offer of newsletters, practice briefings, webinars, learning events and commissioned training available. We have continued to see increased engagement with professional development activity in the reporting year.      Strategic priorities for safeguarding for 2024-2025 The Safeguarding Children Partnership has identified the following priority areas    Child Sexual Abuse   Contextual Safeguarding   Education Safeguarding   The Safeguarding Adult Board has identified the following priority areas:   Neglect   Cuckooing and Exploitation Shared strategic priorities amongst the Council and partners are:   Practice Development Forum  Transitional Safeguarding Cabinet report – 10 October 2024 (Part 1 Public) Financial Implications This report details the work being undertaken by the Hillingdon Safeguarding Partnership and has no direct financial implications.  The costs of the Safeguarding function delivering the work are contained within existing resources. RESIDENT BENEFIT & CONSULTATION The benefit or impact upon Hillingdon residents, service users and communities? Hillingdon adults with care and support needs, vulnerable children and their families and carers remain safe, and the safeguarding partnership continues to respond effectively and efficiently to the needs of residents.   Consultation & Engagement carried out (or required) The Annual Report has been endorsed by the Safeguarding Children Partnership Board, The Safeguarding Adults Board, and the Executive Leadership Group.   CORPORATE CONSIDERATIONS Corporate Finance Corporate Finance have reviewed this report and concur with the Financial Implications set out above, noting that there are not direct financial implications associated with the recommendations in this report. Legal Legal Services confirm that the legal implications are included in the body of the report. Comments from other relevant service areas Comments and updates from various agencies with a role in safeguarding residents are included in the appended report. Cabinet report – 10 October 2024 (Part 1 Public) BACKGROUND PAPERS The Care and Support Statutory Guidance, Department of Health and Social Care,  October 2018 https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/care-act-statutory-guidance/care- and-support-statutory-guidance    The Care Act 2014 - http://www.legislation.gov.uk/ukpga/2014/23/section/43/enacted    Working Together to Safeguard Children, Department for Education, 2018/2023 https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/working-together-to-safeguard-children--2    The Children and Social Work Act 2017 https://www.legislation.gov.uk/ukpga/2017/16/contents/enacted

Text extracted automatically from the PDF, so layout, tables and images are not shown. Open the original PDF on LB Hillingdon’s website.

📄 Hillingdon Safeguarding Partnership Annual Report 23-24 , item 6. PDF 1 MB
Read the text of this document (56 pages)
Annual Report 2023-2024 ‘…there continues to be many strengths to the safeguarding arrangements for both children and adults across Hillingdon. I have found a strong partnership that is open to scrutiny and challenge and one that strives to continually learn and improve practice… I have not come across any areas of poor practice or weaknesses in service provision… There is strong leadership from the ELG and a clear sense of joint and equal responsibility from the three safeguarding partners. The partnership is one that is built on high support, high challenge and where difficult conversations are encouraged.’ (Alan Caton, OBE, Independent Scrutineer December 2023) Hillingdon Safeguarding Partnership Annual Report 2023-2024 2 | P a g e Table of Contents 1 Impact Statement 3 2 Hillingdon Safeguarding Partnership: Safeguarding Arrangements 5 3 The Voice of the Person 6 4 Safeguarding Priorities 10 4.1 Children’s Priorities 10 4.2 Shared Priorities 12 4.3 Adult Priorities 14 5 Learning from Practice 16 6 Quality Assurance 18 7 Multiagency Safeguarding Training 21 8 London Borough of Hillingdon Children and Young People Services 24 9 London Borough of Hillingdon Adult’s Services 31 10 NHS North West London Integrated Care Board 34 11 Metropolitan Police Service (MPS) 35 12 Agency Contributions 41 12.1 Central and North West London NHS Foundation Trust (CNWL) 41 12.2 Local Authority's Designated Officer (LADO) and Education Safeguarding 44 12.3 Children’s Rights and Participation Service 49 12.4 The Hillingdon Hospital 50 12.5 Domestic Abuse Steering Executive, Safer Hillingdon Partnership 51 12.6 London Fire Brigade 52 12.7 The Churchill Clementine Hospital 52 12.8 The Probation Service 52 13 Priorities for 2024-2025 55 Hillingdon Safeguarding Partnership Annual Report 2023-2024 3 | P a g e 1 Impact Statement 2023-2024 marked another busy year for the Hillin gdon Safeguarding Partnership. The Partnership has striven to meet an increase in complexity of need for those adult s and children requiring safeguarding support and intervention. We have seen a particular rise in the emotional and psychological needs of children, families , adults, and their carers . Many of our residents have experienced significant financial hardship due to the cost-of-living crisis with the associated stresses that this generates. This increase in complexity of need occurs in a context of increased pressure on safeguarding agencies, rising inflation, and the associated implications for public sector organisations providing services in a challenging financial context. Each of the statutory partners has navigated areas of challenge in respect of recruitment and retention, and restructure of services. This rise in need impacts across all sectors, including universal services like our schools and primary care, to those services providing targeted and specialist support and intervention. In December 2023 the Department for Education published an update to ‘Working Together to Safeguard Children’. This is the underpinning Guidance for the Safeguarding Children Arrangements, with applicability to operational and strategic services, and to every agency working with children and families. We are in the process of identifying the Lead and Delegated Safeguarding Partners ahead of publishing an update to our 2019 Arrangements by the end of the calendar year. We have implemented a business plan for the Safeguarding Children Partnership, and reviewed and updated the existing plan for Safeguarding Adults Board. Th e Business Plans are complimentary and ensure that the strategic focus of the Partnership is maintained, and we can effectively monitor our progress against the agreed objectives. This necessitates close working arrangements with the other related strategic boards, including our Community Safety Partnership, Youth Justice Board and Health and Wellbeing Board. To this end, a Chair’s Network meeting has been implemented that enables the Chairs of each to meet regularly and ensures th at we are coordinate approaches, principles and priorities. During the year there has been considerable scrutiny of local services. O ur local authority children’s social care services were subject to Ofsted Inspection and graded as an Outstanding service , with specific recognition of the strengths in partnership working. The process of CQC inspection of Adult Social Care is underway and will conclude in the next financial year , with preparation also underway for the Local Area Partnership Inspection for SEND and Alternative Provisions expected in 2024 -25. The Metropolitan Police Service has res ponded to the findings of the Casey Review and HMICRFS Hillingdon Safeguarding Partnership Annual Report 2023-2024 4 | P a g e Inspection of adolescent safeguarding services through the development of the New Met for London initiative. The CQC has also undertaken inspection of Maternity Services at the Hillingdon Hospital . These focussed inspections take place in a context of routine regulatory activity for our schools, residential services, and care providers. This year our Independent Scrutineer, Alan Caton OBE, was commissioned to review the effectiveness of our senior strategic boards: the Safeguarding Children’s Partnership Board, the Safeguarding Adults Board, and the Executive Leadership Group and to consider the functioning of our safeguarding arrangements within statutory partners and relevant agencies. The scrutiny process is structured in line with the ‘Six Steps for Independent Scrutiny’ developed by the University of Bedfordshire. Alan was also able t o hear directly from children and adults with lived experience , highlighting that ‘engagement with children, young people and adults is a real strength in Hillingdon’. The full outcome letter, with areas for further consideration, is published on the Partnership’s websites and has been widely shared. The letter concludes that: ‘…there continues to be many strengths to the safeguarding arrangements for both children and adults across Hillingdon. I have found a strong partnership that is open to scrutiny and challenge and one that strives to continually learn and improve practice … I have not come across any areas of poor practice or weaknesses in service provision… There is strong leadership from the ELG and a clear sense of joint and equal responsibility from the three safeguarding partners. The partnership is one that is built on high support, high challenge and where difficult conversations are encouraged.’ (Alan Caton, OBE, December 2023) Hillingdon Safeguarding Partnership Annual Report 2023-2024 5 | P a g e 2 Hillingdon Safeguarding Partnership: Safeguarding Arrangements This report provides an overview of the activity of Hillingdon’s Safeguarding Partnership. The report seeks to provide assurance around the effectiveness of our local safeguarding arrangements , and to evidence the impact of these arrangements in ensuring the safety of Hillingdon residents irrespective of age. The Safeguarding Partnership Implementation Unit provides support and drive to both the Adult’s and Children’s Partnerships. A key focus of the team is to facilitate, develop and maintain links between the Safeguarding Children Partnership and The Safeguarding Adults Board. The team also seeks to develop links and coordinate delivery with the other relevant strategic boards across Hillingdon and Pan-London. The main engine of the safeguarding arrangements for children is the Safeguarding Children Partnership Board and, for adults, the Safeguarding Adults Board. The Boards have oversight of safeguarding practice and performance, resolving issues as they arise. Where this is not possible, the issue will be escalated to the relevant organisation(s) via the Implementation Unit and if the individual organisation(s) still cannot resolve the matter, it is escalated to the Executive Leadership Group. To ensure the success, coordination, and impact of the shared arrangements we have a joint Executive Leadership Group (ELG) that provides governance, leadership, oversight and challenge to both Boards. The ELG consists of the Local Authority's Chief Executive, the Chief Nurse of Hillingdon NHS Integrated Care Partnership, and the Metropolitan Police Service BCU Commander. This group has joint and equal responsibility for safeguarding in Hillingdon. The statutory partners share responsibility for funding the Safeguarding Arrangements, with a tripartite agreement in place in respect of statutory reviews. We are working on meaningful inclusion of Education leads at a strategic level in line with the updates to Working Together to Safeguard Children , with a focussed subgroup well embedded, and representation at the Safeguarding Children Partnership. Due to the complexity of education as a sector representation at the Executive Level requires careful consideration due to the need to reflect the broad range of providers across the sector. Each partner is subject to internal scrutiny in accordance with their internal governance structures. In addition to this, the ELG has commissioned regular independent scrutiny of our s afeguarding arrangements for both children and adults to provide reassurance of the effectiveness of the arrangements and independent critical challenge and appraisal that supports learning and future development. Hillingdon Safeguarding Partnership Annual Report 2023-2024 6 | P a g e To reflect the vision of joint and equal responsibility the Boards are chaired by a representative of the three statutory partners. From September 2022 responsibility for chairing the Executive Leadership Group passed to the Integrated Care Partnership, for the Children’s Partnership Board to the Metropolitan Police Service, and for the Safeguarding Adults Board to the Local Authority. The Boards steer learning and development for the safeguarding environment across the London Borough of Hillingdon, and are informed by independent scrutiny, quality assurance activities, and subgroups. 3 The Voice of the Person In 2022 our Communication and Engagement Strategy was agreed . This document sets out how the Safeguarding Partnership interacts with individuals in receipt of services, the wider community, and professionals. One of the cornerstones of our local arrangements is an emphasis on understanding the lived experience of children, adults, their families, and carers. This ensures that we understand the impact of our work and provides a steer for future areas of priority and focus. The Strategy is scheduled for update in the next financial year, this will solidify the central emphasis of coproduction and consultation with adults, children and young people, and their parents and carers to inform strategic work. Over the last year all partners have worked to embed the findings of our coproduced review ‘Exploring Practice: The Voice of the Person’. It is important to highlight that this is not an area of work that can ever be completed, to facilitate meaningful engagement partners agencies all continuously strive to ensure that services are informed by feedback from those who receive them. This includes respecting the efforts of those children, young people and adults who generously shared their expertise and experience to inform our strategic work , and communicating this respect through providing routine updates about what has been achieved, and w here this has not been possible, why this is, and what our next steps are. One significant impact of this work was an approach from a care experienced young person, Max, who wished to share her lived experience of mental health difficulties to raise awareness. We built on this through also seeking input from adults and carers with shared wisdom and made learning from lived experience the focus of World Mental Health Day 2023 . This resource was shared across the Partnership and demonstrates the power of meaningful coproduction. The Partnership is unable to do this without the generosity of those ch ildren and adults who agreed to contribute, our thanks go to Angela, Ron, John and Max. Hillingdon Safeguarding Partnership Annual Report 2023-2024 7 | P a g e In response to feedback from our children’s consultations groups that they would like to know who strategic leads ‘actually are’ we held a ‘You Said: We Did’ event in October. This was attended by our Independent Scrutineer, and senior representatives of the local authority, police, Central and North West London NHS Foundation Trust and Hillingdon Hospital. The aim of the event was to support children, young people and adults to build relationships and links. Three young people presented their feedback directly, with updates provided by the strategic leads around the actions their agencies had taken in response. To further amplify the views of children and adults with lived experience we recorded videos of them sharing the findings of the reflective review and delivering their feedback in their own words , using their own voices. These were widely shared across the safeguarding networks and are available to any practitioner working in the Borough. A member of the Safeguarding Partnership Team was invited to deliver a session on co production, lived experience and Making Safeguarding Personal as part of the Pan London Safeguarding Adults Week Conference. Over the course of the year, we have continued to engage with the various consultation groups facilitated by the council, with members of the team supporting the activities of the Children’s Participation Team and attending the Learning Disability Partnership Board and Older People’s Forums. In March this culminated with formal updates about the work that has been achieved across the partnership in response to the reflective review. This was adapted according to the age and needs of children and young people, with support from Children’s Residential Services to ensure that it was accessible to children with disabilities. Children and adults have felt listened to and valued through this approach: ‘This is amazing I truly feel empowered as I read all of it and felt so heard and so much a part of it. I’m so glad that this is going this way onwards and upwards’. (Care Experienced Young Person) “May I also say how much I value your person-centred approach to safeguarding. It is really reassuring to know that lived experience is being given such prominence. As you know, this hasn’t been my experience, but this seems a really positive step forward.” (Adult with Lived Experience) Hillingdon Safeguarding Partnership Annual Report 2023-2024 8 | P a g e Hillingdon Safeguarding Partnership Annual Report 2023-2024 9 | P a g e Hillingdon Safeguarding Partnership Annual Report 2023-2024 10 | P a g e 4 Safeguarding Priorities This section outlines the highlights of multiagency working in the last year. To reflect our ethos of shared and equal responsibility for safeguarding we have continued to encourage partner agencies to chair subgroups. In the last year we have secured improved multiagency engagement, with subgroups chaired by representatives of the statutory partners, and relevant agencies including London Fire Brigade. Subgroups are generally well attended across all aspects of partnership work, statutory partners are represented in all, with relevant agencies attending according to the focus of the subgroup. 4.1 Children’s Priorities The Strategic High -Risk Panel is co-chaired by the Metropolitan Police and Children and Young People’s Services. There has been considerable flux in senior leadership within the police service, this has resulted in changes in the responsible officer for the chairing role. In effect , during the year, the group was largely chaired by the local authority. The focus of the subgroup remains developing a collaborative strategic response to children at risk of extrafamilial harm. The overarching objective is to prevent, intervene and disrupt child exploitation. The group collates and scrutinises information from a variety of sources and partners to identify trends and themes. This facilitates multiagency solution-focussed discussions to determine the best way to strategically address the identified needs and priorities. Highlights in the last year include the Contextual Safeguarding Strategy and achieving funding for a pilot project to rollout the approach in Hayes. This project is being led by the Stronger Families Team leader with the benefit of comprehensive local knowledge of the area, and pre-existing networks with the local community. The project is reporting into both the Community Safety Partnership, and the Panel with governance facilitated through the newly formed Community Safety’s “Serious Violence” subgroup. The Child Sexual Abuse Subgroup was established in December 2021. Its purpose is to raise awareness of all forms of child sexual abuse within the community and across our partnership. The subgroup aims Children's Priorities •Strategic High Risk Panel (Contextual Safeguarding) •Child Sexual Abuse •Education Safeguarding (new) •Stronger Families (concluded) Shared Priorities •Joint Strategic Safeguarding and Trafficking (concluded) •Practice Development Forum Adult Priorities •Neglect •Preventing Fatal Fires (new) •Self Neglect (concluded) •Cuckooing and Adult Exploitation (new) Hillingdon Safeguarding Partnership Annual Report 2023-2024 11 | P a g e to enhance practitioner capacity to identify sexual abuse , increase knowledge and confidence , and develop a coordinated response when a child sexual abuse concern arises. Additionally, the subgroup addresses issues of equality and diversity, including the unique risks faced by children with disabilities. While it had been anticipated the strategic work would conclude last year, after consultation with partners, we recognised the need for ongoing efforts to ensure best practices in our multiagency response to child sexual abuse. In the last year there has been increased regional focus , with partners contributing to the ICB led project to develop a North West London Child Sexual Abuse Hub. This is anticipated to be a comprehensive service for those children impacted by sexual abuse. There are some challenges to the approach, with the location of the Hub in Kensington and Chelsea. Representatives of the subgroup continue to advocate for Hillingdon residents to have access to an accessible service and are mindful of the potential increased barriers to support for children with disabilities. The NSPCC PANTS Programme has now been launched in Hillingdon. This is a preventative approach to child sexual abuse, educating children in an age-appropriate way, about their rights to safety and support. There has been great enthusiasm across the partnership, with practitioners, schools, health, and voluntary agencies encouraged to sign up to be trained as a ‘PANTS Champion’. In August 2021 the Local Authority launched the Stronger Families approach to early help services in Hillingdon. This is a locality -based approach with three hubs, each developing networks to support children and families in the local community. In 2022-23 the subgroup continued to provide scrutiny and strategic vision for the approach, enabling direct feedback from partners to identify and address any implementation issues, and to share information and updates about the progression of services. In the last reporting period, the subgroup concluded the strategic aspect of the rollout, progressing to operational delivery and development at a locality level. This ensures that the work of each locality team is informed by the needs of the local community they serve. The Education Safeguarding subgroup is co-chaired by a senior manager within the local authority education department, and the child protection lead for education. The subgroup has representatives from early years, primary, secondary, special schools, and further education in addition to wider multiagency partners from health and policing. The aim of the subgroup is to provide education leaders with a formal conduit into the wider work of the partnership. Key areas of work have included coproducing the audit tool for the s175/157 education safeguarding audit, this is underway and will be concluded in the next financial year. The subgroup is also mapping the complex network of Hillingdon Safeguarding Partnership Annual Report 2023-2024 12 | P a g e consultation and feedback groups within the sector, this will enable improved information sharing across the education landscape. 4.2 Shared Priorities The Joint Strategic Safeguarding and Trafficking Subgroup originally formed in 2015 to provide scrutiny and oversight of the safeguarding arrangements for children and young people arriving at Heathrow and was later expanded to include safeguarding vulnerable adults . In 2022 the terms of reference were updated to reflect a focus on the prevention, identification and response to safeguarding concerns arising within the airport. In the reporting period the subgroup developed, finalised and agreed the Safeguarding Partnership Modern Slavery Practice Guidance. This provides practitioners with clear guidance and pathways to safeguard adults and children who are believed to be exploited. During its tenure the subgroup facilitated the development of relationships between operational and strategic leads across the partnership. These are now well embedded with good links, systems and processes between those agencies based at the airport and local safeguarding services. The work of the strategic subgroup was subject to reflective review this year, to establish progress made and identify any areas of continued focus. This concluded that there was no requirement for strategic leads to continue to meet, with the development of an operational networking group to ensure the maintenance of achievements, with the c apacity to refer to the senior strategic boards should there be any intractable issues. The focus of the Practice Development Forum (PDF) is to ensure that learning from any statutory or non-statutory review, local or national, is disseminated across the safeguarding partnership as required. The Practice Development Forum also considers learning from audits and other statutory reviews. The group has a core membership across both partnerships, in recognition that learning from practice usually has applicability across both sectors. This year there ha s continued to be three affiliated Task & Finish groups: Child Learning from Practice; Adult Learning from Practice; and Female Genital Mutilation. During the year, to help disseminate and share information in different ways, we published the Safeguarding Partnership Newsletter which continues to provide professionals with an accessible overview of key practice developments, resources and learning from practice. Hillingdon Safeguarding Partnership Annual Report 2023-2024 13 | P a g e We believe that in addition to good information sharing, learning activities and good communication, quality assurance plays an important role in assessing and evaluating the impact of various activities and the effectiveness of the safeguarding arrangements. A coherent structure to the quality assurance activities of the partnership and an analytical approach has continued through the annual multiagency quality assurance schedule that is further explored later in this report. The Safeguarding Partnership proactively raise s awareness of safeguarding themes and issues throughout the year to continuously reinforce knowledge and increase awareness of issues of abuse and neglect. Through doing so it contributes to a community of residents and professionals who are well informed to prevent harm before it occurs and know how to seek help when needed. This year the Partnership has promoted: ➢ Carers Week ➢ Show Racism the Red Card ➢ Safeguarding Adults Week ➢ Mental Health Awareness Week ➢ Child Exploitation Awareness Week ➢ World Suicide Prevention Day Tools and resources are developed in advance and shared across the professional network, in addition to being available on our websites. Input from expert leads across the partnership is sought where required, both in the development of resources, and in ensuring that the target audience is reached. There is evidence to support direct impact on safeguarding practice, and positive feedback from safeguarding partners about the usefulness of the resources. Our focus for Show Racism the Red Card was to highlight the impact of structural inequalities, and the centrality of anti- discrimination and cultural literacy to safeguarding practice. The Partnership embraced the ethos of the campaign, reflecting on the increased diversity of the community we serve, and the value of celebrating culture and history. In the coming year we will build on this through reviewing the impact of the Safeguarding Partnership’s Equality, Diversity, and Inclusion Statement. Hillingdon Safeguarding Partnership Annual Report 2023-2024 14 | P a g e The proactive acknowledgement of awareness days enables the partnership to revisit previous areas of priority practice, ensuring sustainability of strategic work and highlighting intersections between the often-diverse nature of need that residents can experience. Our World Suicide Prevention Day resource provided easily accessible training videos for practitioners and highlighted the increased risk of suicide for victims of domestic abuse. Each briefing highlights the nature of the campaign, the intersection with safeguarding, local resources, and signposting to further support. They provide an opportunity to highlight services and resources that are sometimes overlooked, for example the specialist post suicide bereavement service delivered by Mind on behalf of North West London Integrated Care Board. For Child Exploitation Awareness Day, we trialled the delivery of a ‘conference in a week’ through designing and implementing a series of standalone webinars across a five-day period. Each webinar focussed on an a rea of practice, with attendance across all three supporting practitioners to develop a foundational knowledge of exploitation, to understand our local picture, and to increase awareness of the importance of disruptive activity and transitional safeguarding. The approach was well received and will be repeated as appropriate. 4.3 Adult Priorities The self-neglect subgroup was led by the Head of Service for Safeguarding in Adult Social Care. In the last year the subgroup has progressed through the strategic objectives to raise awareness of self - neglect, to improve practitioner knowledge, capacity and confidence and to develop the multiagency safeguarding response. The 2022-2023 audit considered barriers to best practice, interagency working and information sharing and identifying good practice. Actions taken in response to the audit have included raising awareness of referral pathways, increasing practitioner knowledge of the Clutter Image Rating Scale, and practice development around the implementation of the Mental Capacity Act. The subgroup concluded at the completion of the agreed multiagency action plan. In terms of further developments, the specialist self -neglect training remains in place, with positive feedback from Hillingdon Safeguarding Partnership Annual Report 2023-2024 15 | P a g e delegates around applicability to practice. The SAB has sought assurance from partners around the sufficiency of training in respect of the Mental Capacity Act and has continued to promote widespread use of the Clutter Image Rating Scale. Our priority to address the impact of Neglect on adults has been the focus of a designated subgroup for a year. The subgroup is attended by representatives of core agencies, with specialist input provided by Care Providers, and the voluntary and community sector. There have been some challenges with the capacity of adult social care to provide consistent representation due to staffing changes. Key areas of output in the last year include the development of briefings to highlight key information for frontline practitioners and operational managers, commissioning of neglect training, the development of a neglect focussed section on the SAB website and seeking assurance around practice and procedure in partner agencies. In the coming year the subgroup will develop a local multiagency guidance/strategy to collate information about best practice into one strategic document. During the year the Pan London SAB identified the need for regional development in response to learning from fatal fires. Our local efforts have been co-ordinated within the Learning from Fatal Fires Task & Finish Group. By design, this was a highly focussed group led by our Borough Commander for London Fire Brigade with the support of the Safeguarding Partnership Team. Key areas of focus have included awareness raising activity, incorporating fire risk into routine assessments, and reviewing local mechanisms for response where a fire has been established. This work culminated in the design of a multiagency training webinar that is scheduled for delivery in the new financial year. A follow up meeting to review impact will take place six months after the conclusion of the group. Our most recent area of focus is the multiagency response to exploitation and cuckooing. This work is in its infancy and will continue into the coming financial year. Strategic work in this arena necessitates close working with colleagues in Community Safety , to ensure that the imperative to disrupt perpetrators as well as safeguard victims is achieved. The community safety leads are developing a local exploitation and cuckooing protocol to inform multiagency practice. From the perspective of the Safeguarding Partnership an assessment tool has been developed to assist in identifying signs and indicators, inform risk assessment and shape safeguarding intervention for those affected. This will be implemented within Adult Social Care in the first instance, with a rollout plan to partner agencies and services in development. Hillingdon Safeguarding Partnership Annual Report 2023-2024 16 | P a g e 5 Learning from Practice It is acknowledged that learning can be gained from recognising good practice but also from those circumstances where we, as a partnership, could have responded differently to a child or adult’s circumstances. Systemic learning and practice improvement is not only based on local experience but includes that which stems from regional and national research, policy, and practice. This approach seeks to ensure that safeguarding practice in Hillingdon is research informed and evidence based and that our residents receive services that are of a high standard delivered by a partnership that strives to continuously improve. A fundamental duty of both the Safeguarding Children Partnership and Safeguarding Adults Board is to review those cases that may meet the criteria for a statutory review of practice. This review process is undertaken in line with the statutory guidance set out in Working Together to Safeguard Children 2018/2023 and the Care and Support Statutory Guidance 2014. A notification to the Child Safeguarding Practice Review Panel (the National Panel) is made when a child has suffered serious harm, and that abuse and/or neglect is known or suspected. For each serious incident notification, a multiagency Rapid Review is convened to bring together and consider information known about the child by all agencies involved and to identify any areas of learning. The Rapid Review is held within 15 working days of the notification, with a report detailing the circumstances of the child, the actions of involved agencies, any learning identified and a decision around Local or National Child Safeguarding Practice Review. In the reporting period the Partnership convened 2 Rapid Reviews. There are two ongoing Local Child Safeguarding Practice Reviews, one in respect of safeguarding infants, and one in respect of child sexual abuse. Our child sexual abuse LCSPR is delayed due to an accompanying police investigation. The Hillingdon Safeguarding Adult Review Panel is chaired by a Metropolitan Police Detective Superintendent with responsibility for safeguarding. It has a core membership of senior representatives from key agencies, with others mandated to attend according to the specific requirement of the case. The purpose of the Panel is to review circumstances that may meet the criteria for a Safeguarding Adult Review (SAR) as specified in the Care Act 2014. In 2023-2024 the Panel considered five referrals, of these three met the criteria for a statutory safeguarding adults review (SAR). For each review there is consideration of the most appropriate methodology, options include externally commissioning a review author, or co-ordinating within the SAB. All SARs are underway and will be concluded in the next reporting period. In January 2024 the Partnership published the ‘Carol’ SAR. This considered the circumstances of a 77- year-old woman who suffered serious harm due to her care needs not being met . The SAR was Hillingdon Safeguarding Partnership Annual Report 2023-2024 17 | P a g e coordinated by the Safeguarding Partnership Team and undertaken by a Panel made up of representatives of the core agencies. The key lessons for local practice were summarised as follows: • Practitioners should strive to understand the lived experience of adults. • Working with carers is necessary to reduce the risk of abuse and neglect. • Supervision and management oversight supports better safeguarding practice. • Practitioners need to correctly apply the Mental Capacity Act. • Effective partnership working is integral to the identification and management of risks. A multiagency action plan is in progress to address the learning identified. To support agencies to disseminate and address the areas of learning within their organisations a practice briefing was written to expand upon each domain, highlighting useful sources of support, advice and information to improve safeguarding practice. Addressing learning meaningfully necessitates that it is revisited on an ongoing basis and incorporated into wider practice development. This is achieved through agencies incorporating learning into their training for staff, and by the Partnership continuing to seek assurance that it is being addressed. Our Learning from Practice Frameworks promote the continuous improvement of safeguarding practice in both adult and child services. The Task and Finish Groups have a broad remit that includes undertaking non-statutory learning reviews, progressing actions, and identifying any thematic barriers to good practice. In the last year the Frameworks have been updated to incorporate learning from domestic abuse related reviews where appropriate. The aim is to support the development of a learning culture across the partnership that: Learning from Practice High profile cases Local Statutory Reviews Rapid Reviews National Child Safeguarding Practice Review Themes from single agency reviews Key Research Seminal SAR/CSPR Domestic Abuse Related Death Review Regional learning Hillingdon Safeguarding Partnership Annual Report 2023-2024 18 | P a g e - is open and honest. - is proportionate and avoids hindsight bias. - identifies and addresses systemic practice issues. - supports and challenges safeguarding partners to make continuous improvements to practice. In response to The National Review Safeguarding Children with Disabilities in Residential Settings the partnership developed a n action plan , that facilitated application of the core findings to local safeguarding practice. This informed the focus of multiagency quality assurance activity in 2023-2024, including an audit of responses to allegations against staff and volunteers, and consideration of multiagency safeguarding practice in relation to children with complex needs placed outside of their community. These are explored in more detail in the next section. 6 Quality Assurance One of the core functions of the Safeguarding Partnership is to seek assurance about practice in Hillingdon. To this aim we have undertaken a wide range of auditing activity in the last year: - Allegations against People in Positions of Trust - Evaluating the Impact of Local Safeguarding Adults Reviews - Safeguarding Children with Disabilities placed outside of the Local Community - Adult MASH - The Quality and Impact of Safeguarding Partnership Training Each audit has been completed with the support and expertise of representatives across the multiagency group, with methodology adjusted according to the nature and matter under review. Methods used include self-assessment, file audits, roundtable discussions and the development of bespoke review tools. Where reviews considered the quality of safeguarding practice the outcomes were largely positive, providing assurance about the impact of multiagency safeguarding arrangements on practice in Hillingdon. The findings, analysis and recommendations of each review have been communicated to the relevant subgroup and Safeguarding Board, with a standalone report produced for each area of focus. In response to the findings of the National Child Safeguarding Practice Review the Partnership sought assurance about local processes and practices in respect of the management of allegations against professionals in a position of trust working with children. This includes both paid staff and volunteers. Hillingdon Safeguarding Partnership Annual Report 2023-2024 19 | P a g e The Local Authority Designated Officer (LADO) function is a statutory requirement set out in Working Together to Safeguard Children (2018, subsequently updated in December 2023). The task of the LADO is to coordinate and respond to allegations against members of the children’s workforce.  The audit was designed using the draft Standards agreed by the London LADO network. The review highlighted a need for continuous awareness raising activity of the role and function of the LADO service. In response to the findings of the s11 Audit in 2022 -2023 the LADO provides multiagency training four times per year, with a bespoke offer for foster carers and residential staff. This is good practice and demonstrates a proactive safeguarding approach. It was highlighted that there was a need to extend this to voluntary, community and faith-based organisations. The LADO has seen increasing numbers of referrals, and an extension of the recording requirements to include low level concerns. This raises a question about sufficiency within the service. At the time of the audit the local authority was developing new recording systems to improve data collection and quality. The need for this was confirmed within the audit and has subsequently been achieved. Following the audit the local authority has established routine quality assurance processes for LADO, with monthly qualitative auditing in place. The referral pathway for allegations and concerns is clear, and well understood by those agencies making referral s. Triage of allegations is timely, with formal management meetings and reviews arranged as needed. Investigations were conducted thoroughly fairly and in a timely manner, with risk identified, agreed actions proactively monitored and outcomes both appropriate and proportionate. There are a small number of cases that have not progressed in a timely manner, this is due to ongoing criminal investig ations. The LADO and senior officers within the Metropolitan Police Service have developed an escalation pathway to address this. In 2022 the Partnership published two Safeguarding Adults Reviews, E velyn and Angela and Chris: A Thematic Review of Self-Neglect. As previously outlined to ensure that the Partnership has embedded learning it is necessary to intermittently revisit the findings, this serves an additional purpose of providing insight into methods for reaching frontline practitioners and operational managers. For this purpose, focussed quality assurance activity was undertaken : Evaluating the Impact of Local Safeguarding Adults Reviews. A multilevel questionnaire was developed to seek input from frontline practitioners, operational managers and strategic leads. The review found good evidence that both SARs have impacted Central and North West London NHS Foundation Trust and the Hillingdon Hospitals NHS Foundation Trust at a strategic level, shaping training delivery and policies and processes that embed many aspects of learning from the SARs into practice. Unfortunately, there was no strategic level response from Adult Social Care, the ICB, the Hillingdon Safeguarding Partnership Annual Report 2023-2024 20 | P a g e Police, London Ambulance Service, Circle Health Group, all of whom were involved in at least one of the relevant SARs. In the absence of strategic level assurances or greater frontline and management responses to this survey, there was little assurance provided by this survey that learning from SARs has been embedded into policy, procedures, or training. Subsequently assurance has been sought by the SAB around the actions taken to embed learning. The National Child Safeguarding Practice Review ‘Safeguarding Children with Disabilities in Residential Settings’ was published in 2022. The Review was undertaken in response to abuse and neglect that occurred in a residential school setting, with multiple children and young adults suffering harm, over a period of months and years. It was published in two phases, wit h phase 1 exploring the specific circumstances of the children, and phase 2 the wider national implications. The purpose of this reflective review was to consider the themes and recommendations of the National Review for local safeguarding partners. The review sought to highlight specific areas of practice strength, and opportunities for development in multiagency practice across Hillingdon through exploring how well partners understood the children’s lived experiences and how effectively partners ensured that their outcomes are met. The focus was on children placed outside of their local community in residential homes and schools. Overall, the review group found that children with complex health needs and disabilities that were placed outside the borough were receiving good safeguarding responses and their needs were being effectively met within residential settings. There were elem ents of good practice with partners working together to safeguard children and families ensuring that specialist services were implemented when required. The experiences of these children before they became looked after demonstrated the need for professionals to be more child centred when assessing the risks and harms that could be caused by their caregivers, rather than focussing on the needs of the parents. Hearing and amplifying the child’s voice and understanding their lived experiences helps to improve safeguarding practice whilst ensuring the family get the right holistic support at the earliest opportunity. In September 2020 the Adult Multi-Agency Safeguarding Hub was launched in Hillingdon, led by Adult Social Care. The hub has responsibility for screening potential adult safeguarding concerns, triaging all safeguarding concerns, undertaking initial safety p lanning, and determining whether the criteria for section 42 are met. Whilst the Adult Multi Agency Safeguarding Hub (MASH) was the focus of Independent Scrutiny in 2022-23, with positive feedback, our Thematic Self-Neglect SAR published in September 2022 found learning in respect of the identification of safeguarding concerns and the sufficiency of interagency Hillingdon Safeguarding Partnership Annual Report 2023-2024 21 | P a g e information sharing at the concern stage. Practice Development Forum agreed that the Adult MASH would be the focus of a Quality Assurance audit in quarter three of 2023 -24. This was to seek assurance about robustness of safeguarding practice at the concern stage. The period audited was during a time of significant and rapid turnover in staffing and management of the MASH and this likely had a detrimental impact on the ability of staff and managers to ensure consistency of practice. There are opportunities to improve the quality of referrals, consideration of neglect as a potential crime, and to better seek the views and wishes of adults at risk when raising a safeguarding concern. Once safeguarding concerns reach Adult MASH there is evidence of some good practice in triaging concerns, effective use of the daily high-risk meeting, good partnership working to assess and manage risk, and efforts to seek the views and wishes of adults at risk. However, there was considerable variation in the quality of practice across the sample. This included in the application of Making Safeguarding Personal principles. In jus t under half the triages the person did not appear to have received the right help and protection at the concern stage, and information had not been shared effectively. This audit concluded at the end of the financial yea r, the recommendations will be progressed in 2024-2025. 7 Multiagency Safeguarding Training The purpose of the Safeguarding Partnership training programme is to ensure that practitioners have the most relevant and up to date opportunities for ongoing professional development. To promote accessibility training is delivered through a range of methods, including online, face to face and via webinar. Training by our children and young people is delivered in person. In total, 1846 sessions of professional development activity have been facilitated by the Safeguarding Partnership in 2023 - 2024. This includes commissioned training and that delivered via the webinar programme. In April 2023, the Safeguarding Partnership Team was transferred responsibility, from the council’s Learning and Development Team, for full administration of training, including the creation of new Learning Zone account requests for any practitioner external to the council. In the last year over 350 new accounts have been created. To ensure the continued relevance and accessibility of multiagency safeguarding training, and to measure the effectiveness of the Late Cancellation Policy at reducing non-attendance, we undertook a structured analysis of training in the reporting period. F indings have informed ongoing commissioning arrangements, with the extension of the Late Cancellation Policy to include all training. Where there are agency specific challenges with attendance at safeguarding training this is monitored with feedback provided to the lead within the respective agency. Hillingdon Safeguarding Partnership Annual Report 2023-2024 22 | P a g e In recognition of the time pressures faced by frontline practitioners we offer a programme of webinars. These are sharply focussed, last around 90 minutes and address a specific topic or area of practice. All webinars are available on the Safeguarding Partnership websites and can be accessed using a password that is shared with Hillingdon practitioners. Webinar Attendees An Introduction to the Safeguarding Partnership 147 Child Exploitation Awareness Week - Myth Buster & Back to Basics - AXIS – Understanding Local Trends - The Children’s Society – Disruption and Transitional Safeguarding 59 48 45 An Introduction to Contextual Safeguarding 73 Introduction to the Centre of Expertise on Child Sexual Abuse 49 Total: 421 Following attendance delegates are asked to complete a feedback form, this enables the Partnership to monitor the effectiveness and impact of sessions and informs our needs analysis. ➢ 97% of delegates rated their understanding of the topic after training as very good to excellent. ➢ 96% rated the quality of the training as very good to excellent. ➢ 98% of delegates agreed that they could apply learning from the training to their practice area. A core aim of our training programme is accessibility and relevance across the diverse range of professionals and volunteers working in the borough. In addition to monitoring training quantitively, in terms of attendance and representation, we also seek qualitative feedback from delegates. A selection of comments, from a range of different agencies across the scope of the training offer is provided below. This highlights that the training programme is broadly accessed, and that delegates find the content to be useful and applicable to their practice. Nursery Worker: Children’s LADO ‘I have a better understanding of what needs to be reported to LADO and how they can help’. Early Years: Contextual Safeguarding ‘Although my work is mostly with children under 5, we work with the whole family. Using the training to inform staff during staff meetings and their 1 -1s’. Primary School: Working Together ‘I will use this training to help in following questioning techniques and knowing who to contact’. Hillingdon Safeguarding Partnership Annual Report 2023-2024 23 | P a g e Independent School: Contextual Safeguarding ‘I will cascade to my DSL team and then to wider staff’. Special School: Working Together ‘'Seeing situations from a different perspective. Knowing how to deal with situations calmly and being able to respond in an effective way’. Adolescent Development Services: Child Neglect ‘ Being more confident in "reading" situations …more able to respond’. Child Development Centre: Working Together Refresher ‘I am a community Paediatric Consultant so doing lots of safeguarding and child protection medicals. This refresher course is very useful.’ Children’s Social Care: Child Sexual Abuse ‘updated my knowledge to support my team’ CNWL Mental Health Services – Working Together ‘I have developed better awareness o f signs and symptoms, some of which could/would have been overlooked in encounters with CYP …’ CNWL Health Visiting Modern Slavery ‘Be more aware of indicators of possible modern-day slavery’. Hillingdon Hospital Safeguarding Disabled Children ‘Information to be included within internal training on this subject’. Maternity Services: Contributing Effectively to Child Protection Plans and Core Groups ‘I will use the knowledge constantly (referrals, strategy meetings, professionals' meetings, core groups, CP conferences) Adult Social C are: Adult Safeguarding ‘It will help me to make sure that the person is always at the centre of each decision, fully informed at the right level and pace and that information is only shared with those who need to know’ LBH Housing Department: Modern Slavery ‘I will use this training when interacting and visiting Tenants to identify and raise safeguarding concerns where modern slavery is suspected ’. LBH Rent Team: Walking in our Shoes ‘I will make sure I go the extra mile’ Heathrow Airport Ltd: Modern Slavery ‘Share contacts & information with my team.’ H4All: Self Neglect & Hoarding ‘The training will help me to support my clients better as it’s given me a deeper insight into this topic and resources available.’ Age UK: Adult Safeguarding ‘I have become SG nominated lead person for our Charity so this will enable me to have a better understanding’ Areas of training need are identified in line with the priorities of the strategic boards, and in response to learning from practice. In the coming year this will include the rollout of the NSPCC PANTS programme, with a range of options for professionals and parents. The Partnership is also supporting the ICB launch of ICON, this is a preventative programme to reduce the risk of abusive head trauma Hillingdon Safeguarding Partnership Annual Report 2023-2024 24 | P a g e through supporting parents to better cope with crying infants . From an adult perspective, our focus will be on raising awareness of the signs and indicators of cuckooing and adult exploitation and to promote consistency across the partnership in adult safeguarding enquiries. In terms of generic safeguarding training, we continue to promote a trauma informed approach to practice and will be working around best practice in professional curiosity. 8 London Borough of Hillingdon Children and Young People Services Children and Young People Services provides support to children, families, and carers where there are welfare or safeguarding concerns. There is evidence to support the effectiveness of our Stronger Families approach with the Hub responding to over 25,000 contacts. Out of these contacts over 11200 were received via the online portal which can be accessed and completed anywhere and at any time by all professionals. Joint, locality work is at the centre of the way in which we work with the partnership to identify needs early and to support our families to identify their support networks and to build resilience without the need for statutory intervention. To make this aspiration a reality, our three locality-based key working teams cover three defined areas and facilitate holistic partnership working with statutory (health, education, police, children’s centres) and voluntary sector partners. Over 1,600 children have been referred to our Stronger Families Localities Teams, ensuring that their needs are assessed, and proportionate support is provided to all who need it at the earliest possible stage. This empowers our families to address their n eeds and utilise the resources available to them in their communities and extended networks and it also reduces the need for statutory social work intervention in the life of the family. At the end of the financial year, over 2,700 children were supported by social workers 11% of whom have a disability. 254 children are at risk of significant harm and therefore supported via a Child Protection (CP) Plan. It is a positive that this number remained cons istent over the year showing a good management of demand and risk. Hillingdon is corporate parent for the 329 children in our care (LAC). This is a reduction of the number of children in our care from 364 the previous year. This is a strong indicator o f effective early intervention and management of risk that focuses on partnership with the families and relationship- based practice approach that supports young people to remain living with their families or move towards successful independence. Hillingdon Safeguarding Partnership Annual Report 2023-2024 25 | P a g e At the end of the financial year, we have 765 young people being supported into independence as care leavers, 49% of these young people came into care due to their need as unaccompanied asylum- seeking children. We have seen a significant increase in the number of young people eligible for some form of ongoing support as care leavers, with an increase from 441 in the previous financial year. Our population of asylum-seeking children is predominantly male, this is a consistent trend over the last three years. Most of our children have travelled to the UK from Sudan, Afghanistan, Eritrea, Somalia, Iran, Vietnam and Kuwait. The overall number of asylum-seeking children in our care is now reducing due to the National Transfer Scheme. However, our context as a port authority of providing support and care to those children presenting in the borough means that there will be an increase in the proportion of care leavers who have an asylum-seeking background. We continue to support our children in a difficult local and national context, and we have experienced a continuing increase in the complexity of needs. The impact of the pandemic, the cost-of-living crisis, and the wider economic climate has seen increases in the number of children and adults experiencing poor mental and emotional health, an increase in persistent absence from education, and of families experiencing increased pressure impacting on parental capacity. We continued to see the systemic and compounded impact of the current pressures on all the providers of services including Courts, Police, primary health and mental health provision. The impact of various national and international factors combined with associated difficulties at the Home Office has resulted in a significant increase in numbers of people seeking asylum accommodated in the borough. The change in demand and additional pressures created by the current economic situation required us to adapt and innovate quickly to ensure we can continue to achieve the best outcomes for children and their families, whilst supporting our colleagues and workforce to continue to deliver high quality support and intervention. These combined pressures re -emphasise the importance of co ordinated and strong partnership working with other agencies and with our families and young people, to ensure a proportionate and timely response in the difficult local and national context. Our focus remains on cooperation and coproduction with our partners, schools, families and communities, aiming to foster a culture of empowerment, independence, and early intervention for our families. Through our relationship-based practice approach we continued to encourage children, families, adults and their carers to recognise and address difficulties before they become entrenched, and to do so in a way that promotes independence, resilience, choice and control that minimises dependency. Over the last year, we have realigned our social care services and Education and SEND provisions by joining them up under one service for the first time in over a decade. This provides a strong end -to- end understanding of the children’s continuum of need and, in conjunction with the embedding of Hillingdon Safeguarding Partnership Annual Report 2023-2024 26 | P a g e our innovative Stronger Families multi-agency locality-based practice, we have moved away from ‘early help’ to ‘help’ that is available when needed and delivered by the right person/service at the right time. We remain an active and committed safeguarding partner and we contribute to a variety of boards and forums to ensure the voice of our children and the needs we are identifying in the cohorts we work with are reflected in the strategic decision making and contributing to the strategic coordination of services and priorities: Health and Wellbeing Board, the Domestic Abuse Steering Executive, the Youth Justice Strategic Partnership Board, Safer Hillingdon Partnership, and the Hillingdon Health and Care Partners CYP Transformation Board (HHCP). We are proud that the high quality of work delivered in Hillingdon was acknowledged by the regulator OFSTED during their inspection of local authority children services (ILACS)in October 2023 which said that “Children in Hillingdon continue to receive highly effective services. Very strong political support and diligent partnerships have enabled the senior leadership team to be an excellent champion for children, families and young people.” the services were graded as Outstanding and the inspectors also found that: “Partnership work is a strength within Hillingdon, with a relentless focus on cooperation with partners, families and communities. Through relationship -based work and the creation of the Stronger Fami lies Hub, families and communities are well supported to address issues before they require more intense interventions”. As a result of the inspection recommendations, we have focussed on the following areas: • We have reviewed and relaunched the process and policy for providing consistent services for 16- and 17-year-olds who present as homeless. • We are in the process of launching a new Local Offer for care leavers that will emphasise the importance of keeping in touch and ensur e that their rights and entitlements are communicated effectively. We continue to work with our partners to meet the needs

Text extracted automatically from the PDF, so layout, tables and images are not shown. Only the start of this long document is shown here. Open the original PDF on LB Hillingdon’s website.

📄 Easy Read Version , item 6. PDF 1 MB
Read the text of this document (6 pages)
Annual Report 2023-2024 Easy Read Version The Safeguarding Partnership is a group of people from different organisations. This includes the London Borough of Hillingdon, Police, NHS and Healthwatch. We work to keep children and adults safe from abuse and neglect. Our aim is for all people to live in safety with their rights protected. People should not be abused, or feel scared. What is the Safeguarding Partnership? We have a business plan that we try to follow. This says what we need to do, and when we need to do it by. Every year we must write a report to say what we have done, how well we have done it, and what we plan to do next. This report is about our work to keep adults safer. Every year we ask a man called Alan Caton to come and check our work, and help us to do things well. Alan Caton is our Independent Scrutineer. This year Alan asked us questions about how we work together, and how we listen to adults and children. Alan found that we work together well, and that we try hard to listen to adults and children. Alan asked us to think more about how we make changes when we realise we need to do them. We asked adults and children what professionals do well, and what could be better. Some adults who are carers came to meet with the Board to tell us what we do well, and what we can do better. Some children did the same for our child board. We have kept working to make sure that all professionals know how to listen to your views and work with you to stay safe. What we have done We trained professionals about different types of abuse and how to help adults and children to be safe. We write papers called briefings and have a newsletter to keep people informed. This is sent to every organisation working with children or adults in Hillingdon. Sometimes things can go wrong. It is important to learn from this. We talk about what could have been done better and write it in a report called a Safeguarding Adults Review. We have started two new Safeguarding Adults Reviews We checked what had changed after Safeguarding Adults Reviews we did in 2022. We found out that we need to do more to make sure that professionals know about Safeguarding Adults Reviews and what we can do differently. Alan agreed with us that this is important. We work together in meetings called subgroups. Subgroups have people with all different jobs so that we can learn and plan together. There is always police, social care and health professionals. Subgroups work on one topic, and make a plan about what needs to happen. The Self-Neglect subgroup worked to help professionals know how to help people who cannot help themselves. Self-neglect is when someone is not able to keep themselves clean, safe and well. Sometimes people do not want help even though they need it. We worked with Heathrow Airport and Border Force to make sure that adults and children get any help and support they need when they are at the airport. This subgroup finished everything on the plan Some people need help to look after themselves, maybe they need help to have enough to eat, or to stay clean. Neglect is when carers don’t give the person the care they need. Our Neglect Subgroup has worked with care providers and carers to understand what can make Neglect happen, and to try to stop it. This year we have worked with London Fire Brigade to reduce the risk of people being hurt in fires. We have trained lots of professionals to know about the things that can increase risk. The Adult Multi Agency Safeguarding Hub has been very busy, managing 250 referrals every week. In the year Adult Social Care have completed 2077 adult safeguarding enquiries. Neglect is the most common reason for an adult to need support or protection. Next is financial abuse and then physical abuse. The police service is trying to reduce crime and increase safety. This includes stopping domestic abuse, and to help people with mental health problems. The police have changed how they help adults with mental health problems, making sure that they have support from the best service to help them. This is called Right Care Right Person. The NHS has started a new project to train GPs to better help adults affected by Domestic Abuse. This is called IRIS. Hillingdon Hospital has made more safeguarding referrals than ever before. The most referrals were for neglect and then self- neglect and mental health issues. The hospital has a safeguarding team of specially trained nurses. They attend all the Safeguarding Partnership meetings. Central and North West London NHS Foundation Trust organised a whole day of safeguarding training that thought about children and adults. This is the first time it has happened. Over 600 people attended. This part of the report tells you some of the important things that have happened this year. All of the organisations will keep working together to keep people as safe as possible. We will keep learning and improving. We have some new priorities for this year. These are: What will we do next? Transitional Safeguarding, working to make sure that children and young people have the support they need as they get older and become adults. We want to make sure that the views of adults, their carers and families are heard. This is to help us understand what it feels like to have a safeguarding service, so we can get better. If you have any ideas or questions please let us know. Call: 01895 277855 Email: safeguardingpartnership@hillingdon.gov.uk Cuckooing and adult exploitation. This is when an adult has their home taken over by a person or people who cause them harm.

Text extracted automatically from the PDF, so layout, tables and images are not shown. Open the original PDF on LB Hillingdon’s website.

📄 You Said We Did What Next , item 6. PDF 1 MB
Read the text of this document (3 pages)
What is going well? I feel loved I feel cared for What our 6-12year olds said about being in care: I get the help I need “It helps me to know that other people have been through the same kind of things” Get to know us by listening to us and doing fun things. What Helps? Make it easier to see my social workerWe should meet somewhere that feels homely Help me understand what I'm thinking and feeling Understand what it's like to be us When adults show us that they care Learning about the things that matter to us! People are kind I have fun Listening to us and doing the things you say that you will do. Having groups where there are fun activities, and where we can speak to other kids and adults that understand us. You Said ! The Safeguarding Partnership is all the people that help and support us. Our social workers, doctors, carers, mental health workers, nurses, police officers, GPs, housing officers, mentors, support workers and many more. Being outside late at night Being searched at school... Travel costs Social media Changing workers Schools aren't getting us ready for adult life Worries Walking in OurShoes! We Did ! Some children choose their own social worker Interview new members of staff We come back to you and tell you what we have done Social Media like whatsApp and TikTok Making sure that you know who we are ALL children and young people can contribute by using simple and accessible words and pictures listen to us more We are not quite there just yet, but we heard you! Make the community better and safer 84 professionalsacross lots ofdifferentagencies You will soon betraining teachers and leads inschools You have trained police officers, nurses and other health professionals. Training should be valued and People now pay some money to hold the training. This money funds some of your activities – like KICA The Safeguarding Partnership is all the people that help and support us. Our social workers, doctors, carers, mental health workers, nurses, police officers, GPs, housing officers, mentors, support workers and many more. Help me understand what I'm thinking and feeling Set up a new group of all different professionals Have raised awareness of what adults might see when a child or young person needs support Have raised awareness about mental health and support that is available to children and young people Every child attending school in Hayes will be asked what they think will make Hayes safer. working more closely with experts in community safety residential homes are linked up with their local police team We are doing Awareness Weeks Helping Adults understand Risk in the community What Next More therapy places locally What we want to see Prioritising the police time to make streets safer Better advertisement of support groups and help Making sure everyone has a voice and it is heard More education opportunities What is going well? To feel loved. Keep me safe. Help us understand when we have done something wrong - Don’t shout. Being interested in what we like. Listen to us and care about what we tell you Do not make promises you can’t keep “I enjoy cuddles” What we want from adults in our lives Work experience and spending time with friends Having people in our lives that care about us. “Having groups to go to with people like me” Speaking to the police about stop and searching. Supporting health and social care with interviews. People not giving us time and being too busy. limited mental health services Not enough police to keep people safe. “Having to move placement all the time.” Worries Not being heard What Next !? The Safeguarding Partnership is all the people that help and support us. Our social workers, doctors, carers, mental health workers, nurses, police officers, GPs, housing officers, mentors, support workers and many more.

Text extracted automatically from the PDF, so layout, tables and images are not shown. Open the original PDF on LB Hillingdon’s website.

Relevant Select Committee
Expiry date for any scrutiny call-in / date decision can be implemented (if no call-in)
Officer(s) to action
Directorate
Classification
7. REFERRAL FROM FULL COUNCIL: Options to Increase Controls for Houses of Multiple Occupation PDF 616 KB
RESOLVED: That the Cabinet: 1. Notes the process and requirements, including the gathering of evidence and concerns, required for the consideration of an Additional Licensing Policy for Houses of Multiple Occupation (HMO) and authorises the Corporate Director of Place to gather all the necessary data and present to the Cabinet Member for Resident’s Services (subject to the Cabinet Members agreement on additional expenditure). 2. Upon the advice of the Corporate Director of Place that the data collated has been gathered in accordance with the appropriate legislation, and upon review it supports the concept of an additional licensing scheme, whilst taking into account any additional resources required, then subject to the agreement of the Cabinet Member for Residents Services, authorises the necessary consultation on an additional licensing scheme, taking into full consideration any equality impact assessment and the Council’s social housing allocation policy. 3. Authorises the Corporate Director of Central Services to prepare evidence to assess whether an extension to the part-borough Small HMO Article 4 Direction (non-immediate) can be justified and present to the Cabinet Member for Resident’s Services. 4. Upon the advice of the Corporate Director of Central Services and Director of Planning, Regeneration & Environment that the evidence gathered supports the extensions of the HMO Article 4 Direction, then subject to the agreement of the Cabinet Member for Residents’ Services authorises officers to prepare an Article 4 Direction extending the withdrawal of permitted development rights for small HMOs to cover all wards in the borough. 5. Agree that the outcomes of any consultations relating to additional licensing be reported back to Cabinet to consider any further determinations on such matters. Reasons for decision Following the Full Council passing a motion on 11 July 2024, resolving to address issues regarding controls on Houses in Multiple Occupation, Cabinet received and agreed a report on the matter. The Cabinet Member for Residents’ Servicesintroduced the report and highlighted two main concerns: the growth of small HMOs under permitted development rights, which did not require planning permission, and the standards in some private rented properties. Two measures were proposed to address these issues: an Article 4 directive to withdraw permitted development rights for HMOs, requiring planning permission, and a licensing scheme to improve standards in the private housing sector, including HMOs. Both measures would need robust data to support their implementation and avoid challenges. Councillor Lavery urged councillors to encourage residents to participate in the consultation process to provide the necessary evidence for future decisions. Alternative options considered and rejected Cabinet could have continued with the current arrangements or considered instead the use of other powers to deal with ASB and environmental issues relating to HMO’s. Relevant Select Committee Residents’ Services Expiry date for any scrutiny call-in / date decision can be implemented (if no call-in) This matter can be called in by the relevant select committee by 5pm, Friday 18 October 2024. If not called-in, Cabinet’s decisions can then be implemented. Officer(s) to action Richard Webb / Stephanie Waterford / Julia Johnson / Debbie Weller / Michelle Greenidge Directorate Place / Central Services Classification Public - The report and any background papers relating to this decision by the Cabinet are available to view on the Council's website or by visiting the Civic Centre, Uxbridge.
📄 REFERRAL FROM FULL COUNCIL: Options to Increase Controls for Houses of Multiple Occupation PDF 616 KB
Read the text of this document (15 pages)
Cabinet report – 10 October 2024 (Part 1 Public) OPTIONS TO INCREASE CONTROLS FOR HOUSES OF MULTIPLE OCCUPATION (HMO’S) Cabinet Member & Portfolio Cllr Eddie Lavery Cabinet Member for Residents’ Services Responsible Officer Corporate Director of Place Report Author & Directorate Richard Webb / Stephanie Waterford / Julia Johnson / Debbie Weller Michelle Greenidge – Place / Central Services Directorates Papers with report Appendix 1- Controls on HMOs in other London Boroughs HEADLINES Summary Following the Council motion adopted in July 2024, this report sets out the process for considering ‘Additional Licensing’ for Houses of Multiple Occupancy and further options to deal with emerging issues in the private rented sector. Putting our Residents First Delivering on the Council Strategy 2022-2026 This report supports our ambition for residents / the Council of: Live in good quality, affordable homes in connected communities This report supports our commitments to residents of: Thriving, Healthy Households And the Hillingdon Housing Strategy Financial Cost Costs to scope, formulate and consult on an Additional Licensing Policy – circa £50,000 Costs to administer and enforce any Additional Licensing Policy will become clearer through the policy scoping exercise Relevant Select Committee Residents’ Services Select Committee Relevant Ward(s) All Cabinet report – 10 October 2024 (Part 1 Public) RECOMMENDATIONS That the Cabinet: 1. Notes the process and requirements, including the gathering of evidence and concerns, required for the consideration of an Additional Licensing Policy for Houses of Multiple Occupation (HMO) and authorises the Corporate Director of Place to gather all the necessary data and present to the Cabinet Member for Resident’s Services ( subject to the Cabinet Members agreement on additional expenditure). 2. Upon the advice of the Corporate Director of Place that the data collated h as been gathered in accordance with the appropriate legislation, and upon review it supports the concept of an additional licensing scheme, whilst taking into account any additional resources required, then subject to the agreement of the Cabinet Member for Residents Services, authorises the necessary consultation on an additional licensing scheme, taking into full consideration any equality impact assessment and the Council’s social housing allocation policy. 3. Authorises the Corporate Director of Central Services to prepare evidence to assess whether an extension to the part -borough Small HMO Article 4 Direction (non - immediate) can be justified and present to the Cabinet Member for Resident’s Services. 4. Upon the advice of the Corporate Director of Central Services and Director of Planning, Regeneration & Environment that the evidence gathered supports the extensions of the HMO Article 4 Direction, then subject to the agreement of the Cabinet Member for Residents’ Services authorises officers to prepare an Article 4 Direction extending the withdrawal of permitted development rights for small HMOs to cover all wards in the borough. 5. Agree that the outcomes of any consultations relating to additional licensing be reported back to Cabinet to consider any further determinations on such matters. Reasons for recommendation The Full Council passed a motion on 11 July 2024, resolving to address issues outlined below: "That this Council recognises the problems caused by unlicensed HMOs in the borough, from anti-social behaviour to poor housing conditions. This Council is committed to ensuring good quality housing in the borough and resolves that a report be sent to Cabinet considering the sufficiency of evidence required under Part 2 Housing Act 2004 to extend licensing obligations to all properties with 3 bedrooms housing multiple unrelated occupants and to commence consultation on the implementation of this additional licensing obligation where it is justified." The recommendations in this report would enable Cabinet to meet the commitments made within the motion with due consideration of the relevant legal and regulatory frameworks set out below: Cabinet report – 10 October 2024 (Part 1 Public)  The Council is required to gather information and evidence in support of any decision whether to introduce an Additional Licensing Policy. The data requirements span many services as well as drawing on Police and London Fire Brigade data. Recommendation 1 will ensure that the Council has the data required to consider whether introducing Additional Licensing in specific areas or across the entire borough is justified proportionate.  As part of the process of considering an Additional Licensing Policy, the Council must have regard to the current housing stock within the borough so that the amount of HMO properties can be estimated. The Council has a duty to carry out a Housing Stock Survey regularly and this is now due . The results of this survey will assist the Council in considering areas and types of property to which any Additional Licen sing Policy will apply. It will also be used to inform a resourcing plan for the Council’s Private Sector Housing Service.  The data and analysis required to provide supporting evidence for Additional Licensing Policies is complex and spans a range of different Council and external systems. Specialist data gathering and analysis resources will need to be utilised to complete this part of the process and therefore resources will be required to undertake this work. Funding may be available through the Transformation Capital Funds for this work should Cabinet decide that this analysis should be undertaken.  In addition to additional licensing measures the potential exists for the council as the Local Planning Authority to withdr aw permitted development rights for changes of use from dwelling houses (Use class C3) to small HMOs (Use Clas s C4). An assessment would be required to demonstrate the harm arising from the operation of the current permitted development rights to justify an extension of the existing part-borough Article 4 Direction for small HMOs , to cover the whole borough. This assessment could be undertaken at the same time as the Stock Condition S urvey and assessment of the grounds for additional licensing requirements. It is noted that many other authorities across London have introduced similar schemes to the one discussed in this report and set out in Appendix 1, however, until the Council concludes the data analysis, it will not know whether justification exists to introduce an Additional Licensing Policy either across the whole borough or in specific areas. Once the data is gathered and analysed an informed decision can be reached on whether Additional Licensing is required in Hillingdon to deal with emerging issues and improve standards in HMO’s. Alongside consideration of Additional Licensing, the Council must plan and prepare for the introduction of further powers under the Renters Rights Bill to regulate the private rented sector. Data analysis will assist the Council with resource planning for the introduction of expected new powers. Alternative options considered / risk management 1. Do nothing/continue with the current arrangements . This would not meet the commitments made in the Council motion and would not have any impact on the issues arising within the private rented sector or future implications of the Renters Rights Bill. This option is not recommended. Cabinet report – 10 October 2024 (Part 1 Public) 2. Consider the use of other powers to deal with issues with HMO’s i.e. further interventions and enforcement for housing standards breaches, use of ASB and enviro- crime powers, further education and engagement with private landlords to achieve higher standards of management within the sector. This option is viable and can be used either in isolation or alongside an Additional Licensing Policy, where justified. Democratic compliance / previous authority This report ensures Cabinet duly considers the request from the Full Council in a timely manner. Any proposed Additional Licensing Policy will have to go through the required legal and democratic process and, if to be taken forward, will form a further report to Cabinet. The steps in the process are detailed below in the ‘Supporting Information’ section. Any decision to the extend the Article 4 Direction for small HMOs would require approval by Full Council. Select Committee comments None at this stage. However, the Residents’ Services Select Committee maintains strong oversight and scrutiny on all housing related matters, and it may decide to consider any of these proposals as part of any planned consultations on them. SUPPORTING INFORMATION 1. HMO Definition 1.1 A House in Multiple Occupation (HMO) is a single dwelling where facilities such as bathrooms and kitchens are shared by three or more unrelated individuals. In planning terms, a small HMO (between 3 -6 persons) falls within Use Class C4. Current legislation allows a family dwelling (Use Class C3) to change to a sm all HMO (Use Class C4) without planning permission, i.e. by using ‘permitted development’ rights. 1.2 The Housing Act 2004 and supporting regulations require that an HMO is licensed if it is occupied by five or more persons living in two or more separate hous eholds (‘Mandatory Licensing’). 1.3 Local authorities may require further categories of HMO’s to be licensed (‘Additional Licensing’). This part of the Housing Act 2004 is adoptive and may be introduced in areas only where there is a justification that meets the requirements in the Housing Act 2004. 1.4 Larger HMOs (more than 6) are classified as ‘Sui Generis’, and therefore do not have permitted development to change from a C3 or C4 use property into a Larger HMO. Planning permission for this type of development is still required. 1.5 Local Authorities also have the power to require all privately rented properties to be licensed. This is called a selective licensing scheme. Selective licensing can only be introduced where the evidence demonstrating that such as scheme is necessary meets the legal requirements. Cabinet report – 10 October 2024 (Part 1 Public) 2. The Private Rental Sector in Hillingdon 2.1 Of the 109,000 dwellings in Hillingdon at the last census, more than a quarter (26%, 28,411) were in the private rented sector. There are approximately 900 -1000 licensed or known HMO’s operating in the borough. 2.2 Hillingdon has experienced an increase of 7.8% in private renting between the 2011 and 2021 census. This is the second -largest percentage -point rise (alongside Harrow) in London. The number of rented residences within the private rented sector is also escalating significantly. 3. Emerging HMO Concerns 3.1 The Private Sector Housing Team currently deals with enforcement issues under the requirements of the Housing Act 2004 and the Housing Health and Safety Rating system (HHSRS) and enforce fire safety and amenity standards within all HMOs (whether required to be licensed or not) across the borough. The team works in partnership with London Fire Brigade on fire safety in HMOs. 3.2 HMO’s are often associated with h aving a higher risk of fire than single family dwellings due to increased occupancy, multiple ignition sources, vulnerable occupants, poor construction and lack of fire prevention measures. 3.3 In Hillingdon, although the numbers are low, there has been a steady increase in fires reported in HMOs year on year up until the end of the calendar year 2023. Fire is one of the most common hazards identified by Private Sector Housing through reactive and proactive inspection and enforcement work. Mandatory licensi ng allows the Council to ensure that all HMOs in the scheme have working mains powered smoke alarms and that the electrical installation is checked and maintained. Additional licensing could ensure an adequate level of fire safety is provided in further HMOs. 3.4 The Council receives around 15 - 20 complaints per month about HMOs from residents and external agencies including London Fire Brigade and the Metropolitan Police. Complaints are also being received from Social Services colleagues. Complaints include anti-social behaviour, parking difficulties, knife crime, arson and waste management issues. Some recently created HMOs specifically target clients who have presenting needs such as mental health, drug and alcohol concerns and ex-offenders. 4. Legislative Process to introduce Additional Licensing 4.1 The Housing Act 2004 (‘the Act’) provides for licensing to be extended by a local authority to include HMOs not covered by mandatory licensing. To introduce additional licensing the Council must satisfy Sections 56 and 57 of the Act. 4.2 Compliance with Section 56 – To satisfy this section, the Council must be able to evidence that HMO’s which would be subject to additional licensing i.e. 3 bed spaces , are being managed Cabinet report – 10 October 2024 (Part 1 Public) ‘sufficiently ineffectively’ or are giving rise to particular problems for tenants and/or members of the public. The Council will need to analyse data to provide information to demonstrate additional licensing is necessary. The following are some examples of the types of data which would identify HMOs in the borough and provide information on how HMO’s are being managed in the borough;  Housing standards/disrepair complaints.  Reports of fire risk.  Reports of overcrowding.  Reports of unfair trading/lease/contract issues.  Reports of noise/disturbance.  Complaints about ASB/drugs/crime/prostitution, etc.  Enviro-crime data i.e. waste accumulation/pests.  Fuel poverty data.  Council tax/benefit fraud. 4.3 The consideration of any proposal for additional licensing must have regard to data specifically for HMO’s w hich are outside of the current regulatory powers and are within the additional licensing definition. The Council will need to demonstrate that HMO’s which are within the current regulatory framework produce one set of data and those that are within the pr oposed additional licensing framework, would produce another set of data. 4.4 The Council will need to consider whether there is enough data to justify additional licensing for specific areas within the borough or for the entire borough. Therefore, the data analysed must be able to mapped geographically to correlate issues in particular areas. 4.5 The Council’s Business Intelligence Service could be utilised to support the required data collection and analysis but additional capacity will be needed to undertake this work. Alternatively, the Council could seek external consultant services to complete this process. 4.6 Compliance with Section 57 In order to satisfy this section, the Council must demonstrate that it has considered the use of existing powers to deal with problems identified. This will include existing powers to deal with; housing standard and disrepair complaints specifically for all types of HMO (either Mandatory or Additional), ASB, nuisance, enviro-crime, etc. 4.7 Furthermore, the Council must demonstrate that it has considered how an additional licensing policy will integrate with its Housing Policy, having regard to homelessness, empty properties and ASB within the private rented sector. 4.8 The Council will also need to have regard to its housin g stock to recognise the importance of HMO’s of all sizes as part of the overall housing offer throughout the borough. This will involve the analysis of data from a recent Housing Stock Survey. Cabinet report – 10 October 2024 (Part 1 Public) 5. Requirements for a full consultation should Additional Licensing be proposed 5.1 If the data analysis outlined above supports and justifies Additional Licensing, the Council has a duty to consult extensively with all persons likely to be affected by the policy. This will include, tenants, landlords and their associations/professional bodies, communities, partner agencies, neighbouring boroughs etc. 5.2 Steps the Council will need to take to ensure that the consultation is extensive and will meet the legal requirements of the Housing Act 2004;  Full engagement with residents and residents associations.  Engagement with Ward Councillors.  Engagement with the Private Sector Landlords Forum.  Engagement with known Hillingdon landlords/Managing agents and Landlord Associations.  On-line consultation survey to seek views.  Notifications to all surrounding councils advising on proposal.  Notification to Landlords Associations for comments.  Engagement with organisations with a significant amount of transient tenants i.e. Brunel University, NHS, etc.  Engagement with the Metropolitan Police and Police Crime Commissioner.  Engagement with the London Fire and Emergency Planning Authority.  Engagement with internal Council Services i.e. Community Safety, Youth Justice, Care Leavers, Street Scene etc. 6. Benefits of Additional Licensing 6.1 Since October 2018, all HMOs which have 5 or more occupants forming 2 or more households fall within the remit of Mandatory Licensing. In Hillingdon, many HMOs still exist where there are 3 or more occupants forming 2 or more households and which are not subject to mandatory licensing requirements. An Additional Licensing scheme covering these dwellings would help to address the challenges presented by HMOs in the borough through strengthening landlord responsibility for standards and tenant conduct. Considering the issues that Hillingdon is experiencing in the borough with HMOs introducing an additional licensing scheme in part or in its entirety would have a positive impact on residents. This would create equality in the protections offered to HMO residents and drive improvements in conditions in HMOs more generally. The scheme would therefore become a major influence on the Council’s Social Housing Allocation P olicy. This policy is currently out to public consultation and will be presented to Cabinet to consider in November 2024. 6.2 Landlords may experience the fo llowing benefits from an Additional Licensing policy:  Responsible landlords will receive information and support to help tackle antisocial behaviour. Cabinet report – 10 October 2024 (Part 1 Public)  Poor performing landlords will receive support and training to help them improve.  Improved rental income as areas are maintained and improved.  Increase of property value.  Improvement in the reputation of private landlords.  Shorter void periods.  Landlords who have voluntarily engaged with a recognised accreditation scheme can also benefit from a reduced licensing fee.  Greater ability for the landlord and authority to deal with problematic tenants. 6.3 Tenants may experience the following benefits from an Additional Licensing Policy:  More professional landlords providing good quality homes.  Likelihood of improvements to their properties.  Licence conditions will create a clear set of rules that all HMO landlords must follow.  Reduced risk of homelessness and increased length of stay.  Licensing would ensure private landlords are managing and maintaining their properties.  Minimum standards for rented housing are met. 6.4 Communities may experience the following benefits from an Additional Licensing Policy:  Increased housing demand.  Reduced crime and ASB through new licence conditions.  An area’s image is improved and more desirable to live in.  Improved security and more settled communities.  Reduced number of empty properties.  Better housing standards.  Reduced environmental problems, such as waste accumulation, pests and fly- tipping.  Landlords will also have to give and ask for references for their tenants.  Protecting vulnerable people who may currently be living in poorly maintained properties. 7. Planning Options – Article 4 7.1 Current legislation provides permitted development rights for small family homes to be converted into small HMOs for between 3 and 6 people. This eases the process by which this type of accommodation can be created but hampers the council’s ability to manag e the impact of such changes. As a result, a number of London boroughs have introduced Article 4 Directions to withdraw these permitted developments including Ealing, Hounslow, Barnet and Brent in west London. An Article 4 Direction does not mean that it w ould not be possible to carry out conversions of family houses to small HMOs, but it would allow the council to consider the impact of these conversions through the need for planning permission. It is important to note that the Article 4 Direction would only apply to HMOs created after the date it came into effect and could not be applied retrospectively to existing HMOs. Cabinet report – 10 October 2024 (Part 1 Public) 7.2 Hillingdon already has a part -borough Article 4 Direction which was introduced in 2013 removing permitted development rights for HMO s for the wards surrounding Brunel University where there was strong evidence of the negative impacts arising from the use of small HMOs for student accommodation. There was insufficient evidence in 2013 for making the borough wide direction. However, the situation has moved on since 2013 and the housing evidence suggests increasing issues in relation to HMOs across the borough. 8. Legislative Process to Introduce an Article 4 Direction 8.1 Should a decision be made that the council wishes to progress with the gathering evidence for an extension to the part -borough Article 4 Direction then the recommendation would be that a non-immediate Article 4 Direction is taken forward. 8.2 The national planning guidance on Article 4 Directions has changed since the current HMO was introduced in 2013. The National Planning Policy Framework (NPPF) now states that any proposed Directions should:  Be limited to situations where an Article 4 direction is necessary to protect local amenity or the well-being of the area.  Be based on robust evidence, and apply to the smallest geographical area possible. 8.3 It is also important to highlight that the Secretary of State has the power to modify or cancel Article 4 Dir ections where they consider these tests have not been satisfactorily met. Therefore, work needs to be undertaken to justify the extension of the HMO Article 4 Direction to become borough -wide. This would need to establish information on the following:  The extent of small HMOs (C4) within the borough.  Whether it is likely these will decrease or increase in the future. Cabinet report – 10 October 2024 (Part 1 Public)  Whether this is a borough-wide issue or if it is more localised.  Determine the harm to the amenity and well-being of the area from this type of development. 8.4 If it was deemed appropriate to recommend an Article 4 Direction, this would be presented to Full Council for determination. This would include the extent and timeframes for implementing the direction. There would need to be a consultat ion period of at least 21 days when representations concerning the direction may be made to the local planning authority. The direction is also sent to the Secretary of State. 8.5 As a non-immediate Article 4 Direction, the direction would not come into force until a minimum of 12 months after it was first made and advertised, in order to remove compensation liability. 9. Links to Corporate Priorities 9.1 Hillingdon Housing Strategy 2021/22 to 2025/26 has ‘Leading on Improving Housing Standards’ as one of five priorities. The strategy highlights the need to develop a more detailed understanding of the private rented sector including its condition, linked to potential concerns regarding fire precautions, inadequate heating, sub - dividing of properties, overcrowdin g, damp and mould growth and poor housing conditions for vulnerable households. The strategy includes an action to ‘gather evidence regarding the prevalence of poor conditions in the different parts of the private rented sector and consider the feasibility of different discretionary licensing options.’ 9.2 The proposed evidence assessment is highly likely to inform wider strategic and policy issues which the Council can consider. For example, conversions of sheds/garages/outbuildings, exploitation, modern slavery and trafficking, immigrants arriving through Heathrow, vulnerable tenants etc. Once issues are identified and evidenced, the Council will be in a strong position to consider measures to tackle wider policy areas. 9.3 There is a strong chance that many more converted dwellings will be identified through the housing stock survey, which could lead to additional Council Tax and Business Rate income streams for the Council. 10. HMO Controls in Neighbouring Boroughs 10.1 The legal controls that are in place in our neighbouring London boroughs will have an influence on how likely it is that a developer or landlord will seek to establish a new HMO in Hillingdon. The controls in place in west London authorities are summarised below. Cabinet report – 10 October 2024 (Part 1 Public) Borough Additional licensing Selective Licensing Article 4 Barnet    Brent    Ealing     Hammersmith & Fulham    Harrow    Hounslow    Kensington & Chelsea    11. Renters Rights Bill 11.1 On 11th September 2024 the Government introduced the Renters Rights Bill. This Bill, if implemented in full, will introduce a range of new legal requirements and controls in the private rented sector, many of which will add to the responsibilities of local authorities. No information is available currently on how local authorities will be funded to deliver these new responsibilities. Proposed changes include:  Applying a Decent Homes Standard to the private rented sector for the first time, enforced by local autho rities. Landlords who fail to address serious hazards could be fined and face prosecution for non-compliance.  Banning rental bidding wars by prohibiting landlords forcing tenants to bid for their properties. Landlords and letting agents will be legally req uired to publish an asking rent for their property. They will also be banned from asking for, encouraging, or accepting any bids above this price.  Banning in-tenancy rent increases written in to contracts to prevent landlords implementing too high rents mi d-tenancy. Under these reforms, landlords will only be allowed to raise the rent once a year, and to the market rate.  Abolishing blanket bans on tenants with children or those in receipt of benefits to ensure fair access to housing for all.  Introducing a new Private Rented Sector Database to help landlords understand their obligations for compliance and provide tenants the information they need to make informed choices for new tenancies.  Strengthening local authority enforcement by expanding civil penalt ies, introducing a package of investigatory powers.  Bringing in a new requirement for local authorities to report on enforcement activity. 11.2 The Bill, when enacted will have a significant impact on the workload of the Private Sector Housing Service as it will introduce a Decent Homes Standard for the Private Rented Sector along with new enforcement powers providing greater sanctions. This is likely to bring additional inspection requirements and additional servi ce demand into the Service. Cabinet report – 10 October 2024 (Part 1 Public) 11.3 The completion of an up-to-date Housing Stock Survey will enable the Council to better understand the implications of these new powers by providing a full property profile of the private rented sector and indicating the number of HMO’s across the borough. 12. Conclusion 12.1 This report outlines the necessary steps and considerations for the council to evaluate the implementation of an Additional Licensing Policy for Houses of Multiple Occupation (HMOs) in Hillingdon. The recommendations would enable the council to determine whether additional controls on HMOs in the b orough would help to address the issues identified with unlicensed HMOs, including anti-social behaviour, poor housing conditions, and safety concerns. The process involves gathering extensive data, consulting with various stakeholders, and assessing the resource requirements for effective enforcement. 12.2 The workstreams mentioned in this report are currently unbudgeted however , the projects could be undertaken by utilising the capital transformation budget to fund additional resources for data collection and analysis. 12.3 The Council mu st also consider the implications of the Renters Rights Bill, which will introduce new regulatory responsibilities and enforcement powers. Financial Implications All initial feasibility costs connected to the proposed licensing controls and private sector option changes will be contained with existing budgets. Once feasibility works have been identified resulting from HMO and Private Sector changes, costs connected to these works will be assessed for budgeting purposes to ensure operational ongoing financial impact will be fully contained within service area resources RESIDENT BENEFIT & CONSULTATION The benefit or impact upon Hillingdon residents, service users and communities? Implementing the recommendations within this report will allow the Council to take full stock of the current concerns with HMO’s. Data gathered will provide information on ASB, disrepairs , community impact, etc which will heavily influence the Councils HMO strategy and/or Additional Licensing Policy. Data will highlight concentrations of HMO’s in the borough allowing the Council to consider specific strategies for different areas enabling a targeted approach to HMO regulation and enforcement. Once data is gathered and the recommended strategy is proposed, residents and the wider community will have an opportunity to submit their views to the Council for full consideration through a full public consultation exercise. Cabinet report – 10 October 2024 (Part 1 Public) Consultation carried out or required There is no requirement for public consultation on the recommendations in this report at this stage, however, should the Council propose an Additional Licensing Policy based on the analysis that it is necessary to undertake, a full public consultation and engagement exercise will commence. As Additional Licensing would have significant impact on HMO administration and management in the borough, a long consultation period would be recommended. Councils usually consult for 10-12 weeks to ensure that appropriate time is given to full engagement exercises. If an Article 4 Direction is implemented this would require consultation in accordance with the relevant legislative requirements. CORPORATE CONSIDERATIONS Corporate Finance Corporate Finance has reviewed this report and concurs with the Financial Implications set out above, noting there are no direct financial implications associated with the recommendations in this report. Legal Legal Services confirm that the report accurately sets out the legal position relating to the possible introduction of additional licensing for HMOs and/ or restricting permitted development rights through an Article 4 Direction. Both statutory processes require a strong evidence base to show that a significant proportion of HMOs are being managed ineffectively so as to give rise to particular problems for occupants or members of the public and, in relation to Article 4, that it is necessary to restrict permitted development rights to protect local amenity or the well-being of an area. In addition, before any further restrictions can be introduced statutory consultation is required and decisions made by the Council in relation to additional licensing may require approval from the Secretary of State. Further, the Secretary of State has power to revoke an Article 4 direction. Further legal advice will be given as necessary as the evidence base is collated to assess whether the statutory criteria for further action by the Council are satisfied. BACKGROUND PAPERS  Housing Act 2004 (legislation.gov.uk)  The Licensing and Management of Houses in Multiple Occupation (Additional Provisions) (England) Regulations 2007 (legislation.gov.uk)  Houses in multiple occupation and residential property licensing reform: guidance for local housing authorities - GOV.UK (www.gov.uk) Cabinet report – 10 October 2024 (Part 1 Public) Appendix 1- Controls on HMOs in other London Boroughs Property Licensing Schemes Across London Mandatory Additional Selective Barking & Dagenham ✓ Consultation ended April 2024 Scheme Ended 31 August 2024 Barnet ✓ ✓ × Bexley ✓ × × Brent ✓ ✓ ✓ Bromley ✓ × × Camden ✓ ✓ × City of London ✓ × × Croydon ✓ × × Ealing ✓ ✓ ✓ Enfield ✓ ✓ ✓ Greenwich ✓ ✓ ✓ Hackney ✓ ✓ ✓ Hammersmith & Fulham ✓ ✓ ✓ Haringey ✓ ✓ ✓ Havering ✓ ✓ ✓ Hillingdon ✓ × × Hounslow ✓ ✓ × Islington ✓ ✓ ✓ Kensington & Chelsea ✓ ✓ ✓ Kingston Upon Thames ✓ × × Lambeth ✓ ✓ ✓ Lewisham ✓ ✓ ✓ Merton ✓ ✓ ✓ Newham ✓ ✓ ✓ Redbridge ✓ ✓ ✓ Richmond Upon Thames ✓ × × Southwark ✓ ✓ ✓ Sutton ✓ × × Tower Hamlets ✓ ✓ ✓ Waltham Forest ✓ ✓ ✓ Wandsworth ✓ Consulting on additional licensing ends 14 Oct 2024 Consulting on selective licensing ends 14 Oct 2024 Westminster ✓ ✓ × Cabinet report – 10 October 2024 (Part 1 Public)

Text extracted automatically from the PDF, so layout, tables and images are not shown. Open the original PDF on LB Hillingdon’s website.

Relevant Select Committee
Expiry date for any scrutiny call-in / date decision can be implemented (if no call-in)
Officer(s) to action
Directorate
Classification
8. London Borough of Hillingdon Digital Strategy PDF 715 KB
RESOLVED: That Cabinet: 1. Approves Hillingdon’s Digital Strategy 2024-27 in the Appendix. 2. To deliver the Strategy: a) Agrees the programmes and projects as set out in the report for the remainder of 2024/25 and 2025/26; b) Authorises the release of the remaining approved capital budget for 2024/25 and 2025/26 to deliver this; c) Delegates authority to the Chief Digital & Information Officer and Corporate Director of Finance (S151), in consultation with the Cabinet Member for Corporate Services, to incur expenditure within this budget and make all necessary procurement decisions on the programmes and projects set out in the report, reporting decisions for transparency as required and; d) Agrees that any variations to specific projects within the programme for 2024/25 and 2025/26 be subject to i ) being within the Strategy’s objectives, ii) being within the approved budget and associated aggregate savings for the financial year and iii) having the agreement of the Chief Digital & Information Officer and Corporate Director of Finance (S151), in consultation with the Cabinet Member for Corporate Services. 3. Agree to receive an annual report going forward, setting out progress on the Strategy and delivery of savings targets, seeking agreement to the programmes and projects for the upcoming financial year and seeking further delegated authority to successfully implement the programme. Reasons for decision Cabinet agreed Hillingdon’s new Digital Strategy, which set out a clear vision for the Borough and the Council, for the next three years. Cabinet also agreed the programme of projects for the ensuing years and provided delegated authority for its effective delivery. The Cabinet Member for Corporate Services introduced the report, citing the ambitious three-year investment program aimed at enhancing the efficiency of the authority. The Cabinet Member emphasised the need to modernise and transform outdated processes, and by re-engineering these processes, the Council would create significant savings and ensure the maintenance of crucial frontline services. As part of the Strategy, the Cabinet Member highlighted the importance of leveraging the vast amounts of data held by the local authority, to make it easily accessible and understandable for staff, thereby improving their decision-making processes. Other critical aspects of the Strategy explained were plans to revamp the Council’s website to enhance user experience, so residents could quickly find the information and services they need and also invest in staff training to maximise the benefits of new technologies. The Leader of the Council supported the strategy, noting the significant investment of £9 million and the expected high return on investment, underscoring the necessity of a robust digital strategy for a modern local authority. Alternative options considered and rejected The Cabinet could have agreed to operate and develop digital services without a strategy, amended the programme of projects or only have agreed to deliver projects which delivered a more immediate return on investment sacrificing longer-term benefits. Relevant Select Committee Corporate Resources & Infrastructure Expiry date for any scrutiny call-in / date decision can be implemented (if no call-in) This matter can be called in by the relevant select committee by 5pm, Friday 18 October 2024. If not called-in, Cabinet’s decisions can then be implemented. Officer(s) to action Darren Persaud / Matthew Wallbridge Directorate Digital & Intelligence Classification Public - The report and any background papers relating to this decision by the Cabinet are available to view on the Council's website or by visiting the Civic Centre, Uxbridge.
📄 London Borough of Hillingdon Digital Strategy PDF 715 KB
Read the text of this document (10 pages)
Cabinet Report – 10 October 2024 Page 1 (Public – Part 1) LONDON BOROUGH OF HILLINGDON DIGITAL STRATEGY Cabinet Member & Portfolio Councillor Douglas Mills Cabinet Member for Corporate Services Responsible Officer Chief Digital & Information Officer Report Author & Directorate Darren Persaud Digital & Intelligence Papers with report Appendix - Digital Strategy HEADLINES Summary This report presents the Council’s Digital Strategy for the next three years. Building upon the full Council Strategy, approved by Cabinet in October 2022 . The Digital Strategy will support our five commitments to residents , in particular our aim to be a digital - enabled, modern, well-run council. The strategy sets out the Council’s vision for digital, which aims to improve the way the Council delivers services to residents by utilising technology. We will put residents first by enabling them to access the services they need quickly and at their own convenience, whilst also deliveri ng more efficient and effective processes for council staff. This report to Cabinet seeks to obtain approval for the Digital Strategy. Putting our Residents First Delivering on the Council Strategy 2022-2026 This report supports our ambition for residents / the Council of: An efficient, well-run, digital-enabled council working with partners to deliver services to improve the lives of all our residents This report supports our commitments to residents of: A Digital-Enabled, Modern, Well-Run Council Financial Cost Agreeing the Digital Strategy will act as a framework for the service to deliver a £4.2m benefit for the Council, utilising £9m of approved capital programme budgets to secure this saving, with this investment leading to a payback period of just over 2 years. Relevant Select Committee Corporate Resources & Infrastructure Select Committee Relevant Ward(s) All Cabinet Report – 10 October 2024 Page 2 (Public – Part 1) RECOMMENDATIONS That Cabinet: 1. Approves Hillingdon’s Digital Strategy 2024-27 in the Appendix. 2. To deliver the Strategy: a) Agrees the programmes and projects as set out in the report for the remainder of 2024/25 and 2025/26; b) Authorises the release of the remaining approved capital budget for 2024/25 and 2025/26 to deliver this; c) Delegates authority to the Chief Digital & Information Officer and Corporate Director of Finance (S151) , in consultation with the Cabinet Member for Corporate Services, to incur expenditure within this budget and make all necessary procurement decisions on the programmes and projects set out in the report, reporting decisions for transparency as required and; d) Agrees that any variations to specific projects within the programme for 2024/25 and 2025/26 be subject to i) being within the Strategy’s objectives, ii) being within the approved budget and associated aggregate savings for the financial year and iii) having the agreement of the Chief Digital & Information Officer and Corporate Director of Finance (S151) , in consultation with the Cabinet Member for Corporate Services. 3. Agree to receive an annual report going forward, setting out progress on the Strategy and delivery of savings targets, seeking agreement to the programmes and projects for the upcoming financial year and seeking further delegated authority to successfully implement the programme. Reasons for recommendation Cabinet is requested to consider Hillingdon’s Digital Strategy, which sets out a clear vision for the Borough and the Council, for the next three years. The report seeks Cabinet agreement to the programmes and projects for 2024/25 and 2025/26, along with the release of capital monies and delegated authority to the relevant Chief Officer s to implement the Strategy and projects expediently. It is proposed that an annual report be presented to Cabinet to agree each year’s programme of projects and to review progress on delivery of the Strategy. Alternative options considered / risk management The following alternative options had been considered, but since ruled out for the reasons given below: 1) Option one: Do Nothing : The “do nothing” option is not recommended as it constitutes a missed opportunity and goes against our commitment to be a “digitally enabled modern, well-run Council” in the long term. Doing nothing in the short term will result in ongoing inefficiencies and a greater level of long-term costs. The “do nothing” option is cost neutral and just delivering incremental improvements. There is a risk that the costs to catch-up will increase significantly year on year. Cabinet Report – 10 October 2024 Page 3 (Public – Part 1) 2) Option 2: Only deliver projects which deliver a return on investment (ROI) : This option would only focus on investment in projects which deliver a tangible cost saving or return. This option is not recommended as it limits long term benefits and there is too great a risk that we make decisions in the short term to make savings that restrict our long-term digital, data and technology capabilities and restrict medium to long term savings. Risk management Risk management within the Digi tal Strategy will be closely monitored to ensure alignment with the Strategy's objectives. Programme and p roject governance boards are already in place for each of the five programmes, which meet monthly to monitor progress, spend and flag any risks to the Senior Responsible Officer. Any ‘red’ rated risks will then be reported back into the Chief Digital & Information Officer to own and mitigate. Any variations to specific projects will be subject to three key conditions: i) They must be within the Strategy’s objectives; ii) They must be within the approved budget for the financial yea r and associated aggregate savings for the financial year and; iii) They must have the agreement of the Chief Digital & Information Officer and Corporate Director of Finance (s151), in consultation with the Cabinet Member for Corporate Services. Additionally, risks will be fed through the corporate risk management group, and an annual report will be received going forward, setting out progress on the Strategy. This will seek agreement to the programmes and projects for the upcoming year, and seeking further delegated authority to successfully implement the programme. Select Committee comments On 17 September 2024, the draft Digital Strategy was presented to the Corporate Resources and Infrastructure Select Committee for their comments. The Committee agreed the following comments upon the Chair’s suggestion: “The Committee welcomes the advances and positive strides made in the digital strategy and at the same time recognising the need to make resident experience with the council evermore effectively digital in addition to actively supporting those residents less able to access digital services.” SUPPORTING INFORMATION 1. Hillingdon Council ’s ambition is to strive to be an efficient, well -run, digitally enabled council, working with partners to deliver services to improve the lives of all our residents. 2. Becoming a digital council is fundamentally improving our resident, visitor, business and staff experience through simpler, better services and tools. The strategy will set out the steps to improve the way the council delivers services to residents by utilising technology. The core ambition is to put residents first by enabling them to access the services they Cabinet Report – 10 October 2024 Page 4 (Public – Part 1) need quickly and at their own convenience, whilst also delivering more efficient and effective processes for council staff. 3. A prior report and pres entation to the former Finance and Corporate Services Se lect Committee on the Council’s digital journey in February 2024 referred to the Digital Strategy being key to deliver a number of proposals; being closely aligned to service transformation and focused on leveraging technology to further enhance and streamline the Council’s business operations, alongside promoting self-service models internally and externally. To achieve this the Council agreed on 22 February 2024 to an investment of £14,816k for a Corporate Technology and Innovation budget to 2028/29 with this investment driving the digital savings included in the Council’s saving programme. 4. This investment is to deliver the Digital Strategy and as described in the Cabinet report, it is ‘ closely aligned to service transformation and focused on leveraging technology to further enhance and streamline the Council’s business operations, alongside promoting self-service models internally and exter nally’. £5,270k is earmarked in the Council’s savings programme in relation to this investment for the period of this strategy , rising to £5,670k by 2028/29. 5. To ensure the Digital Strategy and the associated savings are delivered at pace, delegated authority is sought for the expenditure of the Corporate Technology and Innovation budget (including all capital expenditure and contract awards). 6. The vision for our Digital Strategy is ‘We will improve the way the council delivers services to residents by utilising technology. We will put residents first by enabling them to access the services they need quickly and at their own convenience, whilst also delivering more efficient and effective processes for council staff’. 7. Our approach to guide all our digital, technology and data transformation work will be guided by four principles: 1. Prioritising customer needs 2. Carrying out an agile approach to delivery 3. Delivering new business models driven by data 4. Taking a One Council approach. 8. Over the last few years, a considerable amount of work has been undertaken to lay the foundations for the Council’s digital journey and enable this strategy. Some specific examples of this are: a. Hillingdon were the first UK local authority t o deploy an automated voice and web chat solution at scale. This has allowed residents to better self -serve and get a quicker resolution to their enquiry. b. Delivery of a modern and flexible infrastructure, as well as a reduction in the number of IT applications. c. Implementation of hybrid working, allowing for quick adoption of hybrid working post the pandemic. d. Ongoing delivery of a programme of connectivity improvements , increasing bandwidth across all of our sites and across the borough. When the Digital Cabinet Report – 10 October 2024 Page 5 (Public – Part 1) Connectivity Project started in November 2020, the Council was at 5% Full Fibre. The Council is currently at 75.27%, and in the top half of London Boroughs. 9. Over the last few months, the Council has been accelerating its digital journey by: a. Starting to roll out new devices and the learning and development to utilise them across the organisation so the workforce can be as productive as possible. b. Started using Microsoft Copilot to utilise its ability to use natural language to ask it to perform tasks – with the key benefit of improved efficiency; enabling people to do more in less time. c. Accelerated business intelligence across the orga nisation with the delivery of a single view of the household, and dashboards for our key services to understand performance and manage demand. d. Improved our applications and systems in the areas like social care, HR, finance, procurement and housing. 10. To support the delivery of this strategy, five priorities have been developed: 1. Building services online by default - Residents expect services to be online and available on any device. People should be able to pay online, and experience seamless services from us. In turn this will improve resident experience' on our customer access team and business areas, and improve our resident, visitor and business experience. 2. Better data, better decisions - All local authorities have a lot of data, but often lack the insight to make good decisions both internally and for residents. Better data, and the ability to use it wisely, bri ngs a huge amount of opportunities from better decisions by understanding resident needs across multiple systems. 3. Modernise our infrastructure & systems – a perquisite is modern infrastructure with systems that talk to each other, highly reliable hosting and platforms, the best of commodity technology and modern, cloud -based and application programming interface driven architecture. 4. Build digital capability and inclusion - A highly skilled digital, data and technology resource which can be deployed to support our ongoing transformation needs. We also need to upskill our employees to be confident with technology and use this to implement the digital elements of service deliver y to better meet the needs of residents and support those who do not have digital access. And in turn, ensure residents are supported to have access to and use digital devices, or supported if they can’t. This will be supported by the Council’s Digital Inclusion strategy. 5. Deliver a digital place - There is also an important role for the council in facilitating the use of digital technology to bring about further improvements within the borough, and the way it functions. This is increasingly important as Hillingdon, like many other areas, faces challenges from population growth, automation, congestion and the climate crisis. Cabinet Report – 10 October 2024 Page 6 (Public – Part 1) 11. To deliver these priorities, five programmes have been created: 1. Automations and Integrations – a projected investment of £1.4m in the medium term to develop seamless integration of our systems and automate our officer processes to enhance efficiency. Introducing a single front door for high -cost/high-demand services like social care and housing will simplify access for users. Lev eraging AI will further optimize our processes, eliminating the need for manual minute -taking in meetings and reducing the time required for handling FOIs and complaints. 2. Business Intelligence – a projected investment of £2.65 m in the medium term to deliver a single view of the customer / household. This will be used to drive evidence-based decision making to challenge current ways of working and service delivery models. 3. Customer Experience – a projected investment of £1.7m in the medium term to provide residents with an end -to-end customer journey, allowing them to stay updated on the progress of their enquiries or transactions either proactively or through our website. The revamped website will enable residents to easily and quickly find what th ey need and complete transactions. Additionally, our digital inclusion programme will equip people with the skills, connectivity, and technology to be digital, while prioritizing contact with vulnerable and digitally excluded residents. 4. Consolidating and improving systems – a projected investment of £2m in the medium term focused on replacing systems that are nearing end of life or are not fit for purpose, consolidating and improving them to enhance efficiency. This includes reducing the number of Education systems into one. 5. Enabling – a projected investment of £1.25m in the medium term to deliver new devices across the organisation and implement a learning and development programme to enable officers and Members to be more productive and utilise the technology we have. 12. The projected spend over the medium term for these 5 programmes are: Table 1: Programme Spend Breakdown Programme 2024/25 2025/26 2026/27 Total Automations and Integrations 162 978 260 1,400 Business Intelligence 1,020 1,520 110 2,650 Customer Experience 820 620 260 1,700 Consolidating and improving systems 599 735 666 2,000 Enabling 310 548 392 1,250 Total 2,911 4,401 1,688 9,000 In addition, there is a £1m contingency in the programme. 13. The programme and projects for the remainder of 2024/25 and 2025/26 aligned to the table above are as follows, for Cabinet to agree: Cabinet Report – 10 October 2024 Page 7 (Public – Part 1)  Automations and Integrations: Transforming our back-office processes and systems to significantly reduce any manual processes.  Business and Intelligence: Automation of key business reports  Business and Intelligence: Single view of the resident and household  Customer Experience: New Hillingdon Website  Customer Experience: End to end process improvements for residents, Members and officers  Customer Experience: Advanced phone-based AI as our digital front door  Customer Experience: Digital inclusion  Consolidating and improving systems: Improving infrastructure and security  Consolidating and improving systems: New planning system, social care, housing, waste and HR systems improvements, and new redaction software  Enabling: New learning and development programme  Enabling: New telephony platform 14. Hillingdon Council is committed to being a ‘digital-enabled, modern, well -run council’ as demonstrated by the investment made by the council this year. This investment will ensure a better digital experience for residents and the ability to transact with the Council 24/7 365 days. The council will improve its website so residents can get the information they need more quickly, and transactions will be automated so that we can divert our resources to the people that need our help the most . And through investing in tools for staff , as the Microsoft CEO (Satya Nadella) described “we will improve the productivity of our staff by removing the drudgery of process at work and speeding up the time to human ingenuity by removing the productivity drain in what people spend their time doing”. Financial Implications Approval of the digital strategy will not have any direct financial implications in itself with the other recommendations contained in this report enabling the service to move at pace to deliver against the strategy and secure benefits for the Council. As stated in the body of the report, Cabinet and Council approved a capital programme budget for Corporate Innovation & Technology for the budget strategy period of 2024/25 to 2028/29 of £14,186k, with June cabinet agreeing to re phase unspent capital budgets from 2022/23 into 2024/25 of £1,290k, taking the total investment for the period to £16,106k, with a digital saving of £5,670k included in the budget strategy through to 2028/29, with £4,200k of this falling within the remit of the Digital Strategy, with the profiling of this activity set out in the table below: Cabinet Report – 10 October 2024 Page 8 (Public – Part 1) Table 2: Budget Breakdown 2024/25 2025/26 2026/27 Strategy Period 2027/28 2028/29 Total £'000 £'000 £'000 £'000 £'000 £'000 £'000 February 2024 Approved Budget 2,042 6,122 3,384 11,548 1,634 1,634 14,816 2023/24 Rephasing 1,290 0 0 1,290 0 0 1,290 Total Capital Programme Budget 3,332 6,122 3,384 12,838 1,634 1,634 16,106 Released to date (3,914) (3,914) Remaining Capital Programme Budget 8,924 12,192 Programme Spend Breakdown (Table 1) 2,911 4,401 1,688 9,000 0 0 9,000 Recommendation 2b in this report seeks to release the remaining capital programme budget that largely funds the activity as set out in the digital strategy, recognising that potentially £76k would need to be funded from either the capital general contingency budget or an increase to the budget via the refresh of the Council’s budget strategy. The £4m Capital Releases to date include funding for the following projects:  Refresh of the Council’s devices  Social Care & Education System Solution  Data Analytics Platform  HR Improvement Programme  Microsoft Co-Pilot Implementation  Libraries Online Booking System Over the period of the Digital Strategy, 2024/25 to 2026/27, the payback period on the investment is approximately two and a half years. It is worth noting that some of the investment will not generate savings and are critical in the replacement of core applications needed by the council. For example , the replacement of our planning application system which is going end of life. Table 3: Projected Benefits 2024/25 £'000 2025/26 £'000 2026/27 £'000 Strategy Period £'000 Digital Strategy 1,463 1,425 1,369 4,257 Benefits of nearly £1.5m are expected to be delivered in 2024/25 with a further £ 2.8m to be delivered in 2025/26 and 2026/27. Focussed on the three strategic programmes of Automation and Integration, Business Intelligence and Customer Experience, the digital road map seeks to deliver total benefits of £4.2m through leveraging digital, data and technology to deliver Cabinet Report – 10 October 2024 Page 9 (Public – Part 1) transformational change in service delivery models as part of end -to-end service redesign to ensure cost effective and efficient ways of working. This will include implementation of a new data platform to enhance organisational analytic capability and strategic data driven decision making, and the utilisation of AI to drive efficiencies in council processes. The benefits delivered over the strategy period per Directorate are assumed to be: 2024/25 £'000 2025/26 £'000 2026/27 £'000 Strategy Period £'000 Adult Services & Health Place Children & Young People Finance Central Services Digital & Intelligence 0 0 0 0 0 1,463 265 124 110 66 58 802 324 151 134 81 71 608 589 275 243 147 130 2,873 Total 1,463 1,425 1,369 4,257 Each programmes benefits realisation plan will be signed off by Digital & Intelligence and the service directorates (client departments of Digital & Intelligence) to agree the targets and delivery details ahead of any expenditure being incurred. This signed agreement will then be used by the Councils Chief Finance Officer to reduce budgets in service areas. RESIDENT BENEFIT & CONSULTATION The benefit or impact upon residents, service users and communities The three-year Digital Strategy presented in this report provides the vision and a comprehensive framework of commitments to residents which seek to continue to enhance the Borough and continuously improve Council services to be modern, represent value for money and meet residents’ needs. Residents will experience an even better experience when interacting with the council in accessing services and information. They will be able to carry out simple transactions quickly and easily, with a more joined up approach ensuring they only need to make contact once. The council will have a better understanding of our residents, through the smarter use of joined - up data. We will be using modern technology to join data sets and get insights which allow us to continuously improve our services and make better decisions. Consultation carried out or required None at this stage. Cabinet Report – 10 October 2024 Page 10 (Public – Part 1) CORPORATE CONSIDERATIONS Corporate Finance Corporate Finance have reviewed this report this report and concur with the Financial Implications set out above, noting the recommendation to agree the new Digital Strategy for 2024/ 25 to 2026/27 and release the capital programme budget for the first two years of the strategy to implement the planned programme of spend. Releasing the remaining capital programme budget for the period of the Digital S trategy will enable the service to deliver against the planned programme as set out in the report to maximise benefits from the investments with the Council’s budget strategy , after rephasing of unspent 2023/24 capital programme budgets and released funds to date, this recommendation will release £9m of capital programme budgets to fund the activity identified in this report , with savings of £4.2m being reported against this investment, with this report granting delegated authority to the Chief Digital & Information Officer, in consultation with the Corporate Director of Fiannce (s151) and the Cabinet Member for Corporate Services to decide how this is spent. Furthermore, it is noted than an annual report will be submitted to Cabinet that sets out progress against the strategy. Legal Legal Services confirm that there are no legal impediments to the Council adopting the proposed Strategy which is in accordance with the outcome of the consultation. BACKGROUND PAPERS  Council Strategy 2022-2026  Finance & Corporate Services Select Committee – February 2024  Corporate Resources & Infrastructure Select Committee – September 2024

Text extracted automatically from the PDF, so layout, tables and images are not shown. Open the original PDF on LB Hillingdon’s website.

📄 Digital Strategy 2024-2027 , item 8. PDF 1 MB
Read the text of this document (21 pages)
Digital Strategy 2024-2027 www.hillingdon.gov.uk/digital Hillingdon Council continues to put residents first in everything it does. The Council Strategy 2022-2026 builds on the successes of the council to date and sets a clear vision, the ambition for residents and the council, and commitments to residents over the next four years to continue to respond positively to changing demands and requirements. The strategy provides a broad, overarching framework for effective business planning and strong performance management within the council to drive the transformation of services to continue to meet the changing needs and expectations of residents.  One of our ambitions is to be a digital-enabled, modern, well-run sustainable council with sound financial management, achieving positive outcomes for residents. Our Digital Strategy sets out our vision to embrace technology to be efficient and make it easier for residents to use council services, including supporting those who are unable to use technology. Councillor Douglas Mills Cabinet Member for Corporate Services 2 Hillingdon Council Digital Strategy Foreword “Our Digital Strategy sets out our vision to embrace technology to be efficient and make it easier for residents to use council services, including supporting those who are unable to use technology.” ‘Digital’ is a mindset of being service-oriented and adaptive, and having an absolute focus on improving the lives of our residents. What is Digital? 3 Hillingdon Council Digital Strategy Our Vision We will improve the way the council delivers services to residents by utilising technology. We will put residents first by enabling them to access the services they need quickly and at their own convenience, whilst also delivering more efficient and effective processes for council staff. What is Digital? Principles We will do this by: ➜ Prioritising customer needs ➜ Carrying out an agile approach to delivery ➜ Delivering new business models driven by data ➜ Having a ‘One Council’ collaborative aim, facilitating cross-council project teams and sharing goals. 4 Hillingdon Council Digital Strategy Progress so far Automated voice and web chat Becoming the first UK local authority to deploy an automated voice and web chat solution at scale. Infrastructure Delivering a modern and flexible infrastructure and a reduction in the number of applications. Hybrid working Quickly adapting to hybrid working post the COVID-19 pandemic, which enabled us to keep services running. Connectivity Delivering a programme of connectivity improvements, resulting in increased bandwidth across all our sites and the borough and giving residents better access to the internet. We have started to accelerate our digital journey by: 5 Hillingdon Council Digital Strategy Our approach to digital, technology and data transformation Prioritising customer needs Our service transformation will focus on meeting the needs of our residents, particularly those who are most vulnerable. We will use research and data to better understand this in our borough and will use this to build and develop products and services to meet those needs. We will make our services accessible to all, working to improve digital inclusion. We will test the services to make sure they are simple and intuitive, and support those who are unable to go online. Agile approach to delivery We will embrace new ways of delivering improvements to our services, with small, iterative work packages backed up by research and data. We will invest in reducing manual- based tasks and paperwork, and enable quick, data-driven decision making. Delivering new business models driven by data The data we collect about resident needs will support every aspect of our digital strategy. We will engage our residents and staff, developing analytics and research which will guide what we do and when. We will invest in meeting common need, ensuring we use our time and money wisely and making sure we can measure success and continuously improve every aspect of our services. One council We will become a digital council by facilitating cross-functional project teams, sharing budgets and goals, and by working in a more collaborative and innovative way. We will empower these teams to build and realise their own goals. We will give employees the space they need to deliver, share knowledge and work across the council rather than in a silo fashion to best support residents. 6 Hillingdon Council Digital Strategy Success in the next three years, will mean:  Resident An improved better resident experience when interacting with the council in accessing services and information. They will be able to carry out simple transactions quickly and easily, with a more joined up approach ensuring they only need to make contact once. Staff A modern, digitally skilled workforce equipped with the systems and technology they need to do their work and put residents first. Data A better understanding of our residents’ needs, through the smarter use of joined-up data. We will be using modern technology to join data sets and get insights which allow us to continuously improve our services and make better decisions. Service A more sustainable financial model, where we are able to improve service delivery while maintaining or reducing costs. 7 Hillingdon Council Digital Strategy Ambitions for the future We will achieve this through five workstreams: Build services online by default 1 Better data, better decisions 2 Modernise our infrastructure and systems 3 Build digital capability and inclusion 4 5 Deliver a digital place 8 Hillingdon Council Digital Strategy Residents expect services to be online and available on any device. People should be able to pay online, and experience seamless services from us. In turn, this will improve resident experience from our customer experience team and business areas, and improve our resident, visitor and business experience of us. The intended outcomes of this workstream are that: ➜ Most of our residents choose and prefer to interact with us online ➜ Residents can access their information about council services via our My Account function ➜ Residents will be able to carry out simple transactions quickly and easily, with a more joined up approach ensuring they only need to make contact once, whether for information or transactional services, without needing help ➜ Users understand our website and associated information, meaning they do not have to contact us if we have put the information online ➜ Our website will be user friendly and accessible with single sign- on and a maximum of two or three clicks to get what you need. Build services online by default Residents expect services to be online and available on any device. People should be able to pay online, and experience seamless services from us. Our aim 1 9 Hillingdon Council Digital Strategy To do this we will: ➜ Build a roadmap of digital services in a data-driven priority order, focusing on high-volume services, and highly manual processes ➜ Transform the work of our customer experience team and across the council by continuing to use different channels and technology, with one telephone number for those that must speak to an agent ➜ Carry out research with residents to understand what they need from us and create a prioritised schedule of work ➜ Put payments online for all payable services, making the council cashless for all but the most vulnerable ➜ Consolidate and redesign our website, making it clearer and more accessible. We will introduce consistent, mobile-first design patterns, iterating based on user needs. Consolidate and redesign our website, making it clearer and more accessible. We will introduce consistent, mobile-first design patterns, iterating based on user needs. Build services online by default1 10 Hillingdon Council Digital Strategy All local authorities have a lot of data, but often lack the insight to make good decisions both internally and for our residents. Better data, and the ability to use it wisely, brings a huge amount of opportunities from better decisions by understanding resident needs across multiple systems. We want to have the right data, to make the right decisions. The intended outcomes of this workstream are that: ➜ We have a clear understanding of the needs to our residents, local businesses, partners and visitors, both qualitatively and quantitatively, so that we can improve outcomes for and with them ➜ We get insights from our data to improve services, and personalise them for their users, as well as being more efficient and effective ➜ We have the right infrastructure to share data and insights across our organisation, and with partner organisations in the local area and nationally ➜ We have better data about our employees to create a happier and more efficient workforce. Better data, better decisions We have better data about our employees to create a happier and more efficient workforce. 2 Our aim 11 Hillingdon Council Digital Strategy To do this we will: ➜ Our business intelligence team is a key part of service transformation and has the remit of bringing insights directly to business areas ➜ They will build better reporting and insight on a service-by-service basis so people can truly understand their customer base ➜ Engineer our systems data to make it easy to combine and analyse, and work with suppliers to get better access to our own data ➜ Improve our data warehouse to deliver insights from the data we can collect, and a single view of the customer ➜ Utilise machine learning and artificial intelligence to improve customer experiences and make us more efficient ➜ Carry out a data cleansing and reduction programme to eliminate duplicate records and make our data extractable and accurate ➜ Work with partners and other stakeholders to better understand our area. Utilise machine learning and artificial intelligence to improve customer experiences and make us more efficient. Better data, better decisions 2 12 Hillingdon Council Digital Strategy We need a modern infrastructure with systems that talk to each other, highly reliable hosting and platforms, the best of commodity technology and modern, cloud-based and application programming interface driven architecture. The intended outcomes of this workstream are that: ➜ We have a cost efficient and reliable technology estate, centrally managed and regularly reviewed to ensure value for money  ➜ Great connectivity for both residents and staff ➜ We have full control of the data in all our back-office systems, and can extract and analyse that data to improve services  ➜ We have a clear architectural vision and roadmap ➜ Our infrastructure and systems are resilient against a cyber attack. Modernise our infrastructure and systems We have full control of the data in all our back-office systems, and can extract and analyse that data to improve services. 3 Our aim 13 Hillingdon Council Digital Strategy To do this we will: ➜ Develop a clear architectural vision and mapping for all council technology systems, working towards a small number of specialist systems supported by shared components that provide common functions that are integrated through application programming interfaces, using cloud and software as a service solutions wherever possible  ➜ Build integration points and automation between current systems, and ensure when new systems are procured, they use open APIs and can integrate with our current systems ➜ Review and refresh all back-office systems helping service areas transition to modern, cloud-based technology ➜ Deliver an ongoing portfolio of improvements to council systems, corporate technology which is prioritised on a clear roadmap, and remove sub-optimal or paper-based council processes  ➜ Ensure systems are secure by default and protected by multi-layered defences. Deliver an ongoing portfolio of improvements to council systems, corporate technology which are prioritised on a clear roadmap. Modernise our infrastructure and systems3 14 Hillingdon Council Digital Strategy We need highly skilled digital, data and technology resource which can be deployed to support our ongoing transformation needs. We also need to upskill our employees to be confident with technology and use this to implement the digital elements of service delivery to better meet the needs of residents and support those who do not have digital access. And in turn, ensure residents are supported to have access to and use digital devices, or supported if they can’t. The intended outcomes of this workstream are that: ➜ Our employees feel confident in their knowledge and skills around the technology they need to do their jobs ➜ We can adapt quickly from project to project, using digital resources to help the council prioritise and meet its needs ➜ Improve our digital capability and engagement with our residents and businesses. Build digital capability and inclusion We need highly skilled digital, data and technology resource which can be deployed to support our ongoing transformation needs. 4 Our aim 15 Hillingdon Council Digital Strategy To do this we will: ➜ Create a permanent rolling programme of digital apprenticeships, working with local higher educational institutions to build pathways for young workers and graduates who are interested in digital, technology and data ➜ Build digital, data, technology teams in the council consisting mainly of permanent staff with a small number of contractors or partners ➜ Partner with business areas across the council to co-create service transformation plans enabled by technology and then deliver on them ➜ Work with other boroughs, government bodies and suppliers to share learning, work together and improve ➜ Focus customer experience on supporting the digitally excluded and vulnerable ➜ Ensure residents have access to digital services to transact with the council and find council-related information. Create a permanent rolling programme of digital apprenticeships, working with local higher educational institutions. Build digital capability and inclusion4 16 Hillingdon Council Digital Strategy There is also an important role for the council in facilitating the use of digital technology to bring about further improvements within the borough, and the way it functions. This is increasingly important as Hillingdon, like many other areas, faces challenges from population growth, automation, congestion and the climate crisis. The intended outcomes of this workstream are that we will: ➜ Improve digital connectivity across the borough ➜ Improve sustainability across the borough ➜ Improve our digital capability and engagement with our residents and businesses. There is also an important role for the council in facilitating the use of digital technology to bring about further improvements within the borough. Deliver a digital place5 Our aim 17 Hillingdon Council Digital Strategy Help Hillingdon become a Smart City by having a planning service that instils digital innovation into current and new developments. To do this we will: Deliver a digital place5 ➜ Continue our programme of boroughwide fibre and mobile connectivity improvements, increasing bandwidth for the council, businesses and residents ➜ Help Hillingdon become a Smart City by having a planning service that instils digital innovation into current and new developments ➜ Create a clear digital offer to businesses that defines the way in which they should engage and interact with the council ➜ Use of cutting edge technology to capture data to gain new insights. For example, information on the performance of assets, such as boilers in council housing, energy use and sustainable energy management systems  ➜ Leverage social value in the digital arena when procuring major contracts i.e. housing developments/commercial builds/any other high value contracts ➜ Develop the digital economy in Hillingdon. 18 Hillingdon Council Digital Strategy Key Performance Indicators Objective: Measure: User Adoption and Engagement: Track the number of users adopting and actively engaging with new digital services. This includes the number of registered users, frequency of logins, duration of sessions and a reduction in spend on more costly channels. Task Completion Rates: Monitor the rate at which residents can complete tasks using the digital services. High task completion rates suggest that the services are user-friendly and efficient. The number of vulnerable residents / those with complex needs supported. Customer Satisfaction: Measure customer satisfaction through surveys, feedback forms, complaints, compliments and other user forums. High satisfaction scores indicate that the digital services are meeting user needs and expectations, whilst lower scores will provide insight into areas where improvements are required. Digital Uptake: Compare the number of transactions completed via digital means to those through other channels, reducing paper usage, helping meet the council’s climate commitments - measured though a reduction in spend on printing and postage. This helps in understanding the shift towards digital services and the reduction in manual processes. Support Requests: Track the number and types of support requests related to the digital services. A decrease in support requests over time indicates that the services are becoming more intuitive and user-friendly. continued on next page > 19 Hillingdon Council Digital Strategy Key Performance Indicators Objective: Measure: Conversion Rates: Measure the effectiveness of digital services in driving specific actions, such as making payments or updating personal information. High conversion rates indicate that the services are achieving their intended goals. Operational Efficiency: Assess the impact of digital services on operational efficiency. This includes metrics such as the time saved through automation, reduction in manual processes, and cost savings. Accessibility and Usability: Evaluate the accessibility and usability of the digital services. This will be done through user testing, accessibility audits, and feedback from users with disabilities. Website Performance: Monitor the performance of the redesigned websites, including metrics such as page load times, bounce rates, and mobile responsiveness. High performance indicates that the websites are providing a good user experience. Research Insights: Use insights from resident research to prioritise and schedule work. This ensures that the digital services are aligned with user needs and expectations. 20 Hillingdon Council Digital Strategy

Text extracted automatically from the PDF, so layout, tables and images are not shown. Open the original PDF on LB Hillingdon’s website.

Relevant Select Committee
Expiry date for any scrutiny call-in / date decision can be implemented (if no call-in)
Officer(s) to action
Directorate
Classification
9. Consultation on Review of Strategic Climate Action Plan PDF 741 KB
RESOLVED: That the Cabinet: 1) Approves the Strategic Climate Action Plan Review to be consulted upon. 2) Approves the Consultation Strategy and for the public consultation to be undertaken in accordance with it. Reasons for decision Following the Council’s climate declaration in 2020 and the first Strategic Climate Action Plan adopted in 2021, Cabinet agreed to a review of the Plan and public consultation on it. The Cabinet Member for Residents’ Services introduced the report, noting the progress that had been made to-date and the proposed actions for the next three years. Highlights mentioned included a 54% reduction in the Council’s carbon footprint and ongoing efforts to further reduce emissions through improvements in Council buildings and fleet purchases, including electric and more efficient vehicles. The report also addressed the impact of the changing climate and weather patterns on flooding within the Borough, with the Cabinet Member noting that completed relief projects had successfully mitigated recent flooding events. Alternative options considered and rejected Cabinet could have decided not to meet its commitment to review the Plan. Relevant Select Committee Residents’ Services Expiry date for any scrutiny call-in / date decision can be implemented (if no call-in) This matter can be called in by the relevant select committee by 5pm, Friday 18 October 2024. If not called-in, Cabinet’s decisions can then be implemented. Officer(s) to action Ian Thynne Directorate Central Services Classification Public - The report and any background papers relating to this decision by the Cabinet are available to view on the Council's website or by visiting the Civic Centre, Uxbridge.
📄 Consultation on Review of Strategic Climate Action Plan PDF 741 KB
Read the text of this document (8 pages)
Cabinet – 10 October 2024 (Part 1 Public) CONSULTATION ON REVIEW OF STRATEGIC CLIMATE ACTION PLAN Cabinet Member & Portfolio Cllr Eddie Lavery Cabinet Member for Residents’ Services Responsible Officer Corporate Director of Central Services Report Author & Directorate Ian Thynne Environmental Specialists, Central Services Papers with report Climate Action Plan review (circulated separately, group offices & online copies) Consultation Strategy HEADLINES Summary The Council declared a climate emergency in 2020 and followed this with the adoption of the comprehensive Strategic Climate Action Plan. ‘The Plan’ contains 6 corporate commitments aligned with 9 Key Themes to cover a wide range of action to address the climate emergency. A review of the plan in 2024 formed part of the commitment. ‘The Review’ sets out the action to be taken over the next 3 years (identified as the short to medium term). It retains the vision, corporate commitments and key themes but sets out an amended series of actions to continue to positively tackle the climate emergency in a more focused and targeted manner. The Review also sets out the progress since the adoption of the Plan noting the challenging environment facing all Local Authorities. It identifies significant progress against the majority of the Key Themes and also where further development is required. It also reports on the Council’s own positive progress towards its Carbon Neutral target. The Review is intended to be consulted upon, amended to reflect responses where necessary, returned to Cabinet, with the intention of adoption for the start of the 2025 financial year. Putting our Residents First Delivering on the Council Strategy 2022-2026 This report supports our ambition for residents / the Council of: Live in a sustainable borough that is carbon neutral This report supports our commitments to residents of: A Green and Sustainable Borough Cabinet – 10 October 2024 (Part 1 Public) Financial Cost The production of the review has been developed using existing internal resources as well as consultancy support to review carbon footprint data. The consultancy support has been funded by Section 106 (carbon) funds. The Review commits to actions that are in line with business-as- usual approaches to tackle climate action, with additional funding from external sources, i.e. Section 106 funds. Action to reduce the carbon footprint will ultimately result in more efficient Council operations with projects prioritised that have the additional benefit of reducing exposure to energy costs or are income generators (i.e. solar panel installations, improved building efficiency, and energy saving measures). Relevant Select Committee Residents’ Services Select Committee Relevant Ward(s) N/A RECOMMENDATIONS That the Cabinet: 1) Approves the Strategic Climate Action Plan Review to be consulted upon. 2) Approves the Consultation Strategy and for the public consultation to be undertaken in accordance with it. Reasons for recommendation The Council declared a climate emergency in 2020 and responded by producing the Strategic Climate Action Plan (‘the Plan’) which was adopted in 2021. The Plan included a commitment to undertake a review in 2024. This commitment was to ensure that continued action remains focused , prioritised and aligned with the Vision and Corporate Commitments set out in the Plan. It also provides the opportunity to reflect on how best to target current resources to maximise effective action. The commitment also required the review to be subject to public consultation to allow residents, communities and other stakeholders to actively engage in the future actions to address the climate emergency. Cabinet – 10 October 2024 (Part 1 Public) Alternative options considered / risk management It is considered that a ‘business as usual’ approach, (i.e. retaining the current Plan and not undertaking a review) would still result in effective climate action but it would not necessarily be a targeted or efficient use of resources available. This approach would also be inconsistent with the commitments made in the original Plan. Select Committee comments None at this stage. The Residents’ Services Select Committee will be engaged in the consultation on the Plan at its meeting in November. Additionally, through the Terms of Reference of the Committee there is strong overview and scrutiny of the Council’s climate change efforts . The select committee has previously scrutinised the Plan annually and is programmed to continue this actively into the future. SUPPORTING INFORMATION 1. On 16th January 2020 at full Council, the London Borough of Hillingdon declared a climate emergency. The impetus for the declaration was a petition from residents and Member recognition of the global and local issues associated with climate change. The declaration impacted council business across all departments as it looks for ways to adapt and mitigate for climate change. 2. The Adoption of the Strategic Climate Action Plan followed in 2021 and set out how the Council would respond to the climate emergency. This included a series of corporate commitments aligned with 9 key themes which would heavily influence Council wide operations. The Plan included a series of specific actions linked to the themes. These were comprehensive and ambitious. 3. The declaration and subsequent plan also heavily influenced the subsequent Council Strategy which states: A green and sustainable borough Hillingdon will be a sustainable, carbon -neutral borough , protecting Hillingdon’s heritage, built environment and valued green spaces. Residents will live in pleasant neighbourhoods with access to sustainable waste management and transport. 4. The Plan included a commitment to undertake a review of the actions in 2024. Need for Continued Action 5. As part of the Review, it has been necessary to restate the need for continued action. Although the Plan set out a great deal of progress across a range of Council operations, it also stated why further action and progress was needed. 6. Since the Plan was adopted, more information and understanding about the impacts of climate change ha ve emerged. The climate continues to warm at significant rates with 2022 and 2023 the warmest years on record. In 2023, the UK recorded the wettest September to December period since 2000 with a sequence of named storms. Cabinet – 10 October 2024 (Part 1 Public) 7. More information is also now available on the impacts of climate change and how this effects all communities but particularly the most vulnerable. Risks to water supply, localised flooding, loss of biodiversity, heat stress and uncertain food security are among some of the impacts associated with a changing climate. The environmental and social impacts are considered to result in significant economic disruption. 8. The Review therefore presents the need for continued and sustained action. Progress 9. The Review also presents the opportunity to set out how much progress has been made in the last 3 years against the commitments made. 10. It records positive progress against the majority of the 9 key themes with further development required against two (i.e. where progress is less than positive). The Review recognises that progress has been complicated by the challenging circumstances facing all Local Authorities but still reports very positive performance Key Theme Progress Recorded Community Leadership Moderate The Council’s Own Operations Very Positive Building Better Places Very Positive Using and Producing Clean and Green Energy Positive Waste Management Very Positive Climate Change Adaptation and Mitigation Positive Carbon Offsetting Positive Sustainable Transportation Positive Transparency, Communication and Reporting Development Required 11. Progress has been particularly positive in relation to our commitment to become Carbon Neutral. It sets out a 54% reduction in our own emissions from the 2020 baseline reported in the original Plan. This is a significant achievement and reflects considerable work to improve the fleet and reduce emissions across Council assets. 12. Importantly, the most recent Public Sector Decarbonisation Scheme (PSDS) work at the Civic Centre is forecast to make a significant contribution to carbon reductio n. The Civic Centre is the asset with by far the largest carbon footprint and the PSDS project will reduce this by nearly 50% once complete and operational. 13. The Review also considers wider actions committed to in the original Plan and records significant progress and where further actions should be targeted. Cabinet – 10 October 2024 (Part 1 Public) 14. Considerable progress is particularly noted in relation to the management of waste, flood risk, green spaces and new development. Areas requiring more development include engagement with schools , biodiversity planning and in relation to the transparency, communication and reporting of progress. Action Plan 15. The Review has identified that the direction of travel set out in 2021 remains broadly the correct one with many of the objectives still relevant, appropriate and sufficient ly challenging. Inevitably there are some amendments in order to prioritise resources where maximum benefit can be achieved. 16. The Review therefore concludes with setting out the Actions to be taken over the next 3 years to achieve the Vision and Corporate Commitments. The table above shows where further targeted action would be required with particular attention on work with school and young people (Community Leadership Theme) which was a key part of the original plan. 17. It is recommended that there is a reduced range of actions with those remaining to be more targeted and focused to make an efficient use of the resource available. The Review is not therefore intended to report on what is not going to be taken forward, but to focus on the priority actions over the next three years. Review 18. The Plan will continue to be kept under review with an annual progress report submitted every autumn in addition to scrutiny by the Residents’ Services Select Committee. This allows the actions to be revised and added to as and when appropriate. Financial Implications The targeted actions over the next three years are intended to reflect current workstreams and objectives in line with the Council Strategy ; all in line with current budgets. Council Resources along with external funding, for example through the Public Sector Decarbonisation Scheme and Section 106, will be accessed to deliver projects that are deemed to result in meaningful outputs. Below is a breakdown of the Investment in Carbon Initiatives to date and f unding yet to be allocated. Investment in Carbon Initiatives to date Programme Project Total Project Budget £000 S106 Funding £000 PSDS Funding £000 Council Resources Funding £000 Carbon Initiative Programme Carbon Initiatives Programme - Park Lodge Solar Farm 565 0 0 565 Cabinet – 10 October 2024 (Part 1 Public) Carbon Initiative Programme Carbon Initiatives Programme - Public Sector Decarbonisation Scheme Civic Centre Winston Churchill Hall Highgrove Leisure Centre Hillingdon Sports and Leisure Centre 19,542 2,263 13,750 3,529 Carbon Initiative Programme Carbon Initiatives Programme - London Environment Directors Network 80 80 Corporate Property of Works Grainges, Cedars and Blyth Road Car Parks - installation of Cummulite Emergency Lighting Systems 762 281 481 Civic Centre Transformation Mezzanine. Basement and Members Car Parks - installation of Cummulite Emergency Lighting Systems 566 566 Civic Centre Transformation Installation of Commulite emergency lighting system at the Civic Centre Service tunnels below the building 86 86 Carbon Offset Officer Carbon Offset Officer 59 59 Total 21,660 2,603 13,750 5,307 Budget Allocated for Carbon Initiatives yet to be identified and developed Programme Project Total Project Budget £000 S106 Funding £000 PSDS Funding £000 Council Resources Funding £000 Section 106 carbon reduction Programmes to be developed 4,400 4,400 Carbon Initiative Programme Carbon Initiatives unallocated Programmes to be developed 4,813 4,813 Total 9,213 4,400 0 4,813 To date £21,660k has been invested in Carbon Ini tiative schemes. Currently the Council holds £4,400k unallocated Section 106 carbon reduction funds along with £4,813k of Council Resources that can be drawn-down against and used towards schemes that will enable to deliver the strategic climate action plan. The commencement of an extensive school engagement and carbon reduction project is included in the recommended actions for 2025/26 subject to funding from Section 106 resources. Cabinet – 10 October 2024 (Part 1 Public) Over the last three financial years, the very positive progress made (referenced in points 10. and 14. under the Supporting Information section a bove) relating to the Waste Management theme has delivered c.£1m of savings relating to the cost of waste disposal. This has been achieved via initiatives focused on reduction and diversion of residual material and more effective recycling (notably segregated food waste). Efficiencies are yet to materialise in relation to the Civic Centre carbon initiative works, as they are currently ongoing and expected to complete this financial year. RESIDENT BENEFIT & CONSULTATION The benefit or impact upon Hillingdon residents, service users and communities? The climate action strategy is the basis for borough -wide improvements in several areas. Residents and communities will benefit from a clear picture of how the Council is responding to the climate emergency. All actions are intende d to respond to the climate emergency which is recognised to have major impacts on residents. In addition, targeted carbon reduction action will result in long term savings through a reduction in energy demand or through income generation from renewable energy supplies. Consultation carried out or required The Review is intended to be subject to a full public consultation in accordance with the recommendations set out in this report. The consultation responses will inform the final iteration of the Review and the actions to be taken over the next three years. CORPORATE CONSIDERATIONS Corporate Finance Corporate Finance have reviewed this report and concur with the Financial Implications set out above, noting the focus on the priority actions of the Climate Action Plan over the next three - years. Furthermore, it is noted that £21,660k has been invested to date through S106 funding, Public Sector Decarbonisation Funding, along with Council Resources. A fu rther £9,213k of S106 Funding and Council Resources are yet to be accessed to deliver the projec ts that are deemed to result in meaningful outputs. Legal The Climate Change Act 2008 (“the Act”) placed statutory requirements on the UK government to assess and report on climate change risks. Section 1 of the Act sets a legally binding UK carbon target to reduce net greenhouse gas emissions by 100% by 2050 (“net zero”). Currently there are no statutory targets for local authorities, however, following the Council’s climate emergency declaration in 2021, and in demonstrating its commitment to help achieve the government’s net zero target by 2050, it adopted its Strategic Climate Action Plan (“SCAP”). In line with the Cabinet – 10 October 2024 (Part 1 Public) Council’s commitment, and subject to a public consultation, a review of the actions set out in the SCAP must now be undertaken in 2024. When consulting with the public, the Council must ensure the process is fair and it is conducted in accordance with the established Gunning Principles which can be summarised as follows:  consultation should occur when proposals are at a formative stage;  consultations should give sufficient reasons for any proposal to permit intelligent consideration;  consultations should allow adequate time for consideration and response; and  the product of consultation should conscientiously be taken into account by the decision maker. BACKGROUND PAPERS Climate declaration – January 2020 Previous Strategies / reviews

Text extracted automatically from the PDF, so layout, tables and images are not shown. Open the original PDF on LB Hillingdon’s website.

📄 Draft Climate Action Plan , item 9. PDF 2 MB
Read the text of this document (44 pages)
London Borough of Hillingdon Climate Action Action Plan 2025 to 2028 DRAFT FOR CONSULTATION 1 Foreword It has been three years since we published our Strategic Plan to take climate action and, in that time, Local Authorities have faced unprecedented challenges. Despite that, I am pleased to present this updated plan on the back of a great deal of progress where we have prioritised resources to maximise the impact of our actions. Further action remains essential. The impacts of climate change continue to become more apparent. Our aims and objectives have therefore not changed. We will be carbon neutral by 2030 and will continue to embed climate action across our services. This updated plan reflects on our achievements to date and the need to allocate our resources and prioritise action with care. We will continue to adapt to the changing demands and ensure our short to medium term actions are kept under review to ensure they are achievable. This means more targeted action planning with the focus on making a noticeable difference. Councillor Eddie Lavery Cabinet Member for Residents’ Services Common hornbeam. Bayhurst Wood, Harefield 200-300 years of age 2 Preface In July 2024, the Council adopted its Strategic Climate Action Plan. This set out our response to the climate emergency that the Council declared on 16 January 2020. The plan set out a range of activities that were guided by six corporate climate commitments aligned to nine themed action areas. It was ambitious and comprehensive and reflects the nature of the climate emergency. We committed to keeping the plan under review to ensure focussed and prioritised action. The Vision and corporate commitments are intended to remain the same but the actions to meet them are being refreshed where necessary. Our Plan outlines the actions we intend to take with the resources available to us, emphasizing the need for flexibility in these rapidly changing circumstances. This is the first review period 3 years after the plan was adopted and results in the short (1 year) to medium (2-3 year) term actions to take us through to the second review period in 2028. Like all local authorities nationwide, we are grappling with unprecedented financial challenges. Despite this, we have made some exceptional progress against many of our objectives and commitments. Therefore, it is not considered necessary to markedly alter the approaches adopted in the 2021 Plan but the challenges invariably require us to take a more rationalised approach to climate action. This Review focusses on how and where best to prioritise our attention for the short to medium term that maximise effective climate action. To support this, we are committed to leveraging all available grant funding to mitigate and adapt to climate change, recognizing the long-term financial benefits this can bring to the council. This revised action plan will be subject a lengthy public consultation at the end of 2024 with an aim of adopting the new plan for April 2025. 3 1. The Need for Continued Action What is Climate Change? The world’s climate is changing due to increased levels of gases such as carbon dioxide in the atmosphere. These ‘greenhouse’ gases occur naturally in the atmosphere, trapping heat that comes from the sun like the glass in a greenhouse. The ‘greenhouse effect’ is a natural occurrence and without it the Earth would be over 30 degrees cooler and uninhabitable. However, due to human activities such as the burning of fossil fuels (oil, gas and coal) and deforestation, concentrations of greenhouse gases in the atmosphere are rising and making the natural greenhouse effect more pronounced, trapping more of the sun’s heat and resulting in a rise in the earth’s temperature. Recent Trends The changing climate has significant repercussions that are experienced by all our communities. In July 2024 the Royal Meteorological Society published its 2023 State of the UK Climate report. The following are the ‘highlights’: 4 UK winters for the most recent decade (2014–2023) have been 9% wetter than 1991–2020 and 24% wetter than 1961– 1990, with smaller increases in summer and autumn and none in spring. In 2023, 30°C was recorded in September in the UK on seven consecutive days, for the first time on record. Winds from storm Ciarán on 2 November 2023 had the potential to be as severe as from the ‘Great Storm’ of 16 October 1987, but the strongest winds missed the UK to the south. Five of the ten wettest years for the UK in the series from 1836 have occurred in the 21st Century. In 2023, the UK recorded its wettest September to December period since 2000 due to persistently wet and unsettled weather, including the sequence of named storms from Agnes to Gerrit. 2023 was the second warmest year on record for the UK in the series from 1884, with only 2022 warmer. Six years in the most recent decade (2014- 2023) have been within the top-ten warmest in the series. Observations show that extremes of temperature in the UK have been affected much more than average temperature. The number of ‘hot’ days (28C) has more than doubled and ‘very hot’ days (30C) more than trebled for the most recent decade (2014-2023) compared to 1961- 1990. In 2023, the UK recorded its warmest June on record by a wide margin in a series from 1884, with a major North Atlantic marine heatwave a significant contributing factor. 5 6 Why does climate change matter? Uncontrolled climate change will lead to higher global temperatures, rising sea levels and more extreme, unpredictable weather conditions across the world. Climate change is a major threat to human health and wellbeing in the UK. Its far-reaching impacts can be seen in various ways, from direct effects like rising temperatures and increased flooding, to indirect consequences such as food and water scarcity, and reduced air quality. Vulnerable populations, including those with pre-existing conditions, the elderly, and underprivileged communities, are likely to be worst affected. Here are some of the key impacts identified by the UK Health Security Agency: Extremes of heat and cold More frequent and intense heatwaves due to rising temperatures could lead to a dramatic increase in heat-related deaths. By the 2070s, under a high- warming scenario without adaptation, the UK could see over 21,000 additional heat-related deaths annually. Despite the warming climate, deaths from cold are also expected to rise, mainly due to an aging population. Flooding Climate change is making more areas prone to flooding, including those previously not at risk. Heavier rainfall and rising sea levels contribute to this threat. Flooding endangers lives and can have long-lasting negative impacts on mental health, risk of infectious diseases, and access to healthcare services. Poor outdoor air quality Climate change can worsen air pollution episodes by altering weather patterns and exacerbating heatwaves. Poor air quality is already a significant environmental risk, contributing to cardiovascular and respiratory diseases, and increased mortality. Allergies Longer and more intense pollen seasons for plants like birch and oak, as well as extended fungal spore 7 seasons, could worsen seasonal allergies for sensitive individuals. Drought and food security More frequent and severe droughts driven by low rainfall and higher temperatures could disrupt agriculture, leading to food shortages, price increases, and food insecurity. Poor housing Energy-efficient homes are vital for mitigating climate change and promoting healthy indoor environments. However, improvements must be implemented carefully to avoid issues like poor air quality, overheating, noise, and inadequate ventilation, which can adversely affect respiratory and cardiovascular health, as well as mental wellbeing. Flooding within the borough in 2016 8 Source: https://www.metoffice.gov.uk 9 2. Our Vision In response to the impacts of climate change we declared a climate emergency in 2020: Looking to the future, this Council declares that there is a current global climate emergency and, as a consequence, agrees to extend the Council’s climate change targets beyond those currently set, as follows: i. To become carbon neutral across the Council services by 2030 and; ii. To achieve 100% clean energy across the Council’s services by 2030. We then produced our first Strategic plan to address climate action. This plan set out 6 corporate commitments aligned with 9 Key themes to respond positively to the Climate Emergency. These underpinned our ambitious vision: To become the greenest London borough, to protect and enhance the environment, and to provide a brighter prospect for future generations. The 6 Corporate Commitments To lead and inspire our residents, businesses and schools to reduce their own carbon emissions. To become ‘Carbon-Neutral’ by 2030. To achieve 100% clean electricity across the Council’s services by 2030. To raise awareness and develop the potential of young people to respond to the challenge of the climate emergency. To enhance opportunities for biodiversity across the borough and particularly in urban areas. To remain open to the opportunity to go further, to be innovative and creative to exceed the stated goals wherever possible. 10 In addition, at a meeting of the Council in November 2021, the following motions on climate change were approved: i. Ensure that, where practical and cost effective, all the council's procured services are net carbon zero by 2035. ii. Support and work with businesses and organisations towards making the entire borough net zero carbon by 2050; This Council also commits to increasing its accountability and transparency on climate change action by: iii. Proactively including young people in the process, ensuring that they have a voice in shaping the future; iv. holding an annual ‘people’s assembly’ with residents and relevant organisations to discuss and shape revisions to the climate change action plan. The 9 Themes Objective Theme C1 Community Leadership C2 The Council’s Own Operations C3 Building better places C4 Using and Producing Clean and Green Energy C5 Waste Management C6 Climate Change Adaptation and Mitigation C7 Carbon Offsetting C8 Sustainable Transportation C9 Transparency 11 Our Carbon Neutral Target At the heart of the Plan is the Council’s ambition to be carbon neutral by 2030. The target relates to our Scope 1 and 2 emissions associated with all our operations. It applies to the assets that are: under our direct operational control and financial management. (C2.1, Strategic Action Plan) There are 5 key components that contribute to the Council’s carbon neutrality target associated with the Scope 1 and 2 emissions and considered later in this report: i. Emissions from corporate assets where the Council has operational control and monetary management of energy purchasing ii. Emissions from operational transportation (including grounds maintenance) iii. Carbon reduction from sequestration i.e. coverage of tree canopies on Council land iv. Carbon reduction from renewable energy production i.e. solar panels v. Carbon reduction from the purchasing of green energy The Council separately made a commitment for Scope 3 emissions to be carbon neutral by 2035. Source: https://www.nationalgrid.com/stories/energy-explained/what-are-scope-1-2-3- carbon-emissions 12 3. Our Progress We undertake an annual review of our performance set against the detailed objectives that stem from the 9 key themes. This is presented to Cabinet for scrutiny and review, with further actions or priorities set and agreed as necessary. Progress is also scrutinised by Residents’ Services Select Committee on an annual basis. Our climate change activity is also considered by the Corporate Management Team and embedded within the work of officers. This structure allows us to respond positively to the changing environment which has become progressively challenging since the declaration of the climate emergency. The challenging financial climate means we have not been able to deliver on all our aspirations and we have focussed on delivering tangible outcomes that we have direct control over. However, the coming pages, starting with a high level analysis of the key themes, reveal extremely positive progress from the starting position of 2020. There is a lot more to be achieved and this is reflected in priorities for the forthcoming plan period (2025-28) Our own operational carbon footprint 2020 9526 tCO2 2024 4363 tCO2 54% reduction 13 Theme Progress Commentary Community Leadership Moderate The focus has been on getting the Council’s ‘own house in order’ which means further development of the work on community leadership is required. Work has been undertaken with the Friends of the Earth and wider Council objectives reflected in the Plan have a significant resident facing element, e.g. sustainable transportation, flood risk work, waste management activity. We will further develop educational resources to assist our communities with recording and reducing their own carbon footprints. The Council’s Own Operations Very Positive The progress against this objective is very positive. The main area of development is to capture all this positive work in the context of the Plan which will allow for trajectory analysis of the carbon neutral target. In turn, this will allow for the appropriate focus of attention and will assist with informing a pipeline of projects to achieve carbon neutrality. Building Better Places Very Positive Progress against this objective is very positive. The Council implements the policies of the London Plan which are highly progressive in securing zero carbon development. This is also the route to securing Section 106 funds to facilitate actions elsewhere in this plan. Work is necessary to determine whether the current cost of offsetting 1tCO2 (i.e. £95) from new development is sufficient. Using and Producing Clean and Green Energy Positive The cost of electricity from certified renewable energy sources has become cost prohibitive. Procuring clean energy where feasible will be prioritised for the Plan period. Work on renewable energy generation at our sites is ongoing and should these begin to be delivered it is expected that a ‘very positive’ report will be set out in the next review period. Waste Management Very Positive Progress against the waste management objectives is very positive. The Plan effectively mirrors the Waste Management strategy and there is alignment between the objectives. Development is required to capture the waste management progress in the context of climate change. 14 Climate Change Adaptation and Mitigation Positive Progress against this objective is positive largely due to the work on air quality and the Local Flood Risk Management Strategy alongside other flood risk related activity. There is more to be done on water efficiency and public facing campaigns, and these will be programmed as part of this Review. A climate change adaptation and mitigation action plan will be developed as part of 2025-28 Plan period. Carbon Offsetting Positive Progress against this objective is positive largely due to the tree planting and ongoing green space management. More work is required to align this work with the objectives of the plan with particularly focus on the biodiversity work which needs to be progressed further. Sustainable Transportation Positive Progress against this objective is positive due to the work with TFL, schools’ campaigns and development of the cycle strategy. Further work on a sustainable transportation strategy needs to be programmed to ensure all the sub objectives of this theme are given attention. Importantly the work against this theme needs to be captured in the context of this Plan so as to ensure there is alignment against the climate change objectives. Transparency, Communication and Reporting Development Required This is an area where progress needs further development. Annual progress reports are available and public scrutiny undertaken through the work of the Residents’ Services Select Committee. Work will be undertaken for the new Plan period to ensure more resources and reporting is available on our website. Very Positive Most actions within the theme have been progressed well Positive Some actions within the theme have been progressed well with others programmed Moderate Progress has been made against a small number of the actions Further development required Further development against most actions in the theme is required or information is not captured. 15 4. Our Own Operational Carbon Footprint Measuring our own carbon footprint was a major part of the original Plan. We intended to lead by example and to be able to demonstrate effective carbon reduction progress. Measuring the starting point on which to assess progress is vital. The baseline carbon footprint reported in the 2021 plan has been subject to further refinement and analysis; this was reported in the 2022 Annual Review. The 2021 baseline in the original Plan factored in emissions from our own housing stock which did not reflect the carbon neutral target. Leaving this data in the baseline but not recording it subsequently would misrepresent any subsequent savings. Consequently the 2022 Annual Review provided an updated baseline which is the position on which our carbon neutral target is based. The baseline position is recorded here for ease of reference. Electricity 3890 Gas 2538 Fleet 3099 Total 9526 2019/20 Baseline Operational Carbon Footprint (tCO2e) 16 As set out in the graph below, we have made considerable carbon reduction progress since 2021. Progress is linked to direct interventions such as the installation of low and zero carbon technology, improved building performance and usage, as well as through the disposal of assets. Progress related to emissions from electricity usage is more pronounced than with gas consumption. This is largely down to the availability of a wider range of improved technologies and because electricity consumption is a 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 2019/20 2021/22 2022/23 2023/34 Emissions from Electricity usage (tCO2e) 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 2019/20 2021/22 2022/23 2023/34 Emissions from Gas usage (tCO2e) 17 ‘Scope 2’ emission and therefore benefits from improvements within the national grid. Emissions are calculated from point at which the energy source is generated. For example, the energy produced through the burning of gas within a boiler occurs directly within the appliance; conversely electricity is generated from various locations and sources across the UK before being distributed through the National Grid. Converting the gas burned into a carbon footprint is straightforward and consistent. Carbon from electricity produced in the national grid is more complex to calculate and is dependent on the ratio of renewable energy produced to that from fossil fuels. As renewable energy becomes more common place in the grid, the amount of carbon associated with generating a unit of electricity is reduced. If the National Grid conveyed 100% of electricity from renewable sources, our carbon footprint from our electricity supplies would be 0tCO2. This is an important factor in managing our assets moving forward and is one of the reasons why air source heat pumps which use electricity are now preferred to gas boilers for all heating requirements. typical house 2009 New Build 2019 New Build Gas Boiler v Heat Pump Gas Boilers KWhr/yr Heat Pump KWhr/yr 18 We have over 200 vehicles in our fleet. These relate to our need to undertake a significant range of duties, including refuse collection, street cleaning, housing repairs, passenger services, green space management and mobile library services. This results in over 2,000,000 miles being driven a year. We have focussed a lot of attention on improving the efficiencies within our fleet vehicles. This is made up of reducing the mileage of vehicles through improved routing along with switching to more efficient vehicles with lower emissions. A large scale fleet replacement plan is underway which will see the older diesel units removed and replaced with cleaner technology as well as electric powered vehicles. We have not pursued low emission vehicles at all costs though as larger electric vehicles are relatively new, scarce and consequently exceptionally expensive. This demonstrates a prudent balance of improving the fleet within a responsible funding envelope. 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 2019/20 2023/34 Fleet Emissions (tCO2) 19 As the highway authority, we have a legal responsibility to maintain approximately 25,000 street and subway lights, as well as 3,000 illuminated signs, bollards and zebra crossings. We have replaced all our old high pressured sodium lamps in the streetlighting with LED lanterns also also replaced 1000 bollards illuminated bollards with non- illuminated types. LED lighting not only reduces carbon emissions but also have lower running costs (i.e. use less electricity) and have improved maintenance performance. We will continue to review the streetlighting options recognising that this still constitutes a large portion of our carbon footprint. 0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 2 0 1 9 / 2 0 2 0 2 3 / 2 4 Street Lighting Emissions (tCO2) 20 Public Sector Decarbonisation Scheme A major workstream currently under way relates to the Public Sector Decarbonisation Scheme (PSDS). The PSDS provides grants for public sector bodies to fund heat decarbonisation and energy efficiency measures. The Council secured £13,751,385 through Phase 3 of the PSDS. The funds, with match funding from Section 106 secured from developers, will deliver large scale carbon reduction interventions at: • Civic Centre, Uxbridge • Hillingdon Leisure Centre • Highgrove Leisure Centre • Winston Churchill Theatre and Hall The Civic Centre work involves removing the gas based heating system and replacing with more efficient air source heat pumps, secondary glazing, and additional insulation. The Civic Centre has always been one of the prominent factors in our carbon footprint. The baseline data from 2020 shows the Civic Centre to have a considerably higher carbon footprint; more than the nine next highest building combined. The PSDS project is highly innovative and provides the much needed interventions within the Civic Centre; an asset that was recognised in the original Strategy as being a difficult proposition due to its age and listed status. Rank Building tCO2 1 Civic Centre 1,867 2 Breakspear Crematorium 540 3 Uxbridge Library 162 4 Harlington Road Depot 129 5 Battle Of Britain Museum & Visitor Centre 95 6 The Pembroke Centre 80 7 Colham Road 3 Residential Home 74 8 Hatton Grove Residential Home 69 9 Queens Walk Resource & Wren Centre 63 10 Winston Churchill Hall 59 21 The graph opposite shows the forecasted improvements to the Civic Centre with the PSDS project intervention. The electricity supplies increase with the PSDS project (green bar in the middle) but there is no third bar on the left hand side (gas). This is because all gas boilers are to be removed. The PSDS project will therefore result in a major impact. Importantly, the interventions will continue to bear fruit. The move from inefficient gas boilers (scope 1 emission) to state of the art electricity based air source heat pumps (scope 2 emission) means that that the carbon footprint of the building will continue to fall in line with decarbonisation of the National Grid. By 2030, the Civic Centre would have a lower carbon footprint than in 2024 even without any further interventions. 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 Gas Electricity Total Civic Centre Performance with and without the PSDS project Emissions (tCO2) from energy consumed 21/22 22/23 PSDS Electricity usage rises to serve the heating needsZero gas usage with PSDS A major carbon saving is achieved 22 Overall Reduction (tCO2e) 23 5. Wider Climate Action Progress Tree Planting Hillingdon is one of the greenest boroughs in London and home to a significant number of trees. Ruislip Woods National Nature Reserve is London’s single largest woodland in London covering c300 hectares. We also have extensive tree coverage throughout our numerous parks and open spaces as well as along many of our streets. All trees absorb carbon dioxide (known as carbon sequestration) and are therefore important in tackling climate change. Trees are also important in creating a diverse environment for wildlife and promoting biodiversity. In addition, urban tree planting can have significant benefits in cooling, managing surface water, and removing pollutants helping to improve the environment. To support our aspirations to become the greenest London borough we have undertaken extensive further planting. Year Trees Removed 1 Total Trees Planted 2020/21 213 14,288 2021/22 193 11,655 2022/23 90 17,295 2023/24 55 8,3782 Total 551 51,616 1 – Trees removed are general because of being categorised as ‘dead, dying or dangerous’ 2 – Planting season is between November and March. Tree planting numbers are not yet available for winter 2024. 24 Trees and Carbon Sequestration Determining the carbon benefits of the trees planted is a complex task. It is not straightforward to simply equate one tree with an amount of CO2 absorbed and then multiply by the number of trees planted. Trees capture very little CO2 in their formative years. To the contrary; delivery of the saplings, soil disturbance through planting and use of machinery create a carbon footprint of its own. Large scale tree planting can start life with a negative carbon footprint. However, over time the extent of carbon asborption increases significantly peaking at around 25 years of growth. It is estimated that 1 hectare of woodland will capture approximately 60tCO2 for the five year period between years 20 and 25. Carbon captured every 5 years from 1 hectare of woodland (not cumulative) Applying the broad formula to the planting of our c50,000 trees, overtime the cumulative capture of carbon will be significant, c14,000tCO2. These figures are estimates based on the Woodland Code and further detailed analysis is being undertaken to determine the extent of carbon capture of newly planted trees, as well as the annual capture from all our existing woodland. 0 2000 4000 6000 8000 10000 12000 14000 16000 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 tCO2 Years since planting Cumulative Carbon Sequestration 25 Green Space Management Open and green spaces play an invaluable role in tackling climate change and creating climate resilient places. They also have significant benefits for the natural environment, human health and well-being. Natural areas provide opportunities for physical activity, social interactions, and stress relief. Urban green spaces can lead to improved mental and physical health. They also have direct impacts by storing carbon, aiding cooling and assisting with the management of surface water. We recognise the importance of our parks as reflected in the 2024 announcement that we retained 67 Green Flag awards. An award that recognises parks and green spaces of the highest calibre. This is fantastic news for residents who continue to see investment, maintenance and improvements to the green spaces which make our borough so pleasant. We're committed to creating a green future for residents and nature and this is reflected in the continued prioritisation of our parks as key assets for all. The Green Flag Awards show these parks meet the highest international standards so we don't take for granted having achieved the top spot nationally for 12 years in a row. Cllr Eddie Lavery, Hillingdon Council's Cabinet Member for Residents' Services 26 Climate Change Resilience and Adaptation The climate has already changed. As set out above, the climate data for the UK shows significant variations to those historically recorded. The UK has wetter periods, more intense weather events such as storms as well as warmer and drier periods. All this places a great deal of strain on environmental and social conditions, which ultimately have negative economic impacts. Climate change adaptation and resilience is therefore about how to respond to the irreversible impacts that have already happened. In the context of climate change, the Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change (IPCC) defines adaptation as the process taken to “adjust to the actual or expected climate and its effects”. Resilience to climate change is defined as the capacity to prepare for, respond to, and recover from the impacts of climatic events while incurring minimal damage to societal wellbeing, the economy and the environment. The running of our green spaces, the planting of trees and the management of flood risk all help to make us more resilient and adaptable to the changing climate. Tree planting helps to increase areas of cooling, outdoor space provides environmental protection and reduces overheating whilst managing flood risk responds to the more impactful weather events. Flood Risk Management In the context of flood risk management, we have a statutory role as the Lead Local Flood Authority (LLFA) to manage and coordinate flood risk action. We recently adopted our Local Flood Risk Management Strategy which sets out how we intend to manage flood risk and undertake a leadership role. Included within our role as a LLFA is the need to identify and deliver new projects to help reduce flood risk. We lever in funding from external sources to identify and prioritise areas for flood risk management. The details on the following page outline some of the projects we have delivered or currently in the process of developing. 27 1-4 6 9 8 14 5 12 13 10 7 11 No. Name of Flood Risk Project Stage 1 Park Wood SSSi NFM* Phase 1 and 2 Phase 1 completed Phase 2 under development 2 Pinn Meadows NFM Under development 3 Kings College Road Rain Gardens Due to commence 4 Property Level Protection (50+ properties) (Environment Agency Project) Nearing completion 5 Eastcote Rain Gardens Completed 6 Bessingby Park Flood Attenuation Completed 7 A40 Infrastructure Flood Alleviation Feasibility Stage 8 Elephant Park Flood Attenuation Completed 9 Court Park Flood Attenuation Completed 10 Kingshill Flood Alleviation Feasibility Stage 11 Colham Green Flood Alleviation Feasibility Stage 12 River Colne Fish Passage Feasibility Stage 13 Frogs Ditch Catchment Under development 14 Croyde Avenue Estate Completed *NFM: Natural Flood Management 28 Waste Management We are one of 6 authorities that come under the waste management umbrella of the West London Waste Authority (WLWA). The WLWA is a statutory waste disposal authority and is responsible for disposing of our waste. We work with residents and business to help reduce waste in accordance with the waste hierarchy. Some of the positive work we have undertaken to reflect the higher levels of the hierarchy are set out on the next page. Once collected, though, the waste is then disposed of by the WLWA. The graph shows the significant reduction in waste sent to landfill. This is because the WLWA work in in partnership with operators of two energy recovery facilities. This means waste that historically was buried in a hole in the ground is now recovered for energy production: Around 96% of west London’s rubbish is sent to generate energy at two Energy Recovery Facilities (ERFs). Most is sent to the Severnside Energy Recovery Centre (SERC) located beside the river Severn just north of Bristol. The facility is part of the Authority’s Residual Waste Services Public Private Partnership Contract with SUEZ UK Limited. The facility is able to treat 400,000 tonnes of rubbish and has its own bottom ash treatment plant to turn the ash into an aggregate with a recognised end product status for use in construction projects. The other facility is located close to Heathrow Airport and is run by a company called Lakeside Energy from Waste Ltd. Our arrangement is with one of the co-owners of the Lakeside facility, Viridor Waste Management. Energy from Waste facilities offer a modern treatment process that means your waste is used to generate energy in the form of both heat and power (electricity). This waste is used instead of coal, oil or gas to produce energy. (https://westlondonwaste.gov.uk/where-your-waste-goes) 29 Leading by example on waste collection We have improved our own recycling services at the Civic Centre and at Harlington Road Depot with waste electrical equipment (WEE) collections available to all staff. Working with Businesses We have liaised with almost 3000 businesses about the importance of food waste collections with most also now have waste segregation facilities Changes to waste service management system allows better monitoring and education of improved waste segregation Improved waste segregation services at New Years Green Lane civic amenity site Supporting West London Waste Authority We Promote and encourage attendance at repair workshops in partnership with Traid, Restart party, Friends of the Earth, Freegle and Hillingdon’s Doctor Bike, ReLondon and WLWA. We hold two annual repair events to allow residents to learn how to extend the life of equipment. Working with Schools We have undertaken school visits in 2023 to educate on waste reduction behaviours and importance of recycling We have engaged with 28 schools on food waste recycling, including signing up to our services to support with collection issues Supporting Residents We have engaged 50,000 residents and secured 12,000 new signatories to our food waste collection services. We have organised 13,000 roadshows and engaged with 3,500 residents to educate on food waste, recycling and WEE collections. We have collected almost 10 tonnes of small electrical waste diverting it away from general waste streams 30 Planning and New Development The London Plan sets out the planning policy for all new major development to be zero carbon. This has resulted in a greatly improved new building stock within the borough. On average new residential development is estimated to have approximately 60% lower carbon emissions onsite than an equivalent building regulations compliant scheme. Developments that don’t achieve the zero carbon standard on site are required to make a contribution to our carbon offset fund depending on the shortfall. This results in both a much improved building stock but also provides a funding source to allow us to make carbon savings in our own buildings for example in the Civic Centre. London Plan Policy SI 2 Minimising greenhouse gas emissions A Major development should be net zero-carbon. This means reducing greenhouse gas emissions in operation and minimising both annual and peak energy demand in accordance with the following energy hierarchy: 1) be lean: use less energy and manage demand during operation 2) be clean: exploit local energy resources (such as secondary heat) and supply energy efficiently and cleanly 3) be green: maximise opportunities for renewable energy by producing, storing and using renewable energy on-site 4) be seen: monitor, verify and report on energy performance. B Major development proposals should include a detailed energy strategy to demonstrate how the zero-carbon target will be met within the framework of the energy hierarchy. Biodiversity Net Gain We are also now implementing the recent planning changes to secure biodiversity net gain which will help in responding to the decline of our natural environment. We will continue to develop how to exploit the biodiversity net gain opportunities within the borough to maximised benefits for our own natural environment Heathrow Expansion The 2021 reaffirmed our opposition to runway expansion at Heathrow Airport. Whilst no proposals have been presented subsequently, we will continue to oppose runway expansion due to the extensive negative environmental and social impacts. 31 Sustainable Transportation As an outer Borough, we have a relatively high car ownership to the rest of the London. We have links to the neighbouring counties as well as central London and with less public transportation than other boroughs, the car remains a vital part of life. This means actions to enforce a dramatic modal shift away from the car is likely to have significant negative social and economic impacts. It is therefore necessary to balance carefully the need to improve alternative options for our residents and businesses whilst recognising that private vehicle travel remains an important choice. The Elizabeth Line has resulted in an improved connection into London and to Heathrow Airport greatly reducing vehicular traffic on the road but there is a need to improve the facilities and options across the borough. Electric Vehicles To assist with these options we launched our electric vehicle charging strategy in 2023. This sets out our initial approach to improving infrastructure on our own sites. Combined with progressive planning policies to secure vehicle charging points in new development, there is a much greater coverage of the facilities to support and influence the demand in electric vehicles. Registered plug-in vehicle registration across the borough (cumulative) Cycling In early 2024 we consulted on our new cycling strategy which builds on our previous positive progress. This promotes 6 new cycling routes within the borough and supports those routes already provided or being developed. The School Travel and Road Safety (STaRS) Team also offers training to all our schools allowing pupils to learn the necessary skills to cycle for travel. Cycle skills sessions are also offered to children and adults between the months of April and October at Pield Heath School Cycle Track. Dr Bike events run throughout the year allowing residents to have minor bike repairs and checks free of charge in numerous locations around the borough. Schools are encouraged to develop School Travel Plans through TfL's Travel for Life programme. The STaRS team works with schools to develop the plans and promote them in communities through campaigns in order to support active and safe cycling. 32 Some of the lengths of the Grand Union Canal towpath (for cyclists and pedestrians) that have been improved (green), being improved (brown), or planned to be improved (yellow). 33 Carbon Neutral Borough Our own carbon neutral target is set out above and relates to our operational work. In terms of buildings, it covers assets within our financial and operational control. We do have a range of other assets that do not trigger one of those criteria. For example, we don’t have full control over the energy used within our housing stock but we have embarked on a significant suite of improvements that has resulted in a reduced carbon footprint as set out below. The work completed on these assets all contribute to the aspiration of having a carbon neutral borough in line with the Government 2050 target. We also recognise that these works improve the performance of the buildings, reduce energy costs for our residents and promote a healthier lifestyle. Some of the improvements we have delivered in our building stock: • Intelligent lighting within car parks (Cedars, Blyth Road, and Grainge’s) • Improved LED communal lighting in low and medium rise blocks. • 920 homes upgrades through the Green Homes Grant • 433 homes with upgraded EPC certificates • 1144 individual measures through the Green Homes Grant • Cavity wall insulation delivered through the Social Housing Decarbonisation Fund • 573 efficient boilers as part of the 2022/23 replacement programme • 2006 efficient boilers replaced in the 2023/24 replacement programme • 1917 efficient boilers replaced in the 2024/25 replacement programme underway Housing Revenue Account (HRA) Building Stock tCO2e (gas and electricity) 34 Across the wider borough the emissions are inevitably significant. The location of Heathrow in the south along with many strategic transport routes results in a above average borough wide carbon footprint. Despite this and consistent with the UK carbon footprint the graph below shows improvement across the borough. The emissions are associated with industrial, commercial, public sector, domestic, forestry, agriculture and waste. The totals are shown in ktCO2e (1000tCO2e). We do not have control over these emissions but can use our position to encourage others to take action. Clarifying the emissions across the borough and then taking positive action will be programmed for the medium to long term. Data from: https://www.gov.uk/government/statistics/uk-local-authority-and-regional- greenhouse-gas-emissions-statistics-2005-to-2022 -100 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 Borough wide emissions from different sources (ktCO2e) Industry Total Commercial Total Public Sector Total Domestic Total Transport Total LULUCF Net Emissions Agriculture Total Waste Total 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 Borough Wide Emissions All Sources (ktCO2e) 35 6. Actions for 2025-28 The 2020 Action Plan contained a range of ambitious objectives covering a wide scope of activities. As set out above, progress has been highly positive despite the challenges facing the Local Authority. Continuing to focus resource and attention where it is most impactful remains our priority. This review allows us to set out what we consider are the essential workstreams to continue to meet our commitments and achieve our vision. Specific actions related to businesses will follow once more work has been undertaken to understand the baseline position to ensure action can be prioritised. The Action Plan set out below is a refinement of the previous version and sets out work to be undertaken over the short (1 year) to medium term (2 – 3 years). The Action Plan has also been updated to reflect the motions approved by Council after the adoption of the previous Action Plan The proposed plan will inevitably be subject to change and review through the annual reporting process alongside scrutiny of Cabinet and the Residents’ Services Select Committee. Guide to review Theme Theme headings remain consistent with the 9 key themes Ref New Actions are given a ‘R’ prefix to differentiate from the original plan prefix of ‘C’ Action This provides a description of the Action to be taken within this plan period. Commentary Provides a brief statement of the relationship between the stated action and any previous iterations Timeframe The intended scope of completion/delivery for the Action 36 Community Leadership Ref Action Commentary Timeframe R1.1 To provide a dedicated online resource to provide information on how to record your carbon footprint alongside actions that can help reduce it. The resource will also outline options for external funding and how to improve an individual’s environmental footprint. Merged C1.2 and C1.12 25/26 R1.2 To promote and support volunteer groups with dedicated climate and environmental objectives. Hillingdon Friends of the Earth regularly engaged with bi-monthly meetings to continue. Ongoing R1.3 To bring together community and business groups, along with other interested parties as part of a ‘people’s assembly’ to discuss and shape revisions to the review of the Climate Action Plan in 2 years time. This action would overlap with the motion of the Council in November 2021 for a ‘People’s Assembly’ 2026 R1.4 To use our unique access to communities through, for example residents associations, to support and promote climate action. Revision to C1.3 Through existing engagement channels Ongoing R1.5 During 25/26, the Council will engage all schools within the borough and support them in the publication of a climate action plan with annual progress reports to be provided thereafter. Revision to previous objectives to rationalise and focus the output. To be delivered subject to external funding (Section 106 funds) 25/26 37 The Council’s Own Operations Ref Action Commentary Timeframe R2.1 All our operational assets under our direct operational control and financial management will be accredited as carbon neutral by 2030. Other assets we own but not under our control will be decarbonised in line with prevailing legislation and, go even further with the availability of additional funding. Action Retained Ongoing Trend analysis to be delivered in 2025. R2.2 By 2030, our fleet will be powered by the cleanest available technology available within budget constraints and suitable for the operational requirement. Action Retained Ongoing R2.3 Ensure all corporate plans and strategies, particularly regarding estate management and property disposal evaluate and mitigate for climate impacts. No change Ongoing R2.4 Undertake feasibility studies and act to install small scale low and zero carbon technologies in our own building stock. Action Retained Ongoing R2.5 To ensure procurement practices align with the objectives of this Plan Action Revised for short to medium term recognising the Council motion that 2035 is the target date for Scope 3 emissions (i.e. those embeded within the supply chain) Ongoing R2.6 To ensure our street lighting assets are targeted for further carbon reductions, using new low energy and renewable technologies. Action Retained Ongoing 38 Building Better Places Ref Action Commentary Timeframe C3.1 To use the development plan system to ensure all new major development will be zero carbon. Action Retained Ongoing C3.2 To consider new planning policies to ensure all non major new development is also zero carbon. Action Retained Ongoing C3.3 To ensure no new development is built in high and medium flood risk areas unless absolutely necessary and only then when flood risk management is properly understood and mitigated in accordance with council flood policy. Action Retained Ongoing C3.4 To ensure all new development is environmentally responsible, including protecting existing designations and sites of interest. Action Retained Ongoing C3.5 To ensure all new [add] major development contributes and supports the goal of sustainable transportation, such as the promotion of public transport, cycling or EV charging. Small amendment to align with Planning Policy Ongoing C3.6 To ensure that wherever possible during development, existing trees are retained. Where they cannot be retained, new trees should be planted to facilitate carbon gain. Action Retained Ongoing 39 Using and Producing Clean and Green Energy Ref Action Commentary Timeframe R4.1 To ensure and certify that the Council secures energy supplies from low or clean forms of generation by 2030 [add] where feasible. Revised Purchasing renewable energy at any cost would not be a prudent use of public money and would have an unlikely impact on the grid availability of green energy. A more prudent approach is necessary. Ongoing R4.2 To investigate opportunities for large scale electricity generation from Council owned land (e.g. solar farms). No change Ongoing Waste Management Ref Action Commentary Timeframe R5.1 Lead by example with a clear waste collection and sorting strategy for the Council’s own operations with year on year targets for improvements. No change Ongoing R5.2 Support the West London Waste Authority on waste reduction campaigns. No change Ongoing 40 R5.3 Work with businesses to reduce waste productivity and to provide more opportunities to customers to reduce and recycle their waste. No change Ongoing R5.4 Encourage and support residents and communities to avoid, reduce, reuse, and recycle waste in that order. No change Ongoing R5.5 To ensure all waste is managed sustainably and there is transparency and information on processes the Council utilises and destination of waste. No change Ongoing Climate Change Adaptation and Mitigation Ref Action Commentary Timeframe R6.1 To develop a climate change adaptation and mitigation action plan. No change 26/27 R6.2 To review the Council’s water consumption for its own operations (such as green space watering, depot operations and corporate buildings) and put in place measures to reduce consumption Revised to be more feasible Ongoing R6.3 To ensure the Council’s flood resilience and management work incorporates a changing climate and that the Council’s own land and property decisions consider the need to make space for water. No change Ongoing and reflected in the recent Flood Risk Strategy 41 Carbon Offsetting R7 Action Commentary Timeframe R7.1 To develop an offset strategy to develop local solutions to any remaining residual carbon emissions from council operations. No change 26/27 R7.2 To develop a tree and green space management strategy that supports and accounts for the offsetting objectives and commitments. No change 25/26 R7.3 Understand and increase current carbon sequestration through increased planting and changes to green space management. No change 25/26 R7.4 Increase the number of trees, particularly in urban areas to complement objectives to improve air quality and promote urban wildlife. No change Ongoing R7.5 To exploit opportunities to increase carbon sequestration to maximise opportunities for biodiversity and flood risk management No change Ongoing Sustainable Transportation Ref Action Commentary Resources R8.1 Produce a sustainable transportation strategy that reflects the objectives and commitments in this strategy. No change 26/27 42 R8.2 Work with TFL to improve bus connectivity and services. No change Ongoing R8.3 Identify opportunities for improved cycleways, cycle paths and public rights of way. No change Ongoing R8.4 To promote cycling opportunities through campaigns and awareness events. No change Ongoing R8.5 To secure improved cycling facilities across the borough. No change Ongoing R8.6 To review the electric charging vehicle action plan in line with changing demand and data. Reviewed We have adopted an EV charging strategy but this needs to be kept under review to ensure it aligns with demands. 26/27 R8.7 To ensure the Council’s Air Quality Action Plan aligns with the objectives in this plan to ensure a safe transition to increased levels of cycling and walking in urban areas. No change 25/26 Transparency, Communication and Reporting Ref Action Commentary Timeframe R9.1 To ensure transparency in the Council’s measuring of carbon footprints with clear details on methodologies as well as the outputs. All details to be available online. No change 25/26 R9.2 To publish an annual progress report of the objectives of this plan No change Annual (Sept/Oct) R9.3 To establish a People’s Assembly to consider review of the Actions necessary to meet the Corporate Climate Commitments. Revised 2026 (Oct/Nov) 43 Cedar of Lebanon Cranford Park, Hayes 100 to 200+ years of age 44

Text extracted automatically from the PDF, so layout, tables and images are not shown. Open the original PDF on LB Hillingdon’s website.

📄 Consultation Strategy , item 9. PDF 589 KB
Read the text of this document (4 pages)
Climate Action Plan Review Consultation Strategy October 2024 Climate Action Plan Review London Borough of Hillingdon 1 Consultation Strategy 1. Who we will engage with The Consultation on the Climate Action Plan Review will be public and open to anyone who wishes to respond. As a minimum, specific communication will be sent to the following groups as they have been identified as priority groups in assisting us with delivering climate action. Further groups will be added to this list for targeted engagement. Name Type Hillingdon residents Residents Community groups such as the Crane Valley Partnership Community Groups Residents’ Associations Community Groups Hillingdon Friends of the Earth Environment Action Group Friends of Groups Community Groups School, College, University Educational Groups Business Forums Business Groups Environment Agency Strategic Stakeholder Thames Water Strategic Stakeholder Affinity Water Strategic Stakeholder Greater London Authority Strategic Stakeholder Natural England Strategic Stakeholder Transport for London Strategic Stakeholder West London Waste Authority Strategic Stakeholder Neighbouring authorities (Buckinghamshire, Hertfordshire, London Borough of Ealing, London Borough of Harrow, and London Borough of Hounslow) Strategic Stakeholder Network Rail Strategic Stakeholder Heathrow Airport Strategic Stakeholder Ministry of Defence Strategic Stakeholder London Councils Strategic Stakeholder 2. The public consultation Stakeholders will be consulted through an online questionnaire which will be hosted on the Hillingdon Council consultations webpage. However, there will be an option for residents to complete the consultation in written format. The Hillingdon Customer Engagement Team and Communications Team will assist with publicising the consultation. The strategic stakeholders will be engaged via email. The consultation will allow free commentary but will be guided by the following consultation questions: Climate Action Plan Review London Borough of Hillingdon 2 Questions Response options 1. Please select the category which best describes you. Resident Community Group Environment Action Group Strategic Stakeholder Business Group School, College or University Other (please provide details) 2. Is the need for Climate Action clearly presented? Open response 3. Do you support the Council’s Vision and Corporate Commitments? Open response 4. Does the Vision and Corporate Commitments cover the main climate action? Open response 5. Has the Climate Action Plan review helped you understand more above climate change? Yes, No, Unsure 6. Has the Council progress been properly set out? Yes, No, Unsure 7. Which areas do you think the Council should prioritise for further interventions? Open response 8. Do you have any action plans you would like us to reflect in our Plan for 2025-28? Open response 9. Is there any specific climate action that you would like us to promote? Open response Theme 1 – Community Leadership 10. Is our approach in this area clear to you Yes, No, Unsure 11. Are there any areas you would like us to prioritise for 2025-28? Open response Theme 2 – The Council’s Own Operations 12. Is our approach in this area clear to you Yes, No, Unsure 13. Are there any areas you would like us to prioritise for 2025-28? Open response Theme 3 – Building Better Places 14. Is our approach in this area clear to you Yes, No, Unsure 15. Are there any areas you would like us to prioritise for 2025-28? Open response Theme 4 – Using and Producing Clean and Green Energy 16. Is our approach in this area clear to you Yes, No, Unsure Climate Action Plan Review London Borough of Hillingdon 3 Questions Response options 17. Are there any areas you would like us to prioritise for 2025-28? Open response Theme 5 – Waste Management 18. Is our approach in this area clear to you Yes, No, Unsure 19. Are there any areas you would like us to prioritise for 2025-28? Open response Theme 6 – Climate Change Adaptation and Mitigation 20. Is our approach in this area clear to you Yes, No, Unsure 21. Are there any areas you would like us to prioritise for 2025-28? Open response Theme 7 – Carbon Offsetting 22. Is our approach in this area clear to you Yes, No, Unsure 23. Are there any areas you would like us to prioritise for 2025-28? Open response Theme 8 – Sustainable Transportation 24. Is our approach in this area clear to you Yes, No, Unsure 25. Are there any areas you would like us to prioritise for 2025-28? Open response Theme 9 – Transparency, Communication and Reporting 26. Is our approach in this area clear to you Yes, No, Unsure 27. Are there any areas you would like us to prioritise for 2025-28? Open response 3. Timeframe The public consultation is expected to commence in early/mid-November. A consultation of 6 weeks would normally be recommended but this will be extended to bridge the festive period and allow for consultations into early January. The consultation will therefore be open for approximately 8/9 weeks and run into mid-January. 4. Adoption of Review and 2025-28 Action Plan Following the public consultation, the comments and feedback received will be collated and reviewed. Amendments to the Review will be made and presented to Cabinet to allow for adoption for the start of the 2025 financial year. An annual review will be produced every Autumn when outturns from energy usage data is available.

Text extracted automatically from the PDF, so layout, tables and images are not shown. Open the original PDF on LB Hillingdon’s website.

Relevant Select Committee
Expiry date for any scrutiny call-in / date decision can be implemented (if no call-in)
Officer(s) to action
Directorate
Classification
10. Transport for London Local Implementation Plan - Annual Spending Submission PDF 596 KB
RESOLVED: That the Cabinet approve, in principle, the proposed bid outlined in this report for funds from Transport for London (TfL) to implement the Council’s Local Implementation Plan (LIP) and d elegate authority to the Cabinet Member for Property, Highways and Transport to agree any changes or additions prior to the submission deadline and to submit the Council's new three-year Local Implementation Plan Delivery Programme bid by the deadline. Reasons for decision Cabinet agreed to progress the Council’s bid to Transport for London for funds to deliver the Council’s Local Implementation Plan through various transport projects in the Borough. The Cabinet Member for Property, Highways and Transport explained that the Plan stemmed from the Mayor of London setting his transport strategy with priorities such as safer corridors, cycle training, bus priority, and better bus partnerships. Each London borough would then bid for funding based on this strategy. The Cabinet Member expected that the Council’s baseline funding would be approximately £1.5 million per annum, similar to previous years, but noted that final allocations would depend on the Mayor’s budget decisions. Alternative options considered and rejected None. Relevant Select Committee Corporate Resources & Infrastructure Expiry date for any scrutiny call-in / date decision can be implemented (if no call-in) This matter can be called in by the relevant select committee by 5pm, Friday 18 October 2024. If not called-in, Cabinet’s decisions can then be implemented. Officer(s) to action Sophie Wilmot Directorate Place Directorate Classification Public - The report and any background papers relating to this decision by the Cabinet are available to view on the Council's website or by visiting the Civic Centre, Uxbridge.
📄 Transport for London Local Implementation Plan - Annual Spending Submission PDF 596 KB
Read the text of this document (18 pages)
Cabinet report – 10th October 2024 Part I – Public TRANSPORT FOR LONDON, LOCAL IMPLEMENTATION PLAN, NEW THREE-YEAR DELIVERY PROGRAMME 2025/26 to 2027/28 Cabinet Member & Portfolio Councillor Jonathan Bianco Cabinet Member for Property, Highways and Transport Responsible Officer Corporate Director of Place Report Author & Directorate Sophie Wilmot Place Directorate Papers with report  Appendix A – Safer Corridors & Neighbourhoods – Proposed 3 Year Delivery Plan  Appendix B – Bus Priority – Proposed 3 Year Delivery Plan  Appendix C – Safer Cycleways Development – Proposed 3 Year Delivery Plan  Appendix D – Cycle Parking – Proposed 3 Year Delivery Plan  Appendix E – Borough Safer Junctions – Proposed 3 Year Bid HEADLINES Summary The purpose of this report is to brief Cabinet on the proposed bid to be set out by LBH Officers regarding the Transport for London Local Implementation Plan (LIP) funding for a new three-year programme covering the financial years 202 5/26, 2026/27 and 2027/28. The report also recommends that Cabinet approve the proposed bid as set out in the report and delegate authority to the Cabinet Member for Property, Highways and Transport to agree any changes or additions prior to the submission deadline and to submit the Council's new three-year Local Implementation Plan Delivery Programme bid by the deadline. Putting our Residents First Delivering on the Council Strategy 2022-2026 This report supports our ambition for residents / the Council of: Live active and healthy lives This report supports our commitments to residents of: A Green and Sustainable Borough Financial Cost There are no direct financial costs to the Council. Select Committee Corporate Resources & Infrastructure Relevant Ward(s) Boroughwide Cabinet report – 10th October 2024 Part I – Public RECOMMENDATION That the Cabinet approve, in principle, the proposed bid outlined in this report for funds from Transport for London (TfL) to implement the Council’s Local Implementation Plan (LIP) and delegate authority to the Cabinet Member for Property, Highways and Transport to agree any changes or additions prior to the submission deadline and to submit the Council's new three-year Local Implementation Plan Delivery Programme bid by the deadline. Reasons for recommendation Transport for London (TfL) require the Council to prepare and submit a proposed programme of works, referred to as ‘FORM A’, each year which acts as a funding bid for the following financial year. At certain stages in the cycle, TfL require boroughs to submit a three-year programme of funding, often following the publication of new delivery guidance. The schemes set out need to deliver the Council’s Local Implementation Plan (LIP), which is developed to set out how Hillingdon aims to achieve the Mayor of London’s Transport Strategy. A draft ‘FORM A’ for the three-year programme is to be created and will be submitted in draft to Transport for London for comment by 15th November 2024. Any comments made by TfL will be reviewed by Officers and changes made to the ‘FORM A’ submission prior to the final submission date of 13th February 2025. An ‘in principle’ approval from the Cabinet is being recommended as the exact content of the formally submitted ‘FORM A’ could be subject to change based on feedback or suggestions from Cabinet and TfL. The approval of the delegation of authority to the Cabinet Member for Property, Highways and Transport to agree any changes and to submit the document is recommended as there is likely to be a short amount of time to finalise the submission document. Alternative options considered / risk management An alternative option would be for full Cabinet to authorise the final Delivery Plan submission, however the deadline of submitting this bid would likely be missed, which will have a negative impact on the award of Local Implementation Plan funding. Democratic compliance / previous authority To agree such external funding bids requires Cabinet authority. Cabinet may also delegate such matters to the relevant Cabinet Member. Select Committee comments None at this stage. Cabinet report – 10th October 2024 Part I – Public SUPPORTING INFORMATION Overview 1. The Greater London Authority Act 1999 requires each London borough to prepare Local Implementation Plans (LIP) containing proposals for how they will implement the Mayor of London’s Transport Strategy. TfL have published new guidance on developing the latest round of three-year Delivery Plans; this Guidance will be used to help shape the Council’s Delivery Plan programme as ‘failure to comply with this guidance is likely to have an impact on the award of funding in due course.’ 2. The Guidance requires Delivery Plan programmes to derive from the approved LIP in line with core measures which have been identified for each of the diff erent funding streams . The programmes should plan for the delivery of the Mayor’s Transport Strategy priorities for Healthy Streets across the borough. The guidance also requires that Delivery Plan programmes be underpinned by a strong evidence base. To this end, TfL have provided the Council with data sets and maps that highlight priority corridors for a range of modes and themes. These include road safety, buses, walking and cycling. In tandem with these data sets and maps, the Council may also use locally held data, as well as taking into account stakeholder views to support its programme. 3. On 12th July 2024, Hillingdon received the final LIP guidance titled ‘Guidance for boroughs preparing Delivery Plans 2025 -2028’ from TfL. The guidance outlines that draft ‘FORM A’ submissions need to be submitted by 15th November 2024, with final versions being submitted by 13th February 2025 once revisions have been made following comments from TfL. 4. In order to create the three -year programme, TfL have advised boroughs to use funding amounts awarded in the previous financial year, 2024/25 , as ‘guidance’ . TfL have also released details of n ew funding pots, against which Boroughs are able to submit scheme bids or expressions of interest, which are detailed within this report. 5. Members will appreciate that the initial proposals and associated estimates are set out in good faith as part of the process to agree a basis for funding with Transport for London, but the subsequent detailed development, capital allocation approvals and related steps will all be subject to Member guidance and the usual formal approvals. It is entirely conceivable that as the programme reaches the actual development phase, some of the proposals set out here may need to be modified, rescoped or abandoned and , if so, new alternatives will be put forward for agreement by both TfL and Members. Without the progression of TfL’ s ‘FORM A’, there will be no funding arrangement at all. Funding Streams & Proposals Safer Corridors and Neighbourhoods – Potential funding allocation: £1,202k per year 6. The Safer Corridors and Neighbourhoods budget is the main funding provided to boroughs to deliver their LIP , which looks to address the targets set out in the Mayor of London’s Transport Strategy. This funding allows boroughs to carry out a range of projects of varying Cabinet report – 10th October 2024 Part I – Public sizes, including educational based activities, although these can be no more than 20% of the total budget. 7. The new guidance outlines that the majority of projects put forward under this budget should deliver one of the core measures identified by TfL in the guidance. The core measures identified for this fund include but are not limited to schemes which deliver the following:  Traffic reduction – modal filters.  Safer Town Centres – modal filters, bus gates, pedestrian only spaces, school streets.  Speed reduction – 20mph speed limits.  Crossings – new formal crossing, pedestrian stages to existing signals, upgrading of existing crossings, introduction.  Safer junctions – banning movements, cycle protection, bus gates, traffic filters. 8. The measures submitted for this fund must be underpinned by a strong evidence base as provided by TfL in the borough data sets and maps that highlight priority corridors for a range of modes and themes. These include road safety, buses, walking and cycling. 9. As all scheme details are developed, they will firstly be discussed with the Cabinet Member for Property, Highways and Transport prior to progressing to the consultation and implementation phases. 10. A note about Staffing Costs: TfL state, in their various guidance in terms of staff cost relating to LIP funding, as follows: Staff Costs Subject to available funding TfL currently plans to fund reasonable staff salary costs associated with the delivery of projects and programmes within the LIP three -year plan. However, boroughs are reminded that staff costs can only be booked to schemes wit h specific deliverables. TfL will not allow a scheme to be created to simply cover the staff costs of an individual or team (headcount) working on the wider LIP programme and staff costs cannot be greater than 10% of the project cost unless agreed in advan ce with Transport for London. 11. The costs of project delivery will legitimately include appropriate and relevant staff costs (for example, relevant work by highways engineers) within the parameters permitted by TfL (up to a maximum of 10% of the project cost). 12. Based on the criteria for this fund set out by TfL, Officers have put together a proposed draft set of schemes for the three -year programme, which are summarised in Appendix A. The tables in Appendix A outline the details of the proposed schemes and justification as to why these schemes have been suggested along with the benefits the schemes will bring should they be implemented within Hillingdon. Cycle Training – Potential funding allocation: £TBC 13. Transport for London have confirmed that all boroughs will be awarded a ring-fenced grant to facilitate cycle training. The fund is to be used solely on delivery of a Council’s Bikeability Cabinet report – 10th October 2024 Part I – Public and Adult Cycle Skills Training programme. TfL would like a total of 25% of the fund to be used to develop and facilitate adult cycle skills training. Officers will provide further details of the magnitude of this fund when details have been provided by TfL. Bus Priority – Potential funding allocation: £200k per year 14. Another ring-fenced grant available from Transport for London is for Bus Priority schemes, which are schemes where improvements are proposed that reduce delays to buses and improve journey times. Again, schemes put forward for this fund should look to deliver a core measure identified by the TfL guidance as well as supporting measures, where appropriate. Core measures identified for this funding stream include the following: new bus lanes, extension to bus lanes, changes to bus lane operating times, bus gates, rationalisation of kerbside activity and bus accessibility enhancements. 15. Based on the criteria for this fund set out by TfL, Officers have put together a proposed set of schemes for the three-year programme, which are provided in Appendix B. The tables in Appendix B outl ine the details of the proposed scheme s and justification as to why these schemes have been suggested and the benefits the scheme s will bring should they be implemented within Hillingdon. Safer Cycle Network Development – Potential funding allocation: £400k per year 16. Transport for London has a ring-fenced fund for schemes which provide new or improve existing cycleways, which align with the routes defined on the TfL Strategic Cycle Analysis. The guidance looks to direct schemes under this fund to deliver a core measure alongside supporting measures. Core measures identified for this funding stream should align with Cycleway Quality Criteria and include the following: modal filters, protected routes, new crossings, upgrade of crossings; contraflows and access barrier removal or upgrade. 17. Based on the criteria for this fund set out by TfL, Officers have put together a proposed set of schemes for the three-year programme, which are provided in Appendix C. The tables in Appendix C outline the details of the p roposed schemes and justification as to why these schemes have been suggested and the benefits the scheme s will bring should they be implemented within Hillingdon. Cycle Parking – Potential funding allocation: £30k per year 18. Transport for London have made available a ring-fenced fund for provision of cycle parking in a borough. The guidance outlines that this fund can be utilised to deliver cycle parking in the following locations: residential areas, at schools, in town centres and around public transport hubs. 19. Based on the criteria for this fund set out by TfL, Officers have put together a proposed set of schemes for the three-year programme, which are provided in Appendix D. The tables in Appendix D outline the details of the proposed scheme s and justification as to why these schemes have been suggested and the benefits the scheme s will bring should they be implemented within Hillingdon. Cabinet report – 10th October 2024 Part I – Public Borough Safer Streets – Potential funding allocation: £TBC (new fund) 20. The Borough Safer Streets fund is a new fund recently launched by TfL for larger schemes at locations / links that are shown to have high accident levels. The TfL guidance outlines some scheme types which could be considered:  Lowering speed limits: large scale speed reduction schemes, boroughwide 20mph.  Modal filters: single or large modal filters to reduce traffic and enable a move to increased active travel and public transport.  Safer High Streets: removal of motor traffic; space reallocation; traffic calming.  Safer Borough Junctions: reducing traffic; reallocating road space; removing / separating movements; cyclist segregation and upgrades to pedestrian facilities. 21. Based on the criteria for this fund set out by TfL, Officers have put together a proposed set of schemes for the three-year programme, which are provided in Appendix E. The tables in Appendix E outline the details of the proposed scheme and offer justification as to why these schemes have been suggested and the benefits the scheme will bring should they be implemented within Hillingdon. Better Bus Partnerships – Potential funding allocation: £TBC (new fund) 22. TfL have announced £30 million in funding for a new programme called Better Bus Partnerships. It is proposed that £10 million will be available for three successful boroughs to deliver transformational bus infrastructure and operational improvements. This includes new bus priority measures to improve journ ey times, better management of road works to reduce delays to buses, improvements to stops and stations to make it easier to change between buses and other modes of transport, and improvements to streets to make it easier to walk to bus stops and stations. 23. At this stage, TfL are asking boroughs to put forward expressions of interest for this fund by detailing locations and scheme ideas. Officers suggest that the Cabinet may wish to submit an expression of interest for improvements to buses around Uxbridge Town Centre as there has been a long-standing desire to improve the conditions for users of the bus station and connection to the town centre and the London Underground services. In addition, Officers are looking at potential changes to St Andrew’s roundabout which could result in changes to bus movements. Next Steps 24. The next steps are draft submission of ‘FORM A’ in November 2024 and final submission of the new three-year programme by the February 2025 deadline following feedback from TfL and the Cabinet. Financial Implications This report is requesting permission for the preparation and the submission of a new three-year delivery programme, spanning from 2025/26 to 2027/28 , which is in line with new guidance published by Transport for London. Cabinet report – 10th October 2024 Part I – Public The guidance published by TfL will be used to help shape the Council’s Delivery Plan programme as ‘failure to comply with this guidance is likely to have an impact on the award of funding in due course’. The guidance requires the Delivery Plan programmes to derive from the approved LIP and follow the ‘core measures’ and data analysis set out by TfL for each funding stream, which have been detailed in the body of this report. TfL have stipulated that they will now only fund a limited number of studies each year. Similarly, the amount of funding that may be allocated to non -infrastructure behaviour change initiatives is now capped. Taken together, studies and activation measures mus t now be no greater than 20 per cent of the borough’s total allocation. Further to this, TfL have stated that they will fund reasonable staff salary costs associated with the delivery of projects and programmes within the LIP, however staff costs can only be booked to schemes with specific deliverables and costs cannot be greater than 10% of the project unless agreed in advance with TfL. The final funding allocation from TfL for each year of the new three-year programme is still to be determined. Due to this, TfL have informed boroughs that submissions should be made in line with funding amounts awarded in the 2024/25 financial year for the existing funding streams. For new funds, TfL are asking for bids which will be considered on a case by case basis, w ith no indicated funding limit s for boroughs being outlined. For the financial year 202 4/25, the actual funding allocated for the schemes mentioned above total to £1,908k as at month 5. Any changes to this amount and any future additional TfL funding awards will be reported to Cabinet. The approved capital programme submitted to Cabinet in February 2024 assumes baseline TfL LIP grant funding of £1,458k for each year from 2025/26 to 2028/29. The budget will be refreshed once TfL confirm the final funding position following the submission. RESIDENT BENEFIT & CONSULTATION The benefit or impact upon Hillingdon residents, service users and communities By submitting the new three-year Delivery Plan programme via ‘FORM A’ to TfL the Council can hope to receive funding for investment in a range of transport schemes that will make improve mobility and accessibility, air quality, personal health, reduce road danger and ease the flow of traffic. Consultation carried out or required No consultation has been carried out at this stage. CORPORATE CONSIDERATIONS Corporate Finance Corporate Finance has reviewed the report and concurs with the Financial Implications set out above, noting that the submission for the three-year delivery plan for 2025/26 to 2027/28 is based on the amount of £1,908k which has been awarded by TfL in 2024/25, along with Cabinet report – 10th October 2024 Part I – Public additional bids for the new funding streams available for 2025/26, in which TfL will review on a case-by-case basis. The approved capital programme submitted to Cabinet and Council in February 2024 assumes a baseline TfL LIP grant funding of £1,458k for each year from 2024/25 to 2028/29, which was set at the agreement between DFT and TfL funding levels. The budget will be refreshed once TfL confirm the final funding position for 2025/26 to 2027/28. Legal Legal Services confirm that the Council is responsible for carrying out this function pursuant to section 151 of the Greater London Authority Act 1999. Thus, there are no legal impediments to the Council following the recommendations set out in this report, although any contract that the Council enters into must comply with the Council's Procurement Standing Orders, which were last updated effective 11th July 2024. Infrastructure / Asset Management None at this stage. BACKGROUND PAPERS ‘Guidance for boroughs preparing Delivery Plans for 2025 -2028 – Delivering Borough Local Implementation Plans’ – Transport for London, July 2024 Cabinet report – 10th October 2024 Part I – Public APPENDIX A: SAFER CORRIDORS & NEIGHBOURHOODS – PROPOSED 3 YEAR DELIVERY PLAN 2 2025/26 FINANCIAL YEAR Scheme Title Funding requested Scheme Details Justification Cycle training contribution & Cycle events £85k Additional funding to support the delivery of both child and adult cycle training, over & above the ring-fenced amount. Funds to allow Dr Bikes to be carried out across the Borough and to support other Council initiatives such as the ‘Re-use, Repair, Recycle’ days and the disability cycle hub at Pield Heath School. The ring fenced sum is not sufficient to sustain the high demand on cycle training and events that are requested via the Council’s highly regarded Cycle Instructors. Additional funds will allow more events and courses to be run and for support to be given to other Council initiatives to reach a wider audience with cycle promotion. Pedestrian Training £60k Delivery of practical pedestrian training to all schools within Hillingdon via the Council's casually employed Pedestrian Trainers. The Council initiative has been running very successfully for a number of years with a large number of primary school aged children benefiting from the training each year. School Travel Plan & STARS related activities £30k Funds to support work in schools to create student travel ambassadors to promote road safety and active travel to other members of their school community. An example of the use of the funds could be providing hi-vis vests for a walking bus. The Council’s School Travel & Road Safety Team, work with a number of schools across the borough on Travel Plans via the TfL Travel for Life initiative. The works allow collaboration with schools and for schools to take ownership of travel issues associated with their school. Active Travel Promotion £20k Funds to support and encourage residents, businesses and schools to consider active travel modes to travel to and from school. This will allow campaigns to support infrastructure improvements proposed. This is particular important for the cycle infrastructure going forward and the supporting promotional measures outlined in the Hillingdon Cycle Strategy. Road Safety Campaigns £7k Funds to allow road safety campaigns to be run across the Borough such as the young driver safety initiatives or drink/ drive campaigns. This will also include campaigns associated with safety improvements across the borough such as introduction of more advance stop lines or changes to junction movements. This will allow campaigns to support infrastructure improvements proposed. Boroughwide Accessibility – Mini Programme £100k Delivery of small-scale accessibility schemes across the borough such as dropped kerbs. All sites are identified and assessed by the Council's Principal Accessibility Officer and generated from the Mobility and Older Person's Forums. A package of schemes to improve accessibility around the borough in particular for those with mobility difficulties. Contribution to the upgrade of the Grand Union Canal towpath and access points £100k Funds to upgrade the towpath and access points to Quietway standard to provide a better link for cycling and walking for both commuting and leisure purposes. There is a large amount of S106 and other grant funding currently available to support this upgrade and this funding will allow further sections to be completed. The continued upgrade of the Grand Union Canal is part of the Hillingdon Cycle Strategy and a key ambition of the Canal & Rivers Trust. Minor Cycle Schemes – Mini Programme £100k Funds to progress a programme of small upgrades and improvements to the existing cycle infrastructure in Hillingdon. The current provision has been audited by consultants and a list of minor improvements have been detailed in order to create better and joined up links for cycling and fill in any ‘missing gaps’ in provision which have been identified. This programme of works will allow for benefit to be realised from existing provision and easily create routes that will encourage more people to consider walking and cycling in Hillingdon. North Hyde Road Phase 3 greening works £160k Funds to progress the third and final phase of the pedestrian and cycle improvements along North Hyde Road which are accompanied by the installation of green infrastructure. This scheme completes works already undertaken on North Hyde Road to improve conditions for active travel and improvements to air quality / protecting people from areas of poor air quality. Cabinet report – 10th October 2024 Part I – Public Long Lane, Hillingdon – Healthy Street £150k Funds to progress measures along Long Lane to improve conditions based on the healthy streets approach. The measures could include but not be limited to: implementation of street trees, improved crossing over side / access roads and improved lighting to increase safety. Long Lane is a busy road through the borough and provides connections to a number of schools and local services. Improving the environment along Long Lane will make a better travel experience for all in the area and look to encourage more active modes of travel. This work will compliment proposals to improve cycle provision and the reliability of bus services along the link. Walking & cycling Links to / around Northwood Hills Town Centre £125k Funds to implement measures to improve walking and cycling connections to and through Northwood Hills town centre. The works could include but not limited to: dropped kerbs with tactile paving; continuous footways over side roads; waiting restrictions; tightening junctions and providing cycle lane provision. The data from TfL shows that there is high pedestrian severance in the area, improvements to the pedestrian environment would make connections better for those wishing to access the station and the two large local secondary schools. Improvement works can also encourage more people to use the local services by active travel modes. Colham Manor Primary School £10k Funds to create a 20mph zone outside Colham Manor School and improve the walking and cycle connections around the school. Consideration of an informal / formal crossing point to replace the vacant school crossing patrol post and to future proof safety at the site. The proposals will improve road safety outside the school and encourage more trips by active travel modes. Harefield Junior School £15k Funds to improve road safety and support active travel outside the school. The works could include, but not be limited to: installation of new parking restrictions; extend and enhance the 10mph to reduce speeds on approach to crossings and install measures to slow down the exit from the alley to reduce the possibility children could run out of the alley into the road. The proposals will improve road safety outside the school and encourage more trips by active travel modes. Yeading Primary School £40k Funds to raise the existing zebra on Yeading Lane to slow traffic and provide an at grade crossing. In addition, the existing belisha beacons will be upgrade to ‘Zebrites’ and illuminated poles to improve safety further. The proposals will improve road safety outside the school and encourage more trips by active travel modes. Botwell House Primary School £30k Funds to improve crossing facilities and accessibility outside of the school. Considerations to be given to the possibility of providing an at grade crossing at the pelican crossing and traffic calming in the area. The proposals will improve road safety outside the school and encourage more trips by active travel modes. Cranford Park Junior School £10k Funds to upgrade the guardrail to Visirail and improve accessibility to the school by providing a more comprehensive network of dropped kerbs and tactile paving. The proposals will improve road safety outside the school and encourage more trips by active travel modes. Dr Triplett’s Primary School £15k Funds to upgrade the belisha beacons at the zebra crossing on Church Road, with ‘zebrites’ and illuminated poles to improve safety. The proposals will improve road safety outside the school and encourage more trips by active travel modes. Field End Junior School £25k Funds to install ‘wig-wag’ school warning lights and related signage on the approaches to the school entrance. The proposals will improve road safety outside the school and encourage more trips by active travel modes. U100 footpath – Vine Lane to Long Lane £70k Funds to upgrade and improve the footpath which runs between Long Lane and Vine Lane by upgrading the surface and providing a link to Angel Close to make it accessible for more people. Consideration will be given to provide protection to stop fly-tipping and anti- social behaviour. The proposals will improve opportunities for active travel in the area. The route is close to St Andrew’s Park and Uxbridge Town Centre as well as on routes to local schools. 20mph outside schools £50k Funds to introduce 20mph zones outside schools across Hillingdon where they do not currently exist. Measures could include but not limited to: signage, road markings, physical traffic calming and engagement with schools. The proposals will improve road safety outside the school and encourage more trips by active travel modes. Cabinet report – 10th October 2024 Part I – Public 2026/27 FINANCIAL YEAR Scheme Title Funding requested Scheme Details Justification Cycle training contribution & Cycle events £85k Additional funding to support the delivery of both child and adult cycle training, over & above the ring-fenced amount. Funds to allow Dr Bikes to be carried out across the Borough and to support other Council's initiatives such as the ‘Re-use, Repair, Recycle’ days and the disability cycle hub at Pield Heath School. The ring fenced is not sufficient to sustain the high demand on cycle training and events that are requested via the Council’s highly regarded Cycle Instructors. Additional funds will allow more events and courses to be run and for support to be given to other Council initiatives to reach a wider audience with cycle promotion. Pedestrian Training £60k Delivery of practical pedestrian training to all schools within Hillingdon via the Council's casually employed Pedestrian Trainers. The Council initiative has been running very successfully for a number of years with a large number of primary school aged children benefiting from the training each year. School Travel Plan & STARS related activities £30k Funds to support work in schools to create student travel ambassadors to promote road safety and active travel to other members of their school community. An example of the use of the funds could be providing hi-vis vests for a walking bus. The Council’s School Travel & Road Safety Team, work with a number of schools across the borough on Travel Plans via the TfL Travel for Life initiative. The works allow collaboration with schools and for schools to take ownership of travel issues associated with their school. Active Travel Promotion £20k Funds to support and encourage residents, businesses and schools to consider active travel modes to travel to and from school. This will allow campaigns to support infrastructure improvements proposed. This is particular important for the cycle infrastructure going forward and the supporting promotional measures outlined in the Hillingdon Cycle Strategy. Road Safety Campaigns £7k Funds to allow road safety campaigns to be run across the borough such as the young driver safety initiatives or drink/ drive campaigns. This will also include campaigns associated with safety improvements across the borough such as introduction of more advance stop lines or changes to junction movements. This will allow campaigns to support infrastructure improvements proposed. Boroughwide Accessibility – Mini Programme £100k Delivery of small-scale accessibility schemes across the borough such as dropped kerbs. All sites are identified and assessed by the Council's Principal Accessibility Officer and generated from the Mobility and Older Person's Forums. A package of schemes to improve accessibility around the borough in particular for those with mobility difficulties. Contribution to the upgrade of the Grand Union Canal towpath and access points £100k Funds to upgrade the towpath and access points to Quietway standard to provide a better link for cycling and walking for both commuting and leisure purposes. There is a large amount of S106 and other grant funding currently available to support this upgrade and this funding will allow further sections to be completed. The continued upgrade of the Grand Union Canal is part of the Hillingdon Cycle Strategy and a key ambition of the Canal & Rivers Trust. Minor Cycle Schemes – Mini Programme £100k Funds to progress a programme of small upgrades and improvements to the existing cycle infrastructure in Hillingdon. The current provision has been audited by consultants and a list of minor improvements have been detailed in order to create better and joined up links for cycling and fill in any ‘missing gaps’ in provision which have been identified. This programme of works, will allow for benefit to be realised from existing provision and easily create routes that will encourage more people to consider walking and cycling in Hillingdon. Uxbridge Road, Healthy Streets £350k Funds to improve Uxbridge Road in line with the healthy streets indicators. Measures could include but not be limited to: more street trees to provide shade and to help improve air quality in the area; provision of areas where people are able to stop and rest and continuous crossings over side roads along Uxbridge Road. The proposals will improve conditions for active travel along the Uxbridge Road as well improve the environment and encourage more people to access the local shops and services along the Uxbridge Road. The works will compliment proposed measures to improve cycle provision along the link as well as road safety at key junctions. Cabinet report – 10th October 2024 Part I – Public Cycle Links to Ruislip & Ruislip Manor £125k Funds to improve cycle links to Ruislip and Ruislip Manor town centres by cycle. Measures could include but not be limited to: segregated / protect cycle provision, cycle improvements at junctions and cycle parking at the town centres. The proposals will improve active travel opportunities to local shops and services. Transport for London data suggests that there is high active travel potential in the area and in particular the route from the White Hart Roundabout to Ruislip has high cycle opportunity potential. H26 footpath – behind Beck Theatre, Hayes £45k Funds to improve the quality of the H26 footpath which runs behind the Beck Theatre through the grassy meadows area and to the facilities on the Uxbridge Road. The upgrade of the footpath will improve opportunities for active travel in an area with high active travel potential, as well as improve connections between residents and the shops / services which are located on Uxbridge Road. The works will tie into other proposals for upgrades along Uxbridge Road, itself. 2027/28 FINANCIAL YEAR Scheme Title Funding requested Scheme Details Justification Cycle training contribution & Cycle events £85k Additional funding to support the delivery of both child and adult cycle training, over & above the ring-fenced amount. Funds to allow Dr Bikes to be carried out across the Borough and to support other Council's initiatives such as the ‘Re-use, Repair, Recycle’ days and the disability cycle hub at Pield Heath School. The ring fenced is not sufficient to sustain the high demand on cycle training and events that are requested via the Council’s highly regarded Cycle Instructors. Additional funds will allow more events and courses to be run and for support to be given to other Council initiatives to reach a wider audience with cycle promotion. Pedestrian Training £60k Delivery of practical pedestrian training to all schools within Hillingdon via the Council's casually employed Pedestrian Trainers. The Council initiative has been running very successfully for a number of years with a large number of primary school aged children benefiting from the training each year. School Travel Plan & STARS related activities £30k Funds to support work in schools to create student travel ambassadors to promote road safety and active travel to other members of their school community. An example of the use of the funds could be providing hi-vis vests for a walking bus. The Council’s School Travel & Road Safety Team, work with a number of schools across the borough on Travel Plans via the TfL Travel for Life initiative. The works allow collaboration with schools and for schools to take ownership of travel issues associated with their school. Active Travel Promotion £20k Funds to support and encourage residents, businesses and schools to consider active travel modes to travel to and from school. This will allow campaigns to support infrastructure improvements proposed. This is particular important for the cycle infrastructure going forward and the supporting promotional measures outlined in the Hillingdon Cycle Strategy. Road Safety Campaigns £7k Funds to allow road safety campaigns to be run across the Borough such as the young driver safety initiatives or drink/ drive campaigns. This will also include campaigns associated with safety improvements across the borough such as introduction of more advance stop lines or changes to junction movements. This will allow campaigns to support infrastructure improvements proposed. Boroughwide Accessibility – Mini Programme £100k Delivery of small-scale accessibility schemes across the borough such as dropped kerbs. All sites are identified and assessed by the Council's Principal Accessibility Officer and generated from the Mobility and Older Person's Forums. A package of schemes to improve accessibility around the borough in particular for those with mobility difficulties. Contribution to the upgrade of the Grand Union Canal towpath and access points £100k Funds to upgrade the towpath and access points to Quietway standard to provide a better link for cycling and walking for both commuting and leisure purposes. There is a large amount of S106 and other grant funding currently available to support this upgrade and this funding will allow further sections to be completed. The continued upgrade of the Grand Union Canal is part of the Hillingdon Cycle Strategy and a key ambition of the Canal & Rivers Trust. Cabinet report – 10th October 2024 Part I – Public Minor Cycle Schemes – Mini Programme £100k Funds to progress a programme of small upgrades and improvements to the existing cycle infrastructure in Hillingdon. The current provision has been audited by consultants and a list of minor improvements have been detailed in order to create better and joined up links for cycling and fill in any ‘missing gaps’ in provision which have been identified. This programme of works, will allow for benefit to be realised from existing provision and easily create routes that will encourage more people to consider walking and cycling in Hillingdon. Improved Crossings – illuminated belisha beacon poles £60k Funds to upgrade the belisha beacon poles at existing zebra crossings around the borough. The initial focus will be upgrading those near schools which have not already been completed. This will allow safer crossing points around the borough, in particular in locations used by more vulnerable people. Crossing between local shops and Cowley Recreation Ground £25k Funds to provide a formal zebra crossing between the local shops at Dellfield Parade and Cowley Recreation Ground. Consideration could be given to installing a parallel tiger crossing. This area is identified as having a very high pedestrian severance so a formal crossing would help overcome this issue. The provision could help encourage people to use both the local shops and the park. The recreation ground is bounded on one side by the grand union canal so a crossing would improve access to this facility for local residents. Cycle Links to Uxbridge Town Centre £125k Funds to upgrade and provide protected / segregated cycle provision on the links leading into Uxbridge Town Centre. The works could also include improvements and extension of the current cycle hire scheme operating between Brunel University and the town centre. Uxbridge is on TfL’s strategic cycle analysis and is Hillingdon’s metropolitan town centre. This work will enhance links being created through Brunel University and connect to developments such as St Andrew’s Park. Y13 footpath – Accommodation Lane to Colnbrook By Pass £90k Funds to upgrade and improve safety and user experience of the route by improving the surface. The improvements will ensure making horse riding, cycling and walking safer and more enjoyable and encourage more active travel in the area. The works will compliment proposed improvements for cycling in the area, in particular on Stanwell Moor Road. Rosedale College £15k Funds to provide wig wag warning signage on the approaches to the school. The proposals will improve road safety outside the school and encourage more trips by active travel modes. Harmondsworth Primary School £10k Funds to provide road safety and active travel improvements outside and on key routes to the school. The proposals will improve road safety outside the school and encourage more trips by active travel modes. Minet infant & Junior Schools £50k Funds to provide road safety and active travel improvements outside and on key routes to the school. The proposals will improve road safety outside the school and encourage more trips by active travel modes. Belmore Primary Academy £25k Funds to provide road safety measures and a 20mph zone outside the school. Consideration to the changing access arrangements to avoid cars parking on the footway and over residents driveways. The proposals will improve road safety outside the school and encourage more trips by active travel modes. Guru Nanak Secondary School £50k Funds to improve active travel connections to the school, both through Minet Country Park and connection to the new bridge which is to be installed over the canal into the new development at the former Southall gas works site. The proposals will improve road safety outside the school and encourage more trips by active travel modes. Park Road, Uxbridge – cycling & road safety £250k Funds to provide protected / segregated cycle provision on Park Road, Uxbridge. Consideration of creating Dutch style roundabout at the junctions. The proposals would look to connect into off road provision in Hillingdon Farm park and across to Vyners secondary school. The proposals will help encourage active travel and connect into other road safety and active travel schemes proposed in and around Uxbridge Town Centre. Cabinet report – 10th October 2024 Part I – Public APPENDIX B: BUS PRIORITY – PROPOSED 3 YEAR DELIVERY PLAN 2025/26 FINANCIAL YEAR Scheme Title Funding requested Scheme Details Justification Long Lane – between Court Drive & Freezeland Way £200k Funds to allow rationalisation of the kerbside activity along Long Lane, including but not limited to implementation of waiting restrictions and possibility of creating inset parking provision at high demand locations. It is proposed that this would be supported by works to infill layby bus stops where possible and to provide improved lighting around bus stops to increase safety and security. A large number of bus routes travel along Long Lane including school buses serving local schools which would significantly benefit from journey time improvements. The improvements proposed to the lighting will have benefits, in particular to the large secondary schools in the area where a number of young adults access bus stops and services on a daily basis. This section of Long Lane is identified in the TfL analysis as having very poor bus service underperformance as well as being an area ranked as a top priority for Vision Zero. This will also compliment proposals to look at upgrading cycle provision along Long Lane, Hillingdon. 2026/27 FINANCIAL YEAR Scheme Title Funding requested Scheme Details Justification Field End Road – between Kildare Close and Deane Croft Road. £200k Funds to possibly provide a bus gate / bus priority measures at the junction of Field End Road with Elm Avenue. It is proposed to support this work by to improve safety at the bus stops by reviewing and upgrading CCTV provision, particularly at those stops by Eastcote station and to improve accessibility between the bus stops and the underground station. Providing improved journey times in this area could provide benefits to those connecting to the station and encourage more use of the bus to link trips rather than the car. This location is identified in the TfL data analysis as a key area where buses are under performing and an area where there is a top democratic need to improve transport in the area. Providing improved CCTV will the feeling of safety for those and encourage travel by public transport. Improving accessibility between the bus stops and station will support potential improvements to be made to make Eastcote Station step free. 2027/28 FINANCIAL YEAR Scheme Title Funding requested Scheme Details Justification Park Road, Uxbridge – between Belmont Road and Swakeleys Road £200k Proposal to investigate the potential provision of a bus lane on Park Road, to also act as improved cycle provision. Reallocation of road space, removing the wide central reservation. The scheme will improve bus journey times and encourage more use of public transport, upgrades will support proposed cycle upgrades to Vyners School via Hillingdon Hill and the proposed improvements to St Andrew’s Roundabout. TfL data shows this area is very poor in terms of bus performance and rates very high on the vision zero agenda. Cabinet report – 10th October 2024 Part I – Public APPENDIX C: SAFER CYCLEWAYS DEVELOPMENT – PROPOSED 3 YEAR DELIVERY PLAN 2025/26 FINANCIAL YEAR Scheme Title Funding requested Scheme Details Justification ‘Brunel Cycle Route’ – link to Pield Heath Road. £75k Funds to allow completion of the proposed ‘Brunel Cycle route’ on Council owned land. A small section of land on the route down to Pield Heath Road, is land owned by the Green Spaces section of the Council. This link will follow the same design as the Brunel Link to ensure continuity on this section of the route. This allows for the well supported route to be completed in this section. A new tiger crossing has already been completed on Pield Heath Road to facilitate the route. This route is one of the main eight routes outlined in the Hillingdon Cycle Strategy. Celandine Route upgrades £125k Funds for the upgrade of key junctions on the celandine route, which could include but not be limited to cycle lanes, advanced cycle stop lines, measures to slow traffic, improved lighting and new cycle crossings. The Celandine Route is a key route running along the north and south of Hillingdon providing a mainly off road route for pedestrians and cyclist. The route also aligns with TfL’s Strategic Cycle Analysis. The improvement works will improve road safety for all using this route. This is also a key route identified in the Council’s Cycle Strategy. Long Lane – Cycle Lane £200k Funds for works to provided protected cycle provision on Long Lane, where possible. This could include but not be limited to: a segregated path, utilisation of slip roads and shared spaces. Long Lane is a key route through the borough and to a large number of local schools and services, so improving conditions for cycling could encourage people to switch from other modes particular personal car. The route is identified in the Hillingdon Cycle Strategy and has been highlighted as a potential route for improvement by a number of local residents. The works would complement proposals for bus improvements and improvements to road safety along this stretch. 2026/27 FINANCIAL YEAR Scheme Title Funding requested Scheme Details Justification Celandine Route upgrades £150k Funds for the upgrade of key junctions on the celandine route, which could include but not be limited to cycle lanes, advanced cycle stop lines, measures to slow traffic, improved lighting and new cycle crossings. The celandine route is a key route running along the north and south of Hillingdon providing a mainly off road route for pedestrians and cyclist. The route also aligns with TfL’s Strategic Cycle Analysis. The improvement works will improve road safety for all using this route. This is also a key route identified in the Council’s Cycle Strategy. Stanwell Moor Road – cycle provision £200k Funds to provide cycle provision on Stanwell Moor Road between Colnbrook By-pass and Bath Road, to connect into Heathrow Airport at terminal 5. Provision of junction improvements at the roundabout junction with Bath Road to protect cyclists and other vulnerable road users. Connection into improvement works to the junction with Colnbrook By-pass This route would provide improved active travel opportunities for people working at Heathrow Airport. The works would also tie in to and support works being done by Slough Borough Council to provide new cycle provision along the Colnbrook By-pass, which is potentially to be supported by works by TfL at the signalised junction. Brunel cycle route – link to Hillingdon Hospital £50k Funds to provide cycle provision through quiet residential streets between the new cycle link to be provided through Brunel University and Hillingdon Hospital which is due to go through major redevelopment. This proposed link route would allow people to safety access the new hospital by active travel to reduce the car demand on the local network and the car parks at the redeveloped hospital. It will also provide a good link to Uxbridge and West Drayton for future residents of the residential section of the hospital works. Cabinet report – 10th October 2024 Part I – Public 2027/28 FINANCIAL YEAR Scheme Title Funding requested Scheme Details Justification Celandine Route upgrades £200k Funds for the upgrade of parts of the footways on the celandine route, to improve surfaces, reduce pinch points and ensure sufficient width for all users to use the link in a safe manner. The celandine route is a key route running along the north and south of Hillingdon providing a mainly off road route for pedestrians and cyclist. The route also aligns with TfL’s Strategic Cycle Analysis. The improvement works will improve road safety for all using this route. This is also a key route identified in the Council’s Cycle Strategy. High Street, Harlington – cycle provision £150K Funds for the provision of cycle lanes and improved junctions for cycling (and walking) along High Street, Harlington between Bath Road and Hayes Town Centre. This would support a bid to National Highways by the authorities surrounding Heathrow to implement cycle improvement schemes to key commuter routes to/from Heathrow Airport. The route will connect into the provision in Hayes Town Centre and beyond into Yeading to create a significant stretch of cycle route to support active travel to and from Heathrow Airport. Pump Lane – cycle provision £50k Funds to act as a contribution towards the provision of cycle improvements along Pump Lane, Hayes. This would support S106 developer funding which has been secured to provide cycle provision along Pump Lane, connecting into Hayes Town Centre. It will also support connections by bike to Hayes and beyond from the large residential led development known as the ‘Green Quarter’ at the former gas works site in Southall which is located at one end of Pump Lane. Cabinet report – 10th October 2024 Part I – Public APPENDIX D: CYCLE PARKING – PROPOSED 3 YEAR DELIVERY PLAN 2025/26 FINANCIAL YEAR Scheme Title Funding requested Scheme Details Justification LUL Station Cycle Parking – Northwood £7k Funds to upgrade, expand and protect cycle parking in the vicinity of Northwood London Underground station. Northwood Station has always been one where cycle parking provision is requested by local residents. LUL Station Cycle Parking – Northwood Hills £3k Funds to upgrade, expand and protect cycle parking in the vicinity of Northwood Hills London Underground station. This will allow work to the cycle parking to compliment proposed improvements to cycle links into Northwood Hills town centre area. School Parking £15k Funds to install safe and shelter cycle and scooter parking at schools across Hillingdon. This will allow schools to have provision for encouraging people to scoot and cycle to school. Yiewsley & West Drayton Town Centre £5k Funds to upgrade, expand and protect cycle parking in the Yiewsley & West Drayton Town Centres. The town centres are either side of the newly upgrade Elizabeth Line station with improved cycle parking encourage linked trips & use of local services. Both centres are within 400m of the TfL strategic cycling analysis. 2026/27 FINANCIAL YEAR Scheme Title Funding requested Scheme Details Justification LUL Station Cycle Parking – Ruislip & West Ruislip £10k Funds to upgrade, expand and protect cycle parking in the vicinity of both West Ruislip and Ruislip London Underground station. Both of the stations are within close proximity to the TfL Strategic Cycle Analysis and close to areas where cycle Infrastructure upgrades are proposed within the Council’s Cycle Strategy. School Parking £15k Funds to install safe and shelter cycle and scooter parking at schools across Hillingdon. This will allow schools to have provision for encouraging people to scoot and cycle to school. Ruislip Gardens – local shopping parade £5k Funds to upgrade, expand and protect cycle parking at the Ruislip Gardens local shopping parade. The local shopping parade is close to Ruislip Gardens station and Ruislip High School, improved cycle parking will encourage linked trips & use of local services. This local shopping parade is within 400m of the TfL strategic cycling analysis. 2027/28 FINANCIAL YEAR Scheme Title Funding requested Scheme Details Justification LUL Station Cycle Parking – Uxbridge £10k Funds to upgrade, expand and protect cycle parking in the vicinity of Uxbridge London Underground station. The station is close to the Strategic Cycle Network and has been an ongoing programme to try and keep up with cycle parking demand in the town centre. This would also support aspirations set out in the recently completed Uxbridge Masterplan document. School Parking £15k Funds to install safe and shelter cycle and scooter parking at schools across Hillingdon. This will allow schools to have provision for encouraging people to scoot and cycle to school. High Street, Harlington – local shopping parade £5k Funds to upgrade, expand and protect cycle parking at the local shopping parades along High Street, Harlington. This local shopping parade is within 400m of the TfL strategic cycling analysis and is current subject to a bid to National Highways to allow cycle improvements to be taken forward. The implementation of cycle parking will allow for people to consider stopping to use the local services as they cycle along the route. Cabinet report – 10th October 2024 Part I – Public APPENDIX E: BOROUGH SAFER JUNCTIONS – PROPOSED 3 YEAR BID 2025/26 FINANCIAL YEAR Scheme Title Funding requested Scheme Details Justification North Hyde Road / Station Road, Hayes £500k Funds to consider and model changes to the operation of the junction of North Hyde Road / Station Road to improve road safety and movement for active travel modes and buses. It is proposed that the design and modelling could look to the possibility of have ASL on all arms of the junction, having the right turn out of North Hyde Gardens for buses only or removing the right turn out of Dawley Road to reduce conflicts in the centre of the junction. The junction is identified as a top priority for vision zero improvements and collision harm based on TfL data, so reviewing the operation of the junction and making improvements will look to improve safety and reduce the collisions at the junction. This is also a busy junction for bus movements and measures to prioritise buses will improve journey times and allow buses to better serve Hayes & Harlington station. 2026/27 FINANCIAL YEAR Scheme Title Funding requested Scheme Details Justification Uxbridge Road / Lees Road £500k Funds to improve safety and pedestrian movements at the junction of Uxbridge Road with Lees Road. It is proposed to review operation of the junction with a view of providing better and segregated provision for cyclists and pedestrians. Other works which could also been considered at the junction, include but are not limited to: working with TfL to ensure the best signal timings, review issues coming out of the service road; providing antiskid on all of the approaches; upgrading the guard railing provision and installing ASL on all arms. The junction has been identified as having a very high vision zero need and high Collison harm risk. It is also the site a high collision risk link. The works would also compliment other proposals being considered along the Uxbridge Road. Lees Road is also a key link from this area of Hillingdon to Hillingdon Hospital. 2027/28 FINANCIAL YEAR Scheme Title Funding requested Scheme Details Justification St Andrew’s Roundabout & High Street, Uxbridge £1m Funds to support proposed changes to St Andrew’s roundabout to reduce traffic and provide better provision for those walking and cycling, especially between St Andrew’s development and the town centre. Currently, consultants are looking at options for improvements which in particular aims to remove the unsafe subways under the roundabout and reduce traffic, particular on the link outside of the Civic Centre. The roundabout is identified as having very high collision risk. There is S106 available to expand the scheme further and make more comprehensive improvements to the area. The works will complement the other proposed works in and around Uxbridge Town Centre.

Text extracted automatically from the PDF, so layout, tables and images are not shown. Only the start of this long document is shown here. Open the original PDF on LB Hillingdon’s website.

Relevant Select Committee
Expiry date for any scrutiny call-in / date decision can be implemented (if no call-in)
Officer(s) to action
Directorate
Classification
11. POLICY FRAMEWORK: Youth Justice Plan 2024-2029 PDF 447 KB
RESOLVED: That Cabinet: Considers the findings and overall positive response from the consultation which has informed the final proposed Hillingdon Youth Justice Service Strategy 2024-2029. Recommends to the Full Council the adoption of the five-year strategy, as a policy framework document. Reasons for decision Following consultation, Cabinet agreed to recommend the Youth Justice Service Strategy to full Council for adoption. The Cabinet Member for Children, Families & Education noted the statutory duty of local authorities to submit a youth justice plan [strategy] and explained that Hillingdon’s strategy aimed to establish clear priorities for youth justice, assist in the development and performance management of work streams and provide a framework for collaboration with partner organisations. The Cabinet Member reviewed the outcomes of the public consultation, which Cabinet considered, along with feedback from the Select Committee. On the service itself, the Cabinet Member noted that whilst there were no immediate financial pressures, there were potential risks such as increased demand for services, high remand accommodation costs, and possible funding reductions need to be monitored. Alternative options considered and rejected None. Relevant Select Committee Children, Families & Education Expiry date for any scrutiny call-in / date decision can be implemented (if no call-in) Not for call-in and decision comes into immediate effect. This is because the Plan is a policy framework document and will now be referred to the Full Council for decision. Officer(s) to action Nuzhat Ilyas Directorate Children’s Services Classification Public - The report and any background papers relating to this decision by the Cabinet are available to view on the Council's website or by visiting the Civic Centre, Uxbridge.
📄 POLICY FRAMEWORK: Youth Justice Plan 2024-2029 PDF 447 KB
Read the text of this document (8 pages)
Cabinet Report – 10 October 2024 (Part 1 Public) YOUTH JUSTICE PLAN 2024-2029 Cabinet Member & Portfolio Councillor Susan O’Brien Cabinet Member for Children, Families & Education Responsible Officer Corporate Director of Children’s Services Report Author & Directorate Nuzhat Ilyas – Youth Justice Service and AXIS Children’s Services Directorate Papers with report Appendix A - Hillingdon Youth Justice Strategy consultation responses Appendix B - Hillingdon Youth Justice Service Draft Strategy 2024- 2029 HEADLINES Summary The Hillingdon Youth Justice Service Strategy 2024-2029 seeks to set out a clear vision and priorities for how youth justice services are delivered in the next five years. At the Cabinet meeting in June 2024, it was agreed to commence a public consultation on the proposed Youth Justice Strategy. The consultation took place from 1 July 2024 to 11 August 2024, including feedback from the Select Committee on 17 July 2024. This report to Cabinet presents the findings of the consultation. Cabinet is asked to note and consider the consultation responses, the recommended changes and recommend the adoption of the Youth Justice Strategy. Putting our Residents First Delivering on the Council Strategy 2022-2026 This report supports our ambition for residents / the Council of: Live active and healthy lives This report supports our commitments to residents of: Thriving, Healthy Households, Safe and Strong Communities Financial Cost This strategy will come at no additional cost to the Council and is delivered within existing youth justice resources. Relevant Select Committee Children, Families and Education Select Committee Relevant Ward(s) N/A Cabinet Report – 10 October 2024 (Part 1 Public) RECOMMENDATIONS That Cabinet: 1. Considers the findings and overall positive response from the consultation which has informed the final proposed Hillingdon Youth Justice Service Strategy 2024 - 2029. 2. Recommends to the Full Council the adoption of the five-year strategy, as a policy framework document. Reasons for recommendation The Youth Justice Service Strategy sets out a clear vision and priorities for how youth justice services are delivered in the next f ive years and forms a key element of the policy framework. During consultation process, residents and partners have had the opportunity to consider and comment on the priorities for service delivery which are outlined in Appendix A. Alternative options considered / risk management Without a Strategy, the Council would not be able to make clear its priorities in relation to youth justice and assist in the development and performance management of work streams and provide a framework for our work with partner organisations. An alternative would be to have youth justice plans signed by Cabinet annually, however, this would not be conducive for the efficiency of the democratic process. Democratic compliance / previous authority Along with the recent guidance from the Youth Justice Board, Democratic Services note that the Youth Justice Plan is one of the Council’s policy framework documents as set out in Chapter 4 of the Council’s Constitution. Consideration of this Plan has therefore been undertaken in accordance with the Budget and Policy Framework Procedure Rules and these require the Cabinet to set out a timetable for the Strategy’s adoption, to include a minimum 6 -week consultation period , consideration by the relevant select committee , and therefore , also not subject to scrutiny call-in. The following timetable has been followed: Draft strategy to Cabinet 27 June 2024 (not subject to call-in) Consultation (six weeks) Commence from 1 July 2024 Children, Families & Education Select Committee consultation 17 July 2024 Cabinet final draft 10 October 2024 (not subject to call-in) Full Council adoption 28 November 2024 Select Committee comments The Children, Families & Education Select Committee considered the draft Strategy at its meeting on 17 July and has made the following comments: Cabinet Report – 10 October 2024 (Part 1 Public) “Placing the child at the heart of the Youth Justice Strategy and having a strong focus on early help and prevention is a real strength of this strategy. The voice of the child is not only crucial in enabling young people to feel empowered, but also in shaping and developing long-term positive outcomes for them. It is important that this strategy is regularly monitored to ensure that the Council continues to deliver positive change for our young people and their families.” SUPPORTING INFORMATION 1. Local authorities have a statutory duty to submit an annual youth justice plan relating to their provision of youth justice services as per Section 40 of the Crime and Disorder Act 1998, which stipulates that it is the duty of each local authority, after consultation with the partner agencies, to formulate and implement an annual youth justice plan. The plan sets out how youth justice services in their area are to be provided and funded, how they will operate, and what functions will be carried out. 2. Following updated guidance from the Youth Justice Board (YJB) in 2023, all youth justice plans must be signed off by the full council in accordance with Regulation 4 of the Local Authorities (Functions and Responsibilities) (England) Regulations 2000. To align with other council strategies, we propose the completion of a 5 -year plan with annual updates to the Select Committee and Cabinet Member for Children, Families and Education. 3. The Youth Justice Service Strategy builds on the success of the Youth Justice Service and sets a clear vision of how services are delivered to our residents, and key priorities over the next five years to continue to be responsive and meet changing demands and requirements. 4. The vision for the Youth Justice Service is: “We are committed to taking a child first approach to understanding the challenges faced by children and families including social deprivation, discrimination, trauma, unmet health needs, and will actively empower children and families to improve outcomes by providing opportunities for every child to succeed. We take a “justice for all” approach by supporting victims, protecting the public and engaging our communities to divert children from entering the criminal justice system.” 5. Hillingdon Council is committed to putting residents first and reflects this commitment across the council’s plans and services. Our youth justice priorities are directly aligned with this commitment, which are set out in further detail within the strategy. The five priorities are: 1. Prevention and Early Intervention - Addressing the root causes of offending behaviour and intervene at the earliest possible stage to prevent escalation and reduce the risk of future harm, ensuring the safety and security of our communities. 2. Over-representation and disproportionality – Addressing disproportionality in youth justice is crucial for ensuring fairness, equity, and justice within our Cabinet Report – 10 October 2024 (Part 1 Public) society to reduce the barriers that prevent children from accessing support, thereby promoting trust in the system. 3. Child-centred practice - Recognising children as active participants in their own lives and advocates for their rights, well -being, and development, creating nurturing environments where every child can thrive. 4. Reducing re -offending - Providing rehabilitation, support, and positive development opportunities, we can break the cycle of offending and promote the reintegration of children into society. 5. Victims and restorative justice - Giving victims a voice and a n active role in the justice process, empowering them and helping them to regain a sense of control over their lives, providing them with an opportunity to heal and recover from the harm they have experienced. 6. The strategy is attached at Appendix B. Following consultation, it is recommended Cabinet approve the new Youth Offer which is informed by the resident consultation, as set out in Appendix A. Financial Implications The Youth Justice Service currently employs 20 Staff (18.75 FTE) and spends £1 .770m per annum which is funded by a combination of:  General Fund – 1.055m (60%)  YJ Board - £0.553m (31%)  Health - £0.161m (9%) The service had a small underspend of £0. 128m in the Outturn for 2023/24 primarily on staff, accommodation and shortfall on grant which has been addressed in this financial year. The chart below highlights the breakdown of investment and funding. As highlighted in the Strategy paper the service is ve ry successfully managing demand despite the challenges post COVID and the current Cost of Living and financial instability. Cabinet Report – 10 October 2024 (Part 1 Public) There is a duty to provide the service , and it is clear in the current climate that the demands on the service will inten sify over the next 5 years of the Strategy. While, at this stage there is no additional risk of financial pressure, there are a few potential risks going forward which the service will need to monitor including:  Increase in Youth Offending particularly during the ongoing financial instability  Potential pressure on remand accommodation costs  Any reduction in funding, particularly grant funding which could critically undermine the effectiveness of the service and result in growth in offending and unintended rise in greater / more acute costs. While these risks will be closely monitored, the performance of the service over recent years including robust and effective management of its budget, provides a lot of assurance that the Strategy can be delivered effectively within the current budget. Cabinet Report – 10 October 2024 (Part 1 Public) RESIDENT BENEFIT & CONSULTATION The benefit or impact upon Hillingdon residents, service users and communities? The Youth Justice Service Strategy sets out identifies key challenges and sets out priorities for the coming five years and has a direct bearing on the Council’s vison of ‘putting residents first.’ The Council will need to ensure that any policies or decisions in relation to youth justice take account of requirements under equalities and human rights legislation, including ensuring that policies and decisions do not discriminate against those with protected characteristics, and complying with the public sector equality duty. Consultation carried out or required. Following approval at the June 2024 Cabinet meeting, a public consultation was undertaken with the wider strategic partnership that contribute to the prevention of offending behaviour, as well as residents, including those who access youth justice services in Hillingdon to seek views on the proposed five-year youth justice strategy to inform the final strategy to be presented to Cabinet. Due to democratic process timeline and adherence to the YJB grant conditions the consultation was conducted during a prescribed period. The consultation involved a structured survey available to all residents which was available continuously for the period 1 July 2024 to 11 August 2024 inclusive. The consultation was publicly available and actively promoted through a wide range of communication channels during the consultation period, including; Website The on -line survey was publicly available on the Council website for the duration of the consultation period Have your say on Hillingdon Council's youth justice plans - Hillingdon Council. This included publication of a child friendly Youth Justice Service Strategy to maximise consultation engagement from Hillingdon children. Press Release The press release was published on 1 July - Residents encouraged to have say on draft youth justice strategy Social Media Social media was actively used to promote social media posts as per the link below which was shared five times across Twitter and Facebook, 2, 8, 15, 22, and 29 July 2024. This linked back to the above press release. https://twitter.com/Hillingdon/status/1817877891352330672 Hillingdon People The strategy was also publicised to residents in the July/August edition of Hillingdon People which was delivered to residents between 8 July and 19 July 2024, and available online. Cabinet Report – 10 October 2024 (Part 1 Public) Schools The strategy was shared with all Headteachers, Governing Board and Education internals in the Education Weekly Update on 16 July 2024 to encourage staff and pupils to c omplete the survey and was also uploaded onto the LEAP website. Proactive Promotion to Strategic Partnership and children accessing youth justice services. The survey was pro -actively promoted to all strategic partners organisations and children and families, inviting comments. This included focus groups held with children and families. Internal Staff The strategy was publicised to staff via the Intranet, and through the all-staff email. Select Committees A presentation and discussion on the draft strategy at the Children Families and Education Select Committee on 17 July 2024 to invite comments. Consultation key findings There were 104 survey responses , 19 of which were completed by children open to the youth justice service. There were also 4 focus groups held with a total of 18 children open to youth justice service, as well as the Children’s Participation team. The five priorities outlined in the strategy have been overwhelmingly supported by the community. This strong endorsement reflects a shared vision for our future and a collective commitment to these key areas. Valuable feedback from surveys and focus groups, particularly those involving children highlighted a need for more detailed data regarding disproportionality. Addressing this issue is crucial to ensuring fairness and equity in service planning and delivery therefore this has bee n amended within the strategy itself, particularly to include how the youth justice service will address the over-representation of looked after children and children with speech and language needs. Appendix A sets out the consultation findings in more detail. Cabinet Report – 10 October 2024 (Part 1 Public) CORPORATE CONSIDERATIONS Corporate Finance Corporate Finance have reviewed this report and concur with the Financial Implications set out above, noting there are no additional risks of financial pressures associated with the recommendation contained in this report, the Strategy can be delivered effectively within the current approved 2024/25 budget . The below table shows the service has been delivered over the last two financial years with favourable variances at Outturn, with this current financial year it is forecasted to deliver the service with a favourable variance of £57k. Financial Year Budget Actuals / Forecast Variance 2022-23 889,100 760,604 -128,496 2023-24 941,900 869,531 -72,369 2024-25 829,000 771,971 -57,029 Furthermore, it is noted the future potential risks highlighted in the financial implications will be monitored as part of regular monthly budget monitoring process and reviewed as part of the wider MTFF budget setting process. Legal The local authority must, in consultation with the relevant persons, formulate and implement for each year a Youth Justice Plan setting out how youth justice services in their area are to be provided and funded; and how the youth offending teams are to be composed and funded, how they are to operate, and what func tions they are to carry out. The Youth Justice Plan must be submitted by the local authority to the Youth Justice Board for England and Wales. The formulation and preparation of the Youth Justice Plan is a function which may not be taken solely by the local authority’s executive. Youth Justice Plans must be formulated having regard to Youth justice plans: guidance for youth justice services. The guidance provides that local authorities may if they choose, produce a plan over multiple years; in this case an annual update will be required, covering progress against priorities, a summary of performance, any changes in demographics and legislation, and any additional reporting requirements. There are no legal impediments to the recommendation set out at the beginning of report. BACKGROUND PAPERS 1. Hillingdon Family Hub Strategy 2023-2025 2. Youth_Justice_Board_for_England_and_Wales_Strategic_Plan_2024-27.odt (live.com) 3. Reducing criminalisation of looked-after children and care leavers | London City Hall 4. Code of Practice for Victims of Crime in England and Wales (Victims' Code) - GOV.UK (www.gov.uk) 5. Youth justice plans: guidance for youth justice services - GOV.UK (www.gov.uk)

Text extracted automatically from the PDF, so layout, tables and images are not shown. Open the original PDF on LB Hillingdon’s website.

📄 Consultation Responses , item 11. PDF 446 KB
Read the text of this document (8 pages)
1 Youth Justice Strategy Consultation – 2024-2029 104 Responses 05:32 Average time to complete 1. Please tick the box that best describes you: 2. Do you understand the strategy and five priorities outlined? 3. If you have answered no or partly to question 2, Please tell us why below. Latest responses: “I kinda understand” “I don’t really get it. But it’s about helping us I suppose” “It’s too much to take in and fully understand” 19 2 34 18 31 2 4. Priority 1 ‘Prevention and Early Intervention’ aims to address the root causes of offending behaviour and provide the right help at the earliest possible stage to prevent escalation and reduce the risk of future harm. Hillingdon Youth Justice Service will continue to work closely with colleagues across the par tnership to identify children most at risk. Do you agree with this priority? 5. Priority 2 "Over-representation and dis proportionality" is about making sure everyone is treated fairly, regardless of their background. This means looking at how some groups, especially those from Black, Asian, and other global majority backgrounds, are more likely to be involved in the youth justice system than others. It's important to understand and fix these imbalances to ensure that every child is treated equally. By addressing these issues, we can remove barriers that prevent some children from getting the help they need and build trust in the system. Do you agree with this priority? 6. Priority 3 ‘Child -centred practice’ focuses on the overall needs of children and their families to promote their health, well-being, and growth. By putting children at the centre, we aim to create healthy, supportive households where every child can reach their full potential. This approach treats children as active participants in their own lives, ensuring their rights and well -being are prioritised, and creating caring environments where they can thrive. Hillingdon Youth Justice Service commits to listen and involve children in decisions that affect their lives. This helps us provide the right support to children and families. Do you agree with this priority? 3 7. Priority 4 ‘Reducing Re-offending’ aims to provide support and positive opportunities to break the cycle of offending. Hillingdon Youth Justice Service puts children's best interests first and focuses on understanding their backgrounds and using caring, trauma- informed practices to help prevent them from offending or re -offending. By providing rehabilitation, support, and positive opportunities, we can help children break the cycle of offending and successfully reintegrate into society. Do you agree with this priority? 8. Priority 5 ‘Victims and restorative justice’ focuses on the needs of victims of crime, providing them with an opportunity to heal and recover from the harm they have experienced. It gives victims a voice and an active role in the justice process, empowering them and helping them to regain a sense of control over their lives. Restorative justice holds children accountable for their actions in a meaningful way, promoting a deeper understanding of the impact of their behaviour. Do you agree with this priority? 9. Please rate the priorities in order of importance. Use the ⬆⬇ arrows on your right to move the priorities about. 4 10. We value open communication with children, young people, and families about how services are provided within the youth justice system. Please share your thoughts on how we can improve this communication. Latest responses: “Hold a consultation in person with children from the community so they can take ownership of outputs of this work and engage with it. ” “I've had good communication with everyone here and not come across anything that needs improvement at the minute” “I work as a teacher and youth coach and my experience of communicating with young people is to be upfront, honest and transparent with them. They know when people are paying them lip service, and they really value being genuinely seen and heard, and seeing action being taken based on their thoughts and feelings.” “Social media, meeting children and families out in the community” 11. What is the best way to engage with you as a child and family member? 5 12. Are there any additional comments you would like to make regarding the priorities or the overall strategy? Latest responses: “It’s important that school staff are trained in implementing these strategies - this should come from children’s directory. I find that quite often the child’s life is adversely impacted by their interaction with school staff which may result in them encountering with the justice system. Also keeping the child at the heart of everything should be the first priority as this would naturally lead to early intervention as their wellbeing and family’s wellbeing is prioritised” “My child has been supported by the YJS team, I feel that there should be more opportunities for feedback and involvement e.g. discussions on the work the whole team is doing around the 5 priorities” “Great priorities that all link” “I think the priorities are solid, I think the children's version the intro should be updated so there is more context about what the YJS does and therefore who it aimed at. Also the what you are doing (actions) and how you know that you've been successful (outcomes) being separated” 13. Are you? 6 14. Which age range do you belong to? 15. To help us understand your experience based on where you live, please tell us your postcode. 7 16. Which of the following best describes your sexual orientation? 17. Which group best describes your ethnicity? 18. Do you have a disability? A physical or mental illness or condition that has a substantial and long-term effect on your ability to carry out normal day to day activities. 19. Do you have any special educational needs? 8 20. If you have and wish to share, please provide details below. 4 respondents (67%) answered ADHD for this question 21. The council continuously looks for ways to work in partnership with residents to improve services. Would you like to get involved in helping the council improve its Youth Justice Service provision?

Text extracted automatically from the PDF, so layout, tables and images are not shown. Open the original PDF on LB Hillingdon’s website.

📄 Hillingdon Youth Justice Service Strategy 2024-2029 , item 11. PDF 587 KB
Read the text of this document (28 pages)
1 Draft Hillingdon Youth Justice Service 5-year Strategy Contents Page 1 Introduction and context 3 2 Governance, Leadership and Partnerships 5 3 Performance data overview: 2019-2024 7 4 Priority 1: Prevention and Early Intervention 11 5 Priority 2: Over-representation and Disproportionality 14 6 Priority 3: Child-Centred Practice 19 7 Priority 4: Re-offending 22 8 Priority 5: Victims and Restorative Justice 25 9 Conclusion 28 2 Foreword As we embark on this journey of shaping the future of youth justice services in Hillingdon over the next five years, it is with great enthusiasm and dedication that I present this strategy document. Our mission is clear: to create a safer, fairer, and more inclusive society for all children, where their rights, needs, and potential are recogni sed and respected. Over the years, our understanding of youth justice has evolved, driven by research, evidence, and the voices of children themselves. We have learned that effective youth justice services require a holistic, multi -disciplinary approach that addresses the underlying causes of offending behaviour and promotes positive development and rehabilitation through a Child First approach. This strategy builds upon our achievements and experiences, while also charting a course for innovation, collaboration, and continuous improvement. It reflects our commitment to embracing diversity, equity, and inclusion in all aspects of our work, ensuring that every child has access to the support and opportunities they need to thrive. Central to our strategy is the principle of early intervention and prevention, recognis ing that addressing issues at the earliest possible stage can prevent escalation and reduce the risk of future harm. We will work closely with partners across sectors to identify and respond to the needs of children and their families and carers, providing tailored support and interventions that address the root causes of offending and children’s safety and wellbeing. Equally important is our commitment to restorative justice principles, which prioriti se accountability, healing, and the repair of harm. We continue to involve children, victims, and communities in the resolution of conflicts and the restoration of relationships, promoting understanding, empathy, and reconciliation. As we embark on this journey, we do so with humility and a recognition of the challenges that lie ahead as we continue to deliver services post the Covid -19 pandemic. We know that transforming youth justice services requires courage, perseverance, and a willingness to challenge the status quo. But we also know that the rewards are great – safer communities, brighter futures, and a more just society for all. I would like to express my gratitude to all those who have contributed to the development of this strategy – our dedicated staff, partner agencies, children, families, and communities. Your insights, expertise, and commitment have been invaluable, and I am confident that together, we can achieve our shared vision of a youth justice system that works for everyone. Together, let us build a future where every child has the opportunity to fulfil their potential, where second chances are not just offered but embraced, and where justice is not just served but served with compassion, dignity, and fairness. [signed] Councillor Susan O’Brien, Cabinet Member for Children, Families & Education 3 Introduction Hillingdon council has a duty under S.38 of the Crime and Disorder Act 1998 to provide youth justice services to children 10-18 years of age. The principle aim of the Youth Justice Service is to prevent offending by children, through early intervention, prevention, intervention, and rehabilitation. The draft Hillingdon Youth Justice Service (HYJS) strategy sets out its approach to work with children and families accessing youth justice services through early help and prevention and statutory intervention. This 5-year strategy will be developed in consultation with children, parents/carers and colleagues across the partnership and communities reflecting on and reviewing its performance over the last 5 years and considering a range of local and national drivers informing our youth justice work in Hillingdon. “We are committed to taking a child first approach to understanding the challenges faced by children and families including social deprivation, discrimination, trauma, unmet health needs, and will actively empower children and families to improve outcomes by providing opportunities for every child to succeed. We take a “justice for all” approach by supporting victims, protecting the public and engaging our communities to divert children from entering the criminal justice system.” The Youth Justice Board (YJB) Strategic Plan 2024 -2027 states that “the YJB’s vision is for a youth justice system that treats children as children” and sets out its requirements for a Child First approach: • Prioritising the best interests of children and recognising their needs and potential. • Promoting children’s individual strengths and their capacities to develop pro -social identities. • Encouraging children’s active participation, engagement, and wider social inclusion. • Promoting a childhood removed from the justice system. Across the youth justice partnership in Hillingdon the use of the word “child” has been widely adopted when discussing children who encounter the criminal justice system. Previous language such as young people or adolescents diluted the focus that those who come into contact with the youth justice system are children and should be supported as such. The work of HYJS and the partnership seeks to support engagement with children in multiple spheres from diversion through the delivery of school- based programme s s u c h a s Y o u r L i f e Y o u Choose, early intervention through active use of Triage interventions and in statutory interventions. Taking a locality, placed based approach by delivering services and interventions to children within their context. Wider work across the local authority, with the development of locality-based family hubs and spoke buildings provides well -resourced and safe places to meet children within the community. Children told us that they are more likely to engage with interventions in familiar surroundings and co ordinating locality delivery supports engagement with wider services. The model works on supporting children to access the right services, at the right time in the right place. Our plan continues to be set within the context of ongoing public service reform, associated organisational change, financial restraints and responding to the challenges which continue post the Covid 19 pandemic. These circumstances present additional challenges to 4 organisations as they seek to deliver their core business whilst also contributing to strategic partnerships. However, the partnership approach to developing and implementing this Youth Justice Plan has been informed by a commitment not only to maintain ou r investment in the youth justice agenda but to enhance it through continued effective collaboration. Our Priorities Hillingdon Council is committed to putting residents first and reflects this commitment across the council’s plans and services. Our youth justice priorities are directly aligned with th is commitment, which will be set out in further detail in this document. The five priorities are: 1. Prevention and Early Intervention 2. Over-representation and disproportionality 3. Child-centred practice 4. Reducing re-offending 5. Victims and restorative justice Context Hillingdon is the second largest London borough, covering an area of 42 square miles over half of which is a mosaic of countryside including canals, rivers, parks and woodland, interspersed with historic towns and villages. It shares borders with Hertfordshire, Buckinghamshire, Surrey, Hounslow, Ealing, and Harrow. Hillingdon is home to Heathrow airport , which is one of the main local employers, but also a significant entry point for children and young people being trafficked into the country. - Hillingdon has a higher proportion of 0 –19-year-olds than the London average with 26% and this proportion is expected to grow. - There are approximately 120,700 children aged 0 -17 residing in the borough which make up 39.69 % of population. - 30,965 (25.65%) of these children are aged 10-17 - According to data from the End Child Poverty Coalition, which combines data from the HM Revenue & Customs (HMRC) and the Office for National Statistics (ONS), there are approximately 25,347 children in Hillingdon living in poverty , which is approximately 21%. - At the 31 st March 2024 there were approximately 329 children looked after to Hillingdon. - 35% of all residents that are from a black and global majority background. Hillingdon is an ethnically diverse borough with most black and global majority communities residing in the south of the borough. - 62% of Hillingdon children aged 10-17 are from a black and global majority background (2021 Census) - Our residents (aged 3+) speak at least 85 different languages - this is similar to most other London boroughs and other large cities in England & Wales. 5 - The 2021 Census tells us that 77.9% of our residents (aged 3+) have English as their main language, followed by Punjabi (4.6%), Romanian (1.8%), Polish (1.7%) and Tamil (1.6%). - In 2023-2024 3,503 children had an active Education Healthcare plan. This number has steadily increased at an average rate of approximately 11.6% over the last five years. The YJS is located within the Children, Families and Education Directorate and as such the Assistant Director of Prevention and Youth Justice is part of the senior management team in Children's Services. The effectiveness of the YJS collaborative work has been recognised in both our ILACS and SEND inspection outcomes. We have aligned the YJS with our Youth Offer and Early Help under one Assistant Director which supports our holistic planning for vulnerable adolescents. The full staffing structure and budget costs and contributions will be included within annual youth justice plans. Governance, Leadership and partnerships HYJS is funded centrally and through the grant contributions from the Youth Justice Board and statutory partner agencies, in accordance with the Crime and Disorder Act 1998. All funds are used to deliver Youth Justice Services in Hillingdon. The work of our HYJS is located within the broader context of our Safer Hillingdon Partnership (SHP) and the Safeguarding Children's Partnership Board (SCPB). Both boards have operational and strategic representation from all partner agencies. HYJS is represented at the SHP and SCPB by the Corporate Director for Children , Families and Education . In achieving our ambitions and vision for our children, we continue to receive full political and corporate support and a level of financial investment which ensures that each year’s budget setting considers both the needs of the service and the contingencies based on demographic growth and increasing levels of complexity. Our elected member for Children, Families and Education and the Chief Executive have an active interest and understanding of the youth justice agenda. They scrutinise children’s services performance and practice updates in quarterly meetings with the Senior Management Team. Complex and high-risk issues have oversight at this level to ensure political, financial and strategic investment to keep children safe. Safer Hillingdon Partnership Board Youth Justice Partnership Board (YJSPB) Children Safeguarding board Executive Leadership Group (ELG) 6 The YJSPB is co-chaired by the Corporate Director for Children, Families and Education and the Detective Chief Inspector for the West Area Borough Command Unit which demonstrates committed leadership. The YJSPB includes representatives from all of the key partner agencies and operates in line with the YJB Governance and Leadership guidance. The Corporate Director for Children, Families and Education is a member of every senior governance board in the borough and can exert influence and leverage support and resources to further the work of the YJSPB. Similarly, there is a direct understanding of other policy and strategy landscapes to inform the YJSPB plan and to inform others’ strategies and plans to be observant of YJS concerns. These include all Council Political meetings, health governance which covers the borough, new ICB, all London DSC Group, West London DCS steering groups, West London Commissioning Allianc e whilst maintaining instantaneous direct access to the most senior leadership across the borough and region. From His Majesty’s Inspectorate of Probation (HMIP) inspection in 2021, it was noted by the inspectorate panel that we have a strong management board attendance, this has continued since with an average of 73% of senior partners attending. N e w B o a r d m e m b e r s h a v e a n induction to understand the role of the service and explore the expectations and contributions they will be making to the service. Our governance and leadership arrangements are maturing and whilst we believe we have a clear local vision and strategy for the delivery of a high-quality, personalised, and responsive service for all children, we recognise the need to ensure that vision is promoted and understood by all stakeholders. Our partnership relationships are strong at both strategic and operational levels. Local resourcing levels have been retained despite significant financial challenges for all the partners and the partn ership arrangements actively support effective service delivery. Our Board members are active, own the youth justice agenda and recognise the contributions their own agency makes to the it. For example, the ICB rep on the Board initiated a review of the health need of the YJS cohort which resulted in the commissioning of dedicated SALT provision; whilst the Community Safety rep has advocated YJS work and secured MOPAC funding to support early identification and intervention of young people at risk of exploitation. HMIP inspect youth justice services across England and Wales and form part of HYJS’ governance arrangements . This is completed through independent inspection, thematic inspections and reports, recommendations, research and effective practice guidance. The Youth Justice Board (YJB) for England and Wales is responsible for monitoring and measuring our performance through the submission of national KPIs . The YJB undertakes oversight activity to meet its statutory duty to monitor the operation of the youth justice system. This function is undertaken in line with its independence from national and local government and all named statutory partners. The oversight process follows an ongoing cycle of: • monitoring YJS performance against the oversight fields outlined and assigning services to performance quadrants. • identifying the scale and nature of support needs and/or areas of effective performance and evidence-based practice • co-ordinating improvement (and where necessary formal intervention). 7 Performance data 2019-2024 Together with its partners Hillingdon YJS continues to realign resources to meet service demand and the requirements of the wider public sector reform agenda, which supports transformation of essential services in an evidenced based way to promote best practice. The YJS informs and supports the Children ’s’ “High Fives”; Contextual Safeguarding, Neglect, where our children live, Targeted Help, Our people. These 5 key strands of operational and strategic activity drive improved outcomes for children in Hillingdon. The Youth Justice Board (YJB) is responsible for monitoring a number of key performance indicators and each local authority and youth justice partnership must submit quarterly data against each. It is a condition of the Y JB Grant that it is used to achieve a positive reduction across all performance indicators with data being publ ished by the Ministry of Justice on a quarterly basis. The following three performance indicators have been embedded within services and so data has been captured over the years, so we have been able to measure our performance over a longer period. 1. Reduction in First Time Entrants (FTE): children entering the criminal justice system for the first time receiving a disposal at court or a caution. 2. Reduction in Re-offending: monitoring of children who receive a substantiative outcome (not Triage) for a period of 12 months for any further offending and associated frequency. 3. Reduction in the use of custody : reduce the number of children who receive a custodial sentence. Our HYJS and the partner agencies and professionals, who work with them, have an impressive track record of contributing to the realisation of our vision through effective preventative work, as well as out-of-court and post-court case work. Our performance against the first-time entrants’ national performance indicator is consistently strong with the rate below both national and London averages. A focus on early intervention and prevention services across the partnership has contributed to this, including a n effective working relationship between the police and the HYJS with regards to decision making and the delivery of robust assessments and interventions. Our custody rates have shown a gradual reduction over recent years but with complex cohorts of childr en and a national rise in knife crime this remains an area of priority focus. Performance with respect to re-offending should be considered within the context of a much smaller cohort, due to our success at reducing FTEs, containing individuals that often have more complex needs, higher levels of vulnerability and pose a greater risk to others. These young people have a range of challenges and unmet needs, which take longer to address and effect permanent changes in lifestyles and outcomes. As with the national picture we have an over -representation of Black and mixed raced boys in custody which is a priority of activity in this Youth Justice Strategy. 8 Since April 2023 it has been a requirement of youth justice services to report on the following new key performance indicators, with the first nationally published data expected in Spring 2025. 1. Suitable Accommodation 2. Education, training, and employment 3. Special educational needs and disabilities 4. Mental health care and emotional wellbeing 5. Substance misuse 6. Out of court disposals 7. Links to wider services 8. Management board attendance 9. Serious violence 10. Victims Youth justice services have access to the youth justice application framework (YJAF) to view data submitted and compare to national data. Data from quarters 1-3 for 2023-2024 on YJAF tells us that Hillingdon is performing above national indicators in the proportion of children in suitable accommodation (an average of 96% in Hillingdon compared to 86% nationally). The proportion of children in suitable education, training, and employment at the end of their order. Q1-3 showed 87% of school age children were in full time education at the end of their intervention, like the 86% seen at the end of 2022/23. For the non -school age children, 67% were in full-time education up from the 56% seen at the end of 2022/23. We also have a higher than the national average number of children identified special educational needs and disabilities (SEND) and additional learning needs (ALN) with a formal plan. This is reflective of the links we have built with our partners in Education and SEND and continue to ensur e that we collaborate with partners to ensure that it is child focused. It is a real strength of HYJS to have a Speech and Language therapist embedded within the service to ensure all children open to the YJS, AXIS and other prevention services such as Turnaround are offered speech and language assessment at the earliest opportunity, to ensure there us an understanding of the needs, collaboration with partners and interventions are personalised to maximise positive outcomes for each child. HYJS have reported an average of 39% of children open to the YJS with a screened or identified need for an intervention to improve mental health or emotional wellbeing compared to 25.6% of the national average for quarters 1-3 for 23-24. The well-resourced Health Hub within the YJS combines the skills of a Liaison and Diversion worker, full time dedicated Speech and Language Therapist and Child and Adolescent Mental Health practitioner to ensure a coordinated approach to meeting the health needs of children entering the youth justice system to promote positive outcomes. The total number of outcomes have decreased over the five years, from 246 in 2019-2020 to 100 in 2023 -2024. It is positive that the number of court outcomes have decreased by 54% over the 5 years. We have also seen a 65% decrease of out of court disposals and a 77.5% decrease in Triage outcomes in the same period. The main cause of this is due to the increase 9 in Community Resolutions being given for low-level offences. It is positive that in the last year we have seen an increase in the rate of engagement as compared to the previous year. The most common offence in 2023- 2024 was Violence against the person related, with 60 offences (29.13%). In 2021- 22, Drugs had been the most common offence, but this has continued to decrease from 52 offences (28.42%) in 2021/22 to 12 offences (5.83%) in 2023/24. This is due to the continued decrease in triage offences, with drug possession offences being dealt with via Community Resolutions. Burglary, Robbery, and The ft and Handling offences accounted for 33.98% of all offences up from 25.23% in the previous year and 11.48% in 2021/22. For the second year in a row, “Burglary other than dwelling” was the single most common offence, representing 9.22% of all offences. It is important to note that a l l 1 9 o f t h e s e o ff e n c e s w e r e c o m m i tt e d b y 2 c h i l d r e n . H o w e v e r , t h e n e x t m o s t c o m m o n offence was “Possess knife blade / sharp pointed article in a public place” with 14 offences, committed by 14 different children. HYJS continues to work with its partners, and this remains a priority for the Safer Hillingdon Partnership. Hillingdon monitors Serious Violence rates with the assistance of the YJB’s “Serious Youth Violence Tool”. The rate of s erious violence increased in 2023 to 7.5, up from 5.3 in 2022 which has put us in line with our YJS Family. This is still lower than historic figures as outlined in the table below. The rate of serious violence offences has fallen in since its peak of 10.7 in 2021. Hillingdon’s rate of serious violence offences has remained below the London rate . Robbery continues to be the most common SY V offence, accounting for 79% of offences in Q1-3 2023/24. Rate of Serious Violence offences - Year ending December 2019 2020 2021 2022 2023 Hillingdon 4.5 10.5 10.7 5.3 7.5 London 17.5 13.8 12.4 10.4 10.5 10 --- Hillingdon YJS Priorities --- 11 Priority 1: Prevention and Early Intervention Link to Council Priorities : A thriving economy, Safe and strong communities, Thriving healthy households. This priority seeks to address the root causes of offending behaviour and explore the wider determinates of social inequalities , intervene at the earliest possible stage to prevent escalation and reduce the risk of future harm , ensuring the safety and security of our communities. HYJS is situated within the Children directorate and falls under the umbrella of Prevention and Youth Justice. HYJS, and its partners has an impressive track record of contributing to the realisation of our vision through effective preventative work. This continues to be an area of focus over the next 5 years to further develop our prevention offer. Over the last 5 years, we have seen our First-time entrants (FTE) figures decrease during the COVID pandemic and rise again, however we remain below pre-pandemic levels. 2019-2020 2020-2021 2021-2022 2022-2023 2023-2024 Number of first-time entrants 64 48 38 46 46 As mentioned previously and outlined in the table below, the total number of outcomes have decreased over the five years, from 246 in 2019 -2020 to 100 in 2023-2024. It is positive that the number of court outcomes have decreased by 54% over the 5 years. We have also seen a 65% decrease of out of court disposals and a 77.5% decrease in Triage outcomes in the same period. The main cause of this is due to the increase in Community Resolutions being given for low-level offences. Outcomes  2019-2020 2020 - 2021  2021 - 2022  2022 – 2023  2023 – 2024  Court  124 76  47  57  57 Pre-Court  122 94  87  56   43  Of Which Triage  98 73  65  33   22 Total  246 170  134  113   100 In the year 2023 -2024 we have seen a varied rate of engagement for children receiving a community resolution (CR) with an average rate of 31% of children consenting to receiving intervention with HYJS. This is an increase from the previous year where we had a n average of 9% of children receiving an intervention. Our AXIS service , unique to Hillingdon, continues to offer understanding of the complexity, risk and safety and wellbeing concerns of local children in 'real time'. AXIS is instrumental in identifying children on the periphery of involvement in C hild Sexual Exploitation, C hild Criminal Exploitation, children arrested for Possession with intent to supply, or those that are linked to suspected 'gang' involvement and serious youth violence . AXIS work with children 12 referred on a voluntary basis or will refer them to Children's Social Care where appropriate. AXIS also supports the wider partnership and local services’ engagement with children and will provide headline data to inform how and where services are delivered in Hillingdon. In December 2022, Hillingdon was provided funding (ending March 2025) from the Ministry of Justice (MoJ) to mobilise Project Turnaround, to intervene at an earlier stage to prevent children entering the criminal justice system under the Early Help framework. Turnaround has been a success in Hillingdon, and the data shows we have exceeded the MoJ quota of children who ha ve voluntarily engaged with this project and have seen positive outcomes for this cohort for children. 2022-2023 2023-2024 2024-2025 MoJ Quota 9 26 27 Number of c hildren engaged with Turnaround 9 32 XXX The Metropolitan Police’s Pan-London Project Engage, funded by the VRU (Violence Reduction Unit) was set up in January 2024 to engage with children in police custody, capturing the teachable, reachable moment to build a positive relationship to understand the causes of their offending and identify bespoke interventions and services best placed to divert children from the criminal justice system. The Engage team foster s good relationships with partners, including community and voluntary groups to support children in their own communities and provide opportunities through social inclusion to divert them from criminality. Our focus under this priority is to embed long term early help systems to enable multi-agency intervention at the earliest opportunity, to divert children from the criminal justice system, build resilience, and promote positive outcomes . This means effective intervention to be targeted towards children and families at risk of experiencing adversity through a myriad of issues including poverty, social exclusion, familial violence, mental health, disability, substance misuse and school exclusions. We believe residents should be able to access the right help at the right time. The Family h ub strategy1 will support this through having integrated services across the disciplines of Maternity, Health, Education, Social Care, and the Voluntary Sector under the principles of Early Help and Intervention, to provide accessible services to families, situated within their own communities, at their point of need. The offer will link support for the whole family where there are children and young people up to the age of 19 (25 for those with SEND), acknowledging the impact of the right support and care, in the right place, at the right time on the future lives of children. Success measures: - Ensure assessments support early identification of risks and vulnerabilities. 1 Hillingdon Family Hub Strategy 2023-2025 13 - Continued prevention service to support children at risk of entering the criminal justice system after MoJ Turnaround funding ceases. - Stronger partnerships with colleagues across the partnership to identify children most at risk at the earliest opportunity. - Reduced FTE rates. - A reduction in suspensions and permanent exclusions in schools 14 Priority 2: Over-representation and Disproportionality Linked to Hillingdon Council Priority: Safe and strong communities, Thriving healthy households. Addressing disproportionality in youth justice is crucial for ensuring fairness, equity, and justice within our society. Disproportionality refers to the overrepresentation of certain groups, particularly from Black, Asian, and other global majority backgrounds, within the y o u t h j u s ti c e s y s t e m . I t i s i m p e r a ti v e t o r e c o g nise and rectify these disparities to create a system that treats all children equally, regardless of their background. By addressing disproportionality, we can reduce the barriers that prevent children from accessing support, thereby promoting trust in the system. The Youth Justice Board states: The Youth Justice Board is committed to recognising and addressing inequality and the children who are involved with the youth justice system reflect a range of social inequalities. There is over-representation of children in care, children living in poverty, those with neurodivergent conditions or speech and language difficulties, and those who have experienced trauma. However, the most persistent and significant overrepresentation is children from minoritised racial communities. 2 The population of Hillingdon has changed significantly over the last decade as outlined in the 2021 census data: • White British made up 50% of the 10-17yr old population in Hillingdon in 2011, this dropped to 31% in 2021. • Asian children made up 24% of the pop. in 2011, this increased to 34% in 2021. • Black African children made up 6% of the pop. in 2011, this is increased to 9% in 2021. • Any other ethnic group saw the largest % increase of 174%. In Hillingdon, black children accounted for 27% of stop and searches compared to 13% of the population in the year 2023-2024. However, 81% of these stop and searches had an outcome of NFA (no further action). There has been a large decrease in the number of children on Bail and those released under investigation in November 2023 (76) compared to February 2024 (19). Black children made up 42% of children bailed/released under investigation in November 2023 but now account for 21% due to an increased focus in this area to reduce the number of children subject to a release under investigation . Our data tells us that Black and Mixed children are less likely to plead guilty; in 2023-2024 8% of black and mixed heritage children were found guilty compared to 3% of White children. In Hillingdon, black and mixed children are more likely to experience adverse childhood experiences, such as poverty, neglect, and parental conflict, in the early years of their lives. 2 Youth_Justice_Board_for_England_and_Wales_Strategic_Plan_2024-27.odt (live.com) 15 Black and mixed heritage children account for 18% of children on a CP plan in Hillingdon, whilst making up 6% of the population of children in Hillingdon. Black children in Hillingdon are 1.4x more likely to be severely obese compared to other ethnicities. 33% of Hillingdon’s current looked after children are of Black or Mixed ethnicity. Black looked after children were less likely to have their health assessment up to date, 72% compared to 95% for White children. They were less likely to have immunisations up to date, 66% compared to 83% for White children. White children had the lowest amount of tooth decay in 5-year-olds. In terms of education outcomes, 29% of exclusions and 33% of suspensions were from Black & Mixed Ethnicities in the 22/23 Academic Year. Boys (52%) were significantly more likely to not have achieved at least the expected standard in Early Learning Goals by age 5 compared to Girls (70%), with Other ethnic boys (48%) and Black Boys (50%) with the lowest %. Illustrated below is the Hillingdon YJS data regarding outcomes for children in the youth justice system. Ethnicity  2019-2020 2020 – 2021  2021 – 2022  2022 – 2023  2023 – 2024  White  44.83% 50.36%  55.56%  49.45%  45.05%  Black  24.71% 17.53%  14.81%  18.68%  19.78%  Asian  15.52% 16.06%  12.04%  6.59%  13.19%  Mixed  13.79% 10.95%  12.96%  16.48%  14.29%  Other 1.15% 5.11% 4.63% 8.79% 7.69%   Black and Asian ethnic children saw an increase in both the number and proportion of children compared to the previous year. White and Mixed Ethnicities decreased in both the number and proportion of clients compared to the previous year. The data pre and post pandemic tells us that fewer B lack and Asian children received an outcome during the COVID period compared to their white counterparts that received a higher proportion of outcomes however we see an opposite trend for both sets of children coming out of the pandemic. Outcomes  Black children have consistently been over -represented in Court and Custodial outcomes, although this has been decreasing in recent years. However, the disproportionality in court and custodial outcomes for mixed race children has been increasing in the last 5 years. Asian children are under-represented at every stage of the Youth Justice service. *GE*GEM, Global Ethnic Majority M, Global Ethnic Majority 16 Children Looked after Looked after children are over-represented in the criminal justice system in England and Wales. Looked after children and those with care experience are particularly vulnerable and often the victims of trauma and exploitation. The table below shows the numbers of children open to HYJS that are on a Child in need (CIN) plan, Child Protection (CP) plan and Children looked After (CLA) . In 23-24 20.9% of children open to HYJS were looked after, compared with 0.88% of Hillingdon’s 10-17 population 2020-2021 2021-2022 2022-2023 2023-2024 CIN/CP # 49 38 31 31 % 35.8% 35.2% 34.1% 34.1% CLA # 19 9 18 19 % 13.9% 8.3% 19.8% 20.9% The London Reducing Criminalisation of looked after children and care leavers protocol3 was published in March 2021 and sets out the roles and responsibilities of all agencies involved in the care of looked after children and care leavers, in reducing unnecessary criminalisation. HYJS continue to develop its response to this, supporting care homes in managing conflict and behaviour using trauma informed approaches, and advocating for children looked after to reduce them from being criminalised. Speech and Language Children in the youth justice system are significantly more likely to have underlying speech and language needs compared to their peers. Research shows that a large proportion of these children have unmet and undiagnosed speech, language, and communication needs (SLCN), which often remain unrecognised throughout their lives. These challenges can manifest in various ways, including difficulties in understanding and using language, which in turn affects their ability to communicate effectively, understand legal proceedings, and engage with services. Many of these children come from backgrounds where early intervention for speech and language issues may have been limited or non -existent. Factors such as socio -economic disadvantage, lack of access to specialist services, and environments that do not sup port language development contribute to the underdiagnosis of these needs. Additionally, behavioural issues and academic struggles often associated with language difficulties may be misinterpreted as intentional defianc e, rather than being recognised as sy mptoms of underlying SLCN. 3 Reducing criminalisation of looked-after children and care leavers | London City Hall 17 As a result, these children may struggle to articulate their thoughts, understand instructions, or engage in verbal problem-solving, making them more vulnerable to misunderstandings and conflicts with people in authority. In the context of the youth justice system, this can lead to a cycle where communication breakdowns exacerbate behavioural issues, leading to an increased vulnerability to being exploited by others, or engaging in offending behaviour. Addressing these unmet needs is crucial for breaking this cycle. Early identification and intervention can improve outcomes for these children and reduce the likelihood of children entering the criminal justice system. Since March 2018, HYJS have commissioned Speech and Language Therapy input. This input was initially commissioned to investigate the level of speech, language and communication needs (SLCN) of children known to HYJS. The service has now evolved so that all children known to HYJS, AXIS and Turnaround are offered an assessment of their speech, language and communication skills. Between March 2018 and March 2024, 480 children received a speech and language assessment whilst allocated to HYJS or the AXIS service. The table below shows the percentage of children that have presented with an underlying speech, language or communication need (SLCN), and those with moderate -severe speech language or communication needs (MS-SLCN) over the past five years: 2019-2020 2020-2021 2021-2022 2022-2023 2023-2024 Number of children assessed 108 64 79 84 79 % of children presented with SLCN 66% 72% 71% 58% 71% % of children presented with MS-SLCN 69% 61% 61% 67% 55% The data shows there is an over -representation of children with speech and language needs as compared to the general population; 15% of the general population present with SLCN and 6% of the general population present with moderate-severe SLCN. Speech and Language training has been delivered to police colleagues at Polar Park custody suite which has resulted in an increase of children being refused detention and being invited to attend a Caution +3 interview at a later date. Children in custody are provided with distraction kits which are also used in interviews with children. A session has been held with Magistrates where guidance was offered to consider how they communicate with children in the court room and are guided by HYJS staff attending c ourt to ensure that children understand the process and are supported in the right way. Refresher training has also been provided to HYJS volunteer community panel members who have reported back to state that they have found it extremely useful when chairing panel meetings and communicating with children. HYJS staff are provided with communication packs that support them in their work with children. The packs contain resources for professionals to use during sessions to support 18 children’s attention and listening, social communication and language. For example: fidget toys/objects, pens and whiteboards. The strategic partnership is actively working on developing a disproportionality plan and has asked ‘’How do we, as a partnership address disproportionality experienced by children in Hillingdon within a Youth Justice context?’’. This plan will focus on identifying the root causes of disproportionality and implementing targeted interventions to address them effectively. By working together to tackle this issue, we can create a youth justice system that is fair, equitable, and supportive for all children. Success measures: - The production of a disproportionality action plan by the strategic management board in consultation with children, families, community groups and other stakeholders. - Increased training across partnerships to recognise and address bias and discrimination and develop an understanding of cultural humility. - Increased provisions and interventions for children with protected characteristics. - Reduction of overrepresentation of certain groups, particularly from Black, and mixed heritage children within the youth justice system. - Increased trust in the justice system among children, families and communities affected by disproportionality. - Collaborate with community organisations, stakeholders, and affected communities to address disproportionality effectively. - Develop and implement targeted initiatives and approaches to address the root causes effectively. - Monitor the progress and evaluate the effectiveness of interventions regularly. 19 Priority 3: Child-Centred Practice Linked to Hillingdon Council Priority: Safe and strong communities, Thriving healthy households. Child-centred practice focuses on the holistic needs of children and their families, promoting their health, well-being, and positive development. By placing children at the centre, we aim to create thriving, healthy households where every child can reach their full potential. It recognises children as active participants in their own lives and advocates for their rights, well- being, and development, creating nurturing environments where every child can thrive. HYJS recognises the importance of listening to the voice of the child and using it to inform service delivery. Children actively participate in staff interviews and have had the opportunity to pose their own questions to candidates and have supported the successful recruitment of three YJS Officers in the past year. In 2023-2024 HYJS board members received training from children open to the youth justice system called Walking in Our Shoes: YJS Edition whereby children shared their experiences of the criminal justice system, facilitated activities to provide an insight to board members on the service they receive from professionals in Hillingdon and wider partners, and presented the voices of other children open to HYJS. As a result, board members were able to consider the approaches used in HYJS, considering ‘what works’ in terms of the impact service delivery has on children. They also reflected on the importance of early intervention and prevention across the wider partnership, and considered how they would embed in their respective services. Following this it has been a commitment to have the voice of the child as a standing agenda item at all board meetings. This has allowed children’s experiences to be brought to the board to develop understanding of the child’s journey through the criminal justice system and where any challenges/barriers are addressed to ensure there is a child first approach across the partnership. HYJS prides itself on the collaboration with partners and has recently been awarded the Special Educational Needs and Disabilities (SEND) Lead Quality Mark with Child First Commendation by Microlink PC. This quality mark highlights the strong partnership working across local authority and health services in Hillingd on. In 2023-2024 HYJS provided bespoke speech, language, and communication training to colleagues in the Metropolitan police working in our local police custody suite, Polar Park. As a result, we have found reduced numbers of children being detained in custody, and increased use of Caution plus 3 interviews. As a result of ongoing work with the custody suite, they have embedded a child- centred approach to custody. Children have access to distraction kits, custody video-books as well as access to child-friendly leaflets outlining the custody process, and possible outcomes. Custody staff have also received speech and language training which has supported custody staff to ensure that they are meeting the speech and language needs of children in police custody. The well-resourced health hub within the YJS combines the skills of a Liaison and Diversion worker, Speech and Language therapist and Child and Adolescent Mental Health practitioner 20 to ensure a co-ordinated approach to meeting the health needs of children entering the youth justice system to promote positive outcomes. The YJS Education and Employment Officer ensure s all children open to HYJS have their education, training and employment (ETE) needs adequately assessed and the appropriate provision is provided both in the community and in custody with the support of partner agencies. This includes Under 16 education and post 16 provision. In the last five years we have experienced a reduction of ETE providers and face barriers in achieving ETE places for children. However, there are good partnerships with colleagues with Education and SEND which supports a collaborative approach in keeping children in education, and re -engaging those children who are NEET or missing from education. HYJS is an accredited centre with AQA and provides children with the opportunity to acquire AQA qualifications as a stepping stone to further ETE pathways. HYJS have developed the intervention 'My Support Plan' which is utilised to support practitioners get to know the children they are working with, understand their life experiences and how it forms part of their identity. The support plan focusses on diversity to understand the child beyond their offence. This is designed as the initial piece of work in the intervention to begin to build rapport, get to know the child and create SMART targets, which has been evidenced in case file audits and has received positive feedback from children and families. HYJS believe children have the right to be heard and participate in decisions that affect them. Capturing feedback from children and families provides valuable insights into their experiences, perspectives and understanding of the criminal justice process. One of the ambitions of the YJB strategic plan 2024-2027 4 is to influence and develop policy and practice of child first across the youth justice system, which includes improving the court experience and outcomes for children. We capture children’s experience of court proceedings to ensure that they are fair, transparent, and based on accurate information. It allows for a more balanced and comprehensive understanding of the situation, reducing the risk of misinterpretation or bias. Children and families are also involved in every step of their involvement with HYJS. The ir participation in agreeing interventions and reviewing their progress leads to better outcomes in terms of their well-being, behaviour, and compliance with court orders. When children feel list ened to and respect ed, they are more lik ely t o eng age positively with int erventions and take responsibility for their actions. Co-production and participation from children and families also helps professionals identify risks or protective factors and inform decisions aimed at addressing their needs and preventing further harm. Our focus under this priority is to further develop our child first approach and support active participation and engagement of children and families to encourage co -production of intervention plans and resources. Success measures: 4 Youth_Justice_Board_for_England_and_Wales_Strategic_Plan_2024-27.odt (live.com) 21 - A commitment to continue to commission training/deliver tailored workshops to further develop practitioner’s understanding of child centred practice. - Speech and language training to be delivered to wider partnerships such as magistrates, and refresher training to be delivered to local police custody suite and YJS staff. - Increased evidence of participation with children to inform service delivery. - Achieving strengthened relationships with colleges and mainstream schools in Hillingdon. - Improved pre -emptive action across the partnership to prevent suspensions and exclusions and widen opportunities for vulnerable learners. - An increase in the availability of ETE providers for our children. - Better collation of children’s feedback regarding their experiences in police custody, court and HYJS. 22 Priority 4: Reducing Re-offending. Linked to Hillingdon Council Priority: Safe and strong communities, Thriving healthy households. Hillingdon Youth Justice Service prioritises the best interest of children and focuses on understanding children’s identity, using trauma informed relationship-based practice w hen working with children to divert and prevent children from offending and re -offending. This includes addressing our re-offending rates and ensuring we have the right process in place to support children’ s desistance against further offending. Our commitment to reducing re - offending is key to creating safe and strong communities. By providing rehabilitation, support, and positive deve lopment opportunities, we can break the cycle of offending and promote the reintegration of children into society. The Proven rate of reoffending data for the period 2021/22, published by the Ministry of Justice, demonstrated a decrease in reoffending (40.5% to 37.5%) when compared to the previous financial year. However, when we compared this to our local data, we saw a large discrepancy. Our loca l data showed a reoffending rate of 2 6.6%, however due to the limitations in both the local and published data sets, we estimate our true reoffending rate to be 32.8% which is slightly above the National (32.1%) and below the London average (33.4%). The published data indicates an increase in the frequency of reoffending with an average of 2.93 further offences compared to 2.13 for the previous year. This increase was also shown in our local data. It is important to note that the 2020/21 cohort was partly tracked through the COVID lockdown periods of 2020, and this is likely to affect the 2020/21 reoffending data.  The result of having a small cohort of children entering the youth justice system is that it only takes a small increase in offending to significantly impact the percentage change. The reduction of the cohorts demonstrates the positive impact of early intervention programmes, effective triage and diversion. Those children who do re-offend, although reduced in number, are often those with the most complex needs. The YJS continues to use the YJB re offending tracker tool, deep dive audits, quality assurance frameworks and a focus on the whole family approach to better understand this cohort and support improved outcomes.  In 2023/24, 22 children were triaged out of the criminal justice system in comparison to the 46 cases entering the system and receiving a formal disposal for the first time. In the previous year, of the 43 triages received, 6 (14%) went on to reoffend within the next 12 months. Additionally, 24 children received a community resolution in 2023/24, with 14 of these proceeding to an intervention. In the previous year, of the 37 clients who received a community resolution, 6 (16.2%) reoffended within 12 months. 0 of the 2 children who engaged with the community resolution reoffended.  HYJS acknowledge the following factors that have contributed to the reduction of re- offending in Hillingdon: - Stable accommodation including care placements. - Early resettlement planning - Access to education, training, and employment 23 - Collaboration between the partnership HYJS are committed to a strengths-based, constructive resettlement approach and ensure that our resettlement work is based on the “5 C’s" – Constructive, Co-created, Customised, Consistent and Co -ordinated. HYJS has a dedicated experienced champion who leads on resettlement to ensure practice and delivery continues to evolve. Continuous partnerships with health and education services supports the transition from custody to the community. T h e r e v i e w o f a l l c u s t o d y c a s e s at the Hillingdon Access to Resource Panel ensures joint strategic oversight in planning and resource allocation. The latest data on the Use of Custody shows that the number of children in Hillingdon receiving a custodial sentence in 2022/23 decreased to 7, compared to 8 for the previous year. The rate per 1,000 of the 10- 17 population use of custody data for Hillingdon in this period was 0.22. Children sentenced to custody often represent the highest risk, and the imposition of a custodial sentence by the court are in response to the offences committed. Data analysis indicates that children in Hillingdon from the Global Ethnic Majority are 3 times more likely to receive a custodial sentence. However , please note due to their being such a small cohort of custodial outcomes, small changes in the data will have large impacts in these figures. The Hillingdon YJSPB are committed to understand and taking action to address overrepresentation with a robust Disproportionality action plan and associated partnership activity.   At the end of 2023/24 there was 1 child remanded into Youth Detention Accommodation (YDA), compared to 3 children at the end of 2022/23. There were 10 remands started in 2 0 2 3 / 2 4 , w i t h a n a v e r a g e ti m e o p e n o f 3 6 d a y s . T h i s i s b o t h a d e c l i n e i n t h e n u m b e r o f remands and length open when compared to the previous year, which had 14 remands starting for an average length of 63 days. Like our custody data, Black and Mixed-Race children are disproportionally over -represented, accounting for 69% of the remands star ting in 2023/24.  HYJS recognised a need for improved transitions work with Probation, which has been a priority for 2023 -2024. We continue to deliver our transitions work without a seconded probation officer which could have significantly impacted on transitions; however, we have worked to ensure alternative interim arrangements have been established whilst a longer- term solution is secured . A t HY JS we aim to ensure all transition plan are personalised and have had the added benefit of welcoming a pilot project in AXIS focusing on the transition ages (18 -24) where other support services will drop, leaving young people at risk of gang affiliation and risk of further serious violence. We recognise that transitioning to adulthood is a journey not an event, and every young person will experience this journey differently. Having this focus requires practitioners to think beyond child/adult silos and consider the nee ds of each individual, and how they can be protected. We aim to build on the support and resources already available across the partnership to ensure all children are effectively supported into adulthood. 24 Success measures: - A continued reduction of our re-offending rates. - Increased resources to address critical transition periods e.g. leaving custody, transition to adulthood. - HYJS to continue to strengthen relationships with the youth custody service and custodial establishments to ensure children are receiving the right services in custody. - HYJS to continue to review the effectiveness of interventions. 25 Priority 5: Victims and Restorative Justice Linked to Hillingdon Council Priority: Safe and strong communities, Thriving healthy households. Vi c ti m a n d r e s t o r a ti v e j u s ti c e f o c u s o n t h e n e e d s o f t h e v i c ti m , p r o v i d i n g t h e m w i t h a n opportunity to heal and recover from the harm they have experienced. It gives victims a voice and an active role in the justice process, empowering them and helping them to regain a sense of control over their lives. Restorative justice holds children accountable for their actions in a meaningful way, promoting a deeper understanding of the impact of their behavio ur. Hillingdon Youth Justice Service (HYJS) strives to provide high quality services to victims in line with The Victim’s Code5. The Victim’s Code sets out the 12 minimum standards that must be provided to victims of crime by organisations in England and Wales. 2021/2022 2022/2023 2023-2024 Number of victims reached/contacted 33 20 21 % of victims consenting to RJ 33% 50% 90% In the year 2023-2024 HYJS successfully contacted 21 victims, a slight increase from 20 the previous year . Of the victims that wanted to engage with restorative justice, 71% (15) requeste d a l e tt e r o f a p o l o g y and 29% (4) agreed to a face-to-face restorative justice conference. Whilst the number of victims reached has reduced, we have increased our engagement rates with victims which is positive. 49 children completed a Restorative Justice screening in 2023-2024. A health screening and Speech and Language assessment is completed with all children prior to their R estorative Justice screening to ensure that the process is delivered in a bespoke and meaningful way (e.g., the delivery of RJ and victim awareness work with autistic children is carefully considered). As a result, 30 children agreed to engage in restorative justice and feedback from children and families regarding th is process, and the victi m empathy sessions has been positive. All victims are offered home visits unless they are corporate victims or reside out of the Hillingdon borough. The home visits consist of victims speaking about the impact of the crime, discussing RJ and choosing the reparation project/s the child will complete to help repair the harm caused. HYJS have an extensive reparation leaflet which includes fifteen projects that cater to children’s diversity and communication needs. All victims are asked if they require additional support and if so, a referral is made to Victim Support who provide practical, emotional and advocacy support. 5 Code of Practice for Victims of Crime in England and Wales (Victims' Code) - GOV.UK (www.gov.uk) 26 If a victim do es not w a n t t o r eceiv e furt h er sup port fr om Victim Su ppo r t , t he RJ t eam w ill complete a victim safety plan with them to address any risk posed. This plan can also be shared with police if the victim agrees. The victim safety plan includes: • Scenarios/places where the victim feels safe and unsafe. • Safe Words. • Trusted adults and services they can contact. • Emergency contacts. • External services that can provide support. Victims are provided with an effective and inclusive approach to addressing harm and resolving conflicts within our communities. They promote healing, accountability, and reconciliation, leading to safer, more resilient, and more cohesive communities. Feeback received from victims illustrates how powerful restorative justice is, and the impact it has had on them: In addition to the direct work with victims , our Victims and Restorative Justice offer extends to supporting our partners address conflict and harm in a more positive way. In the year 2023- 2024 we have provided restorative justice training to all secondary schools across Hillingdon and have received positive feedback for those that attended. “You’re very helpful. I was nervous and anxious before the conference, but the conference went well. I came out feeling better in myself because it had been spoken about.” Victim “From a parent’s perspective, you included my daughter and gave her a voice. You could have just listened to what I said, because she’s a child and I’m the parent but you didn’t, you gave her a voice in the process. Going into that conference, I didn’t realise how much it affected me. By sitting in the conference, I could let it go; it felt done and dusted. It felt like there was justice within the conference. You are in a vulnerable situation and once you walk out of the conference, they are left with the thoughts and feelings that you have shared. You are no longer the only one walking around with those thoughts and feelings.” Victim’s parent.

Text extracted automatically from the PDF, so layout, tables and images are not shown. Only the start of this long document is shown here. Open the original PDF on LB Hillingdon’s website.

Relevant Select Committee
Expiry date for any scrutiny call-in / date decision can be implemented (if no call-in)
Officer(s) to action
Directorate
Classification
12. Monthly Council Budget Monitoring Report PDF 472 KB
RESOLVED: That the Cabinet: 1) Note the budget monitoring position and treasury management update as at August 2024 (Month 5), noting the actions proposed by officers as outlined in Part A of this report. 2) Approve the financial recommendations set out in Part B of this report below: a. Agrees the rebasing proposal to process a budget virement and credit the corporate centre with £14.1m to the support Service Operating Budgets. Reasons for decision The Cabinet Member for Finance introduced the monthly Council budget monitoring report, addressing the financial position as of 31 August 2024 and a progress update on the zero-based budgeting (ZBB) project. It was noted in the report there was a projected overspend of £32.4 million, which could be reduced to £6.6 million through identified savings and the release of balance sheet items. The total savings identified so far amounted to £39.6 million, with some savings expected in future financial years. The Cabinet Member emphasised that the savings targeted areas such as streamlining back-office functions, digitisation and income maximisation, without cutting key frontline services. The Cabinet Member acknowledged the substantial financial challenges, in-year budget pressures and shortfalls on income targets. Despite these challenges, the Cabinet Member stated that Hillingdon had managed its cash flow and borrowing effectively. The Cabinet Member noted that the newly appointed Corporate Director of Finance was leading the ZBB process and that he had also formally instructed the Corporate Director to prepare a financial improvement plan to strengthen operational and financial controls and promote the enhanced use of digital data. Furthermore, Cabinet was informed that operational improvements had reduced the in-year deficit for the Dedicated Schools Grant, though a significant deficit remained. The Housing Revenue Account was on track, with plans for an enhanced capital programme to increase housing stock and reduce homelessness pressures. The Leader of the Council emphasised the importance of acknowledging the financial challenges facing the Council and mentioned a recent meeting with London Council leaders and their finance directors, where they discussed the pressures on local authorities and their expectations from the upcoming Government budget which the Leader hoped would not exacerbate the Council’s financial situation. Alternative options considered and rejected None. Relevant Select Committee Corporate Resources & Infrastructure Expiry date for any scrutiny call-in / date decision can be implemented (if no call-in) Cabinet’s decision in 2 (a) only can be called in by the relevant select committee by 5pm, Friday 18 October 2024. If not called-in, Cabinet’s decisions can then be implemented. Officer(s) to action Richard Ennis Directorate Corporate Director of Finance Classification Public - The report and any background papers relating to this decision by the Cabinet are available to view on the Council's website or by visiting the Civic Centre, Uxbridge.
📄 Monthly Council Budget Monitoring Report PDF 472 KB
Read the text of this document (18 pages)
Cabinet – 10 October 2024 (Part 1 Public) COUNCIL BUDGET 2024/25 REVENUE MONTH 5 BUDGET MONITORING Cabinet Member & Portfolio Councillor Martin Goddard Cabinet Member for Finance Accountable Corporate Director Richard Ennis Corporate Director of Finance Report author Iain Watters, Finance HEADLINES Summary This report provides the Council's forecast financial position and performance against the 2024/25 revenue budget. At Month 5, the Council is reporting an overspend of £32.4m after allowing for strategic management action of £11.9m that is being firmed up for delivery in-year. The Council is currently working up interventions to mitigate against this position, with the work on the Zero -Based Budgeting built on at the officer star chambers already providing several interventions to reduce this financial pressure. These meetings have thus far produced indicative interventions in the region of up to £15.9m that are in the various stages of delivery, which if successful, will reduce the overspend to be in the region of £16.5m as a central case. The variance is being driven by significant past and current inflationary pressures, significant demand for services particularly fo r example in adults care, temporary accommodation, the effect of a rebasing exercise to largely respond to demand for services being insufficient and not accompanied by equal savings at that time, and insufficient delivery of savings. The Council are currently reviewing options centred around releasing balance sheet assets, which if successful, will secure a further £10m of benefit in 2024/25 and reduce the overspend to £6.6m based on the central case. The Zero-Based Budgeting exercise is extensive and has addressed all aspects of the Councils activities so far identified potential interventions and savings totalling £39.6m, £15.9m of this can be delivered in 2024/25, the balance in later fiscal years. Further initiatives are being pursued within this programme of work and it is expected that this will be largely concluded by the end of October 2024 ahead of robust testing in the lead up to presentation at the December Cabinet for consideration. Following the Month 5 deep dive review, the Council has hel d officer ‘Star Chamber’ sessions, to work up options that are subject to member consideration and decision, with these sessions tasked with taking urgent action to address the emerging issues, with these sessions reviewing:  Resident service provision  Hillingdon Council priorities  Leveraging relationships to access funding  Driving efficiencies and driving value for every taxpayer £  Leveraging financial instruments  Relationship with local business Cabinet – 10 October 2024 (Part 1 Public)  Accelerating capital delivery The outputs of these sessions are estimated in this report and are being firmed up over the autumn. The Dedicated Schools Grant (DSG) monitoring position forecasts indicate a reduced in year deficit for 2024/25 in respect of the High Needs Block from £25.6m to £16.1m (a reduction of £9.5m on 2023/24) with a range of interventions partially mitigating underfunded demand within the High Needs block. No material variances have been reported across the Housing Revenue Account (HRA), with all service areas within the ringfence reporting a breakeven position with further work planned to robustly test this position and look to drive better value for residents. Putting our Residents First - Delivering on the Council Strategy 2022-2026 This report supports the delivery of the Council Strategy and the Council’s objective of: Strong financial management. Achieving Value for Money is an important element of the Council’s Medium Term Financial Plan. Financial Cost N/A Select Committee Corporate Resources & Infrastructure Relevant Ward(s) All RECOMMENDATIONS That the Cabinet: 1. Note the budget monitoring position and treasury management update as at August 2024 (Month 5), noting the actions proposed by officers as outlined in Part A of this report. 2. Approve the financial recommendations set out in Part B of this report. Reasons for recommendation 1. The reason for Recommendation 1 is to ensure that the Council achieves its budgetary objectives, providing Cabinet with the update on performance at Month 5 against budgets approved by Council on 22 February 2024 contained within Part A of this report. An update on the Council's Treasury Management activities is included within this section of the report. 2. Recommendation 2 seeks approval for the range of financial recommendations set out within Part B of this report, which may include acceptance of grant funding, revisions to fees & charges and ratification of decisions taken under special urgency provisions. Alternative options considered / risk management 3. There are no other options proposed for consideration. Select Committee comments 4. None at this stage. Cabinet – 10 October 2024 (Part 1 Public) PART A: MONTHLY BUDGET MONITORING SUMMARY GENERAL FUND REVENUE 5. Following on from the Month 4 report to Cabinet that set out the activity being undertaken to firm up the Council’s financial position, the Month 5 report is highlighting the considerable financial challenges that Hillingdon is facing in line with peers across both London and nationally. London Councils, the collective of Local Government in the capital, estimates that boroughs will overspend against original budget plans by £600m this year (averaging £18.2m per borough) and are forecasting this to grow to £700m in 2025/26 , however, this is before factoring in in-year overspends which are likely to increase this 2025/26 estimate, with three London boroughs reliant on Exceptional Financial Support from Government. The deep dive reviews through the Zero -Based Budgeting (ZBB) work, of the pressures identified in the Month 2 monitoring position have been firmed up and are set out in this report, covering the gross pressure the Council is facing f rom demographic growth, service demand pressures and challenges in the delivery of the Council’s saving programme. 6. As at Month 5, the review of the Council’s financial position generates an in -year overspend of £32.4m after allowing for strategic management actions amounting to £11.9m. As a result of the identified pressure s, and as part of the ZBB programme, the Council held a series of officer star chambers, subject to member consideration and decisions , to identify actions to address this position, with the sessions identifying interventions thus far forecast to deliver a £15.9m net benefit for the Council, reducing the overspend from £32.4m to £16.5m, thereby forecasting a closing reserves level of £17.7m. This monitoring position is therefore in li ne with the average pressure across London boroughs. As part of this activity, the benefits realisation process is being tightened to ensure more robust reporting and delivery going forward. 7. For this reason, the Council will utilise a number of options built up to enable the protection of the Council. These will include utilising balance sheet items that will enable the Council to undertake further work to ensure the Councils financial position can be strengthened. These measures are expected to secure a further £10m of net benefit , further reducing the in-year pressure to £6.6m and increasing the forecast closing reserves balance to £27.7m. 8. With the Council carrying out a series of officer star chambers, sub ject to Member consideration and decisions, building on the ZBB work with sessions focused on each area of service delivery and cross-service thematic sessions also being carried out to ensure a robust and comprehensive review of Council operations is cond ucted. These sessions are focused on in -year recovery as much as possible, as well as the Council’s medium-term objectives and challenges, with the latter to be presented back to Cabinet in December as part of the consultation budget. This is to allow time to undertake this work. At present, the in-year recovery actions are forecast to secure £15.9m in the central scenario, with a further £10m to come from releasing balance sheet assets in-year, including a review of the Council’s debt and provision cover which could be favourable or adverse , with this review potentially Cabinet – 10 October 2024 (Part 1 Public) leading to a favourable or an adverse outcome , with these items to be firmed up throughout the autumn. 9. The table below sets out a summary of the impact of the results of this work thus far, which is subject to member consideration and decisions: Table 1: General Fund Overview Service Approved Budget Forecast Outturn Underlying Variance Forecast Variance Month 2 Change in Variance £m £m £m £m £m Service Operating Budgets 282.0 294.0 12.0 0.0 12.0 Development & Risk Contingency 0.5 0.5 0.0 0.0 0.0 Unallocated Budget Items: Pay Award Inflation 6.4 6.4 0.0 0.0 0.0 Unallocated Budget Items: Unallocated Savings (4.5) 0.0 4.5 0.0 4.5 Unallocated Budget Items: Savings 0.0 1.8 1.8 0.0 1.8 Unallocated Budget Items: Rebasing 0.0 14.1 14.1 0.0 14.1 Total Net Expenditure 284.4 316.8 32.4 0.0 32.4 Corporate Funding (284.4) (284.4) 0.0 0.0 0.0 Subtotal 0.0 32.4 32.4 0.0 32.4 Interventions 0.0 (15.9) (15.9) 0.0 (15.9) Net Total 0.0 16.5 16.5 0.0 16.5 10. This underlying position is being driven by Service Operating Budgets forecasting an overspend of £12 .0m, with Corporate Budgets forecasting the remaining £20 .4m, with the latter primarily being driven by a requirement to rebase the service operating budgets by £14.1m to unwind historic pressures due to demographic growth being above the budgeted increase in prior years and unachieved savings due to changes in service delivery leading to planned savings no longer being deliverable. The remaining £6 .3m relates to cross -cutting savings within the budget strategy that are yet to be allocated to service operating budgets, including £1.8m of savings that are due to be pulled back to the corporate centre. Given the forecast position, these unallocated savings are unlikely to be deliverable in 2024/25. This position is predicated on the 2024/25 pay award being in line with the Council’s budgeted assumption of a 4.5% uplift in pay from the national pay negotiations. 11. The Service Operating Budget pressure of £12m is largely being driven by three areas, with: i. c£4.6m relating to pressures within Adult Social Care from demand outstripping the budgeted growth. ii. c£4.5m relating to homelessness demand continuing to run at a level above the budgeted assumption, with this being an issue across London. iii. c£3.3m relates to Children’s Social Care demand, with support provided to Looked After Children reporting exceptional demand above that included in the budget strategy. 12. The forecast position is predicated on the 2024/25 pay award being in line with the budgeted uplift of 4.5% and is b ased on the Autumn Statement not having an in -year impact, Cabinet – 10 October 2024 (Part 1 Public) recognising that there has been precedence in the past for in-year changes such as National Insurance changes. There therefore remains an element of risk that the Government’s first budget update on 30 October could impact on this position. 13. As work continues on the Star Chamber element of the ZBB programme, it is expected that further interventions and savings will be identified, however, the possibility exists that 2024/25 year end balances may fall below the Council’s minimum recommended level of £32m as set out in the Council’s budget strategy for 2024/25. 14. As Government prepares to announce their first budget at the end of October, Government funding and policy changes remain a risk for the Counc il, with the Government looking to address their deficit, with Government’s policy paper on public spending reporting a £21.9bn forecast overspend against totals set by Treasury in the Spring Budget 2024. The outcome from the October budget could potentially lead to in-year impacts for the authority, such as changes to the employers National Insurance rate, with the Government having a precedence for in-year changes to this rate. SCHOOLS BUDGET 15. The Dedicated Schools Grant (DSG) total Block for the Maintained Schools is forecasting a deficit of £16 .1m based on Month 5 (August 2024), representing a significant improvement from the projected £25.6m reported at outturn 2023/24 as a result of a broad range of positive measures being deployed by the Council. The in-year deficit is wholly driven by High Needs placement demand and cost pressures which continue to be significantly underfunded in the DSG settlement that the authority receives from the DfE. This position means that the cumulative deficit carried forward to 2025/26 is forecast at £63.6m. 16. There is currently a time -limited statutory override in place until 31 March 2025 effectively keeping the Schools Budget deficit behind a ringfence which ensures that this deficit does not impact upon general reserves, and the Council’s General Fund budget strategy is predicated on the further continuation of this override. The Council is one of many local authorities managing a deficit within the Schools Budget and this stood at £47.5m at 31 March 2024 and therefore exceeded General Fund reserve levels. It is worth noting that between outturn 2023/24 and the position presented in this report, the Council has successfully reduced spend against the Schools Budget by £ 9.5m and continues to ma ke good progress in reducing spend in this area. 17. The issue of mounting DSG deficits remains a national issue, with projections for a £4bn deficit across the country forming a key strand to lobbying by sector bodies such as the LGA and London Councils. HOUSING REVENUE ACCOUNT 18. The Housing Revenue Account (HRA) is continuing to forecast a breakeven position at Month 5, with the forecast rental yield being sufficient to contain operating costs and meet the planned Capital Programme Financing demands. The 2024/25 closing HRA General Balance is forecast to be £15m, in line with the target level established for 2024/25. The HRA has an ambitious development and acquisition programme for 2024/25, with this programme forecast Cabinet – 10 October 2024 (Part 1 Public) to be on track at Month 5, with the remainder of the HRA Capital Programme also reporting a breakeven position at this early point in the year for both 2024/25 and the five -year programme to 2028/29. Cabinet – 10 October 2024 (Part 1 Public) FURTHER INFORMATION General Fund Revenue Budget 19. As at Month 5, the Council’s General Fund is reporting an overspend of £32.4m after allowing for inflight activities to contain pressures and use of £0.9m of Earmarked Reserves and £8.2m transformation capitalisation. This Council is currently reviewing a further £ 15.9m of measures that if successful, will reduce the overspend down to £ 16.5m, with further work underway to release a balance sheet asset of £10m in-year that will further reduce this pressure to £6 .6m, with this option in the early stages of development and therefore not included in the table 1 above. General Fund Balances and Earmarked Reserves are expected to total £27.6m should the additional measures be achieved , meaning total balances are forecast to be below the minimum threshold of £32m as approved by Cabinet and Council in February 2024 without further actions. 20. As stated above, this position includes £14.1m of rebasing within Service Operating Budgets, with this value being required to resolve underlying pressures within day -to-day service budgets for the Council, these pressures have emerged as a result of demand outstripping the budgeted increases in prior years and service delivery changes meaning that historic savings cannot be delivered as intended . This rebasing figure effectively becomes an additional saving target in the corporate centre that the Council ultimately need to fund through further saving measures to address this pressure, with these measures being worked up throughout the autumn, with delivery expected to land in future years and therefore representing a pressure in 2024/25. This pressure will form part of the budget gap for 2025/26, with the first refresh of the Council’s budget strategy to be presented to Cabinet in December as part of the Consultation Budget. 21. The Month 5 positi on includes deploying £ 0.9m of Earmarked Reserves, with this one -off funding source being used to predominantly fund homelessness pressures, with £0.7m of this related to releasing funding for this purpose, with the remaining balance funding Public Health services from the ringfenced reserve, transformation activity that is not related to the Council’s saving programme and therefore cannot be funded from capital receipts and Schools Conditions Surveys, with funds for this activity having been earmarked in previous years. 22. With Transformation activity underway to deliver against the Council’s saving programme, the position is predicated on using £8.2m of capital receipts to fund implementation costs in line with the Government’s guidance, with the Council expected to secure £ 11.1m from asset disposals in 2024/25, leaving £2.9m of headroom to fund further transformation activity over the remainder of the year. 23. After these one -off funding sources, the underlying variance stands at £44 .3m, before management ac tion of £11 .9m of management action nets this down to £32 .4m, with management action being used to reflect activity that is underway but is yet to be firmed up . The management action is predominantly within three service areas, with details being as follows: Cabinet – 10 October 2024 (Part 1 Public) i. £6.9m related to Health & Social Care , with this relating to containing inflationary uplifts to a level below the budgeted uplift and maximising health contributions to packages of care. ii. £1.6m within Resident Services related to Waste Services where additional income is expected from the West London Waste Authority as a result of income generation from energy sales. iii. £1.3m in relation to Homelessness services, reflecting interventions to manage demand for the service. iv. £2.0m relates to smaller items spread across multiple service areas. Progress on Savings 24. The savings requirement for 2024/25 is £15 .8m as set out in the Council’s budget strategy, this position has been supplemented by a further £5.7m of prior year savings carried forward into 2024/25, resulting in an overall programme of £21.5m savings being delivered in year: Table 2: Savings Tracker Cabinet Member Portfolio Blue Green Amber I Amber II Red Banked Delivery in progress Early stages of delivery Potential problems in delivery Serious problems in delivery Total £m £m £m £m £m £m Cabinet Member for Property, Highways & Transport (0.4) (0.6) (0.1) (0.5) (0.1) (1.7) Cabinet Member for Finance 0.0 (1.4) 0.0 0.0 0.0 (1.4) Cabinet Member for Corporate Services 0.0 (1.3) (0.2) 0.0 (0.3) (1.8) Cabinet Member for Residents' Services (0.2) (1.9) (0.7) 0.0 (0.9) (3.7) Cabinet Member for Children, Families & Education (0.3) (0.4) (0.7) (0.2) 0.0 (1.6) Cabinet Member for Health and Social Care (0.1) (1.2) (0.2) 0.0 0.0 (1.5) Cross-Cutting 0.0 0.0 (9.8) 0.0 0.0 (9.8) Total 2024/25 Savings Programme (1.0) (6.8) (11.7) (0.7) (1.3) (21.5) 5% 32% 54% 3% 6% 100% Month 2 (1.0) (5.8) (13.0) (0.5) (1.3) (21.5) 5% 27% 60% 2% 6% 100% Movement 0.0 (1.0) 1.3 (0.2) 0.0 0.0 0% 5% -6% 1% 0% 0% 25. As of Month 5, £7.8m (37%) of the savings and interventions are being recorded as banked or on track for delivery, with a further £ 12.4m (58%) being at the early stages of delivery. In addition, £1 .3m (6%) are being reported as having potential challenges in delivery, with alternative delivery methods being considered in-year where appropriate. Cabinet – 10 October 2024 (Part 1 Public) 26. Where savings are at risk of not being delivered in full during 202 4/25, the associated pressures have been factored into the monitoring position with compensating actions bringing the overall position back to breakeven. At this time, it is expected that either the full level of savings will ultimately be delivered, or alternative savings will be proposed to supplement for non-delivery of particular savings from the outputs of the officer star chambers, subject to member consideration and decisions. Service Operating Budgets 27. Service Operating Budgets represent the majority of the Council’s investment in day -to-day services for residents. With the Council continuing to operate in a high inflation environment driven by global and national influences, these budgets were supplemen ted with £16.5m of funding to meet forecast inflationary pressures and £14.3m for demographic and other drivers impacting on demand for services going into the 2024/25. 28. Table 3 represents the position reported against normal activities for the Service Oper ating Budgets, the salient risks and variances within this position are summarised in the following paragraphs. Cabinet – 10 October 2024 (Part 1 Public) Table 3: Service Operating Budgets Service Approved Budget Underlying Forecast Rebasing Earmarked Reserves Transformation Capitalisation Forecast Outturn Variance £m £m £m £m £m £m £m Cabinet Member for Property, Highways & Transport Expenditure 18.1 19.1 (0.4) (0.1) 0.0 18.6 0.5 Income (10.4) (10.8) 0.0 0.0 0.0 (10.8) (0.4) Subtotal 7.7 8.3 (0.4) (0.1) 0.0 7.8 0.1 Cabinet Member for Finance Expenditure 144.9 148.1 0.0 (0.1) (2.5) 145.5 0.6 Income (106.4) (107.0) 0.0 0.0 0.0 (107.0) (0.6) Subtotal 38.5 41.1 0.0 (0.1) (2.5) 38.5 0.0 Cabinet Member for Corporate Services Expenditure 25.3 26.6 (0.8) 0.0 (1.0) 24.8 (0.5) Income (2.0) (2.1) 0.0 0.0 0.0 (2.1) (0.1) Subtotal 23.3 24.5 (0.8) 0.0 (1.0) 22.7 (0.6) Cabinet Member for Residents' Services Expenditure 83.1 101.3 (7.0) (0.9) (0.4) 93.0 9.9 Income (52.4) (57.9) 0.0 0.1 0.0 (57.8) (5.4) Subtotal 30.7 43.4 (7.0) (0.8) (0.4) 35.2 4.5 Cabinet Member for Children, Families & Education Expenditure 96.7 107.6 (2.4) 0.0 (3.9) 101.3 4.6 Income (23.6) (24.4) (0.4) 0.0 0.0 (24.8) (1.2) Subtotal 73.1 83.2 (2.8) 0.0 (3.9) 76.5 3.4 Cabinet Member for Health and Social Care Expenditure 158.8 169.2 (1.5) (0.5) (0.4) 166.8 8.0 Income (50.1) (53.4) 0.0 0.0 0.0 (53.4) (3.3) Subtotal 108.7 115.8 (1.5) (0.5) (0.4) 113.4 4.7 Total Service Operating Budgets 282.0 316.3 (12.5) (1.5) (8.2) 294.1 12.1 Cabinet – 10 October 2024 (Part 1 Public) 29. As can be seen from the table above, Service Operating Budgets are forecasting a £12m overspend which is the cumulative effect of a number of variances which are briefly outlined below by Cabinet Portfolio: i. Property, Highways & Transport – An overspend of £0.2m with pressures predominantly relating to Property Services , with these pressures being driven by a shortfall in income from commercial shops, with the management action predicated on maximising recharge income from the capital programme in relation to activity undertaken by the capital team. ii. Finance – At Month 5 an overspend of £0.6m is reported for the portfolio, with this variance expected to be covered by the management action included in the position in relation to treasury activity outside of the intervention mentioned earlier in this report. iii. Corporate Services – The portfolio is reporting a net underspend of £0.6m, with this position largely being driven by holding a number of vacant posts within the service. iv. Residents’ Services – An underlying overspend of £4.5m with this position being driven largely by homelessness demand outstripping the level of demographic growth built into the service area in the budget strategy, with £3 .8m of the pressure relating to homelessness support. The majority of the remaining pressure is being driven by the Community Safety service, with this largely being the impact of changes in relation to imported food as a result of ongoing Brexit impacts. Waste Services are experiencing increased demand equating to a £0.6m pressures for the service, with this position being funded by one-off income expected from the West London Waste Authority. v. Children, Families & Education – At Month 5, an underlying pressure of £ 3.3m, with the pressure nearly wholly related to care provision to looked after children as a result of demand outstripping the budget strategy growth for the service. Further pressures are included within the position across income streams including room hire with further pressures being driven by the Early Years Centres, however, these have been mitigated by service underspends within the Children in Need & Protection service from staffing underspends. vi. Health & Social Care – An underlying ove rspend of £4.6m with the overspend largely being due to exceptional demand for adult social care services being materially higher than the amount included in the Council’s budget strategy, with the management action aiming to contain an element of this spend by supplier management and containing annual uplifts to a value below the budgeted increase (with the budgeted increase being based on the ADASS value of 7.9% and CPI running significantly below this value at 2.2% in August 2024). The overspend driven by Adult Placements after management action is for ecast to be £5.8m, with staffing underspends across the service reducing the overall pressure on the portfolio budget to £4.6m. Cabinet – 10 October 2024 (Part 1 Public) Collection Fund 30. A surplus of £0.05m is reported within the Collection Fund at Month 5. Within the Collection Fund, an adverse position is reported within Council Tax of £ 1.7m, offset by a favourable position within Business Rates of £1.7m. This position is driven by 3 key factors: i. Council Tax is presenting an in-year pressure of £ 1.6m against a £145.8m budget, with a further £0.1m being driven by the adverse movement on 2023/24. ii. Business Rates is presenting an in -year surplus of £0.8m driven by an increase in the realisation of the benefit from the revised rating list for 2023. iii. The Business Rates position is then compounded by a favourable £0.9m against the 2023/24 outturn position. iv. The Council continues to monitor the outstanding debt associated with Council Tax and Business Rates and provide cover against this debt, with this position remaining under review. 31. Any surpluses or deficits within the Collection Fund impact on the Council’s future year budgets, with the position reported up to Month 9 impacting on the 202 5/26 saving requirement, leading to £ 0.05m that will be included in the Council’s refresh of the budget strategy that will be presented to Cabinet in December 2024 as part of the consultation budget, with any further updates between Month 10 and outturn impacting on 202 6/27. This position therefore will reduce the Council’s gross saving requirement by £0.05m for 2025/26. 32. Whilst this position presents an adverse position for Council Tax, it is anticipated that this will be offset by the favourable position on Business Rates into 2025/26, with the retained income yield from taxation not expected to adversely impact the Council’s budget strategy in the medium term. Cabinet – 10 October 2024 (Part 1 Public) Schools Budget 33. The Dedicated Schools Grant (DSG) total Block for the Maintained Schools is forecasting a deficit of £16 .1m based on Month 5 (August 2024), representing a significant improvement from the £25.6m reported at outturn 2023/24 . This in year deficit is wholly driven by High Needs placement demand and cost pressures which continue to be significantly underfunded in the DSG settlement that the a uthority receives from the DfE. Table 6 below sets out a summary of the Schools Budget and Forecast summarises the forecast. 34. Whilst the Safety Valve Agreement with the Department of Education (DfE) is currently suspended, work has continued and is very successfully taking control of the market, managing unit costs down and beginning to see a significant reduction in the deficit as a consequence. It should be noted that constructive discussions with the DfE are continuing and that the Council is holding £ 8m of available capital receipts which can ultimately be allocated to reduce the deficit. Table 6: DSG Income and Expenditure Summary Dedicated Schools Grant (DSG) Blocks Budget 2024/25 Forecast Month 5 Variance Month 5 Change from Month 2 DSG Settlement Academy Recoupment LBH Maintained £m £m £m £m £m £m Schools Block 277.8 173.3 104.5 104.5 0 0 Early Years Block 37.5 0 37.5 37.5 0 0 Central Schools Block 2.4 0 2.4 2.4 0 0 High Needs Block 67.9 11.6 56.3 72.4 16.1 0 Total 385.6 184.9 200.7 216.8 16.1 0 Balance Brought Forward 1 April 2024 47.5 Total Deficit at 31 March 2025 63.6 35. A core target for the revised High Needs Safety Valve Plan is to actively reduce unit costs by concentrating SEN support in -Borough within our maintained schools and thereby reduce dependence on high cost Independent and Out -of-Borough placements. Trend data shows clear evidence that the approach which has been in place since early last financial year is now beginning to have a really positive impact. 36. The service strategy to manage the High Needs Deficit Plan through a combination of mitigating costs and re leasing savings is beginning to take affect and show significant success, with a forecast reduction of £9.5m on last year’s deficit of £ 25.6m, with both costs and the in-year deficit reducing in 2024/25. 37. The issue of mounting DSG deficits remains a nationa l issue, with projections for a £4bn deficit across the country forming a key strand to lobbying by sector bodies such as the LGA and London Councils. Cabinet – 10 October 2024 (Part 1 Public) Housing Revenue Account 38. The Housing Revenue Account (HRA) is currently forecasting a breakeven position, with ongoing inflationary risk be ing closely monitored for the remaining month of the year . The 2024/25 closing HRA General Balance is forecast to be £15m, in line with the target level set out in the Council’s budget strategy. The table below presents key variances with all services forecast to spend in line with their budget allocation at this early stage of the year. Table 7: Housing Revenue Account Service Budget Forecast Outturn Variance (As at Month 5) Variance (As at Month 2) Change from Month 2 £m £m £m £m £m Rent & Other Income (80.6) (80.6) 0.0 0.0 0.0 Net Income (80.6) (80.6) 0.0 0.0 0.0 Operational Assets 14.0 14.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Director of Housing 9.6 9.6 0.0 0.0 0.0 Other Service Areas 1.0 1.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Contribution to Shared Services 13.3 13.3 0.0 0.0 0.0 HRA Operating Costs 37.9 37.9 0.0 0.0 0.0 Capital Programme Financing 26.7 26.7 0.0 0.0 0.0 Interest and Investment Income 16.1 16.1 0.0 0.0 0.0 Capital Programme Financing 42.8 42.8 0.0 0.0 0.0 (Surplus) / Deficit (0.1) (0.1) 0.0 0.0 0.0 General Balance 01/04/2023 15.1 15.1 0.0 0.0 0.0 General Balance 31/03/2024 15.0 15.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 39. At Month 5, rental income and other income is forecasting to come in on budget and deliver the £80 .6m included in the budget strategy . The forecast is based on the Council’s commissioning plan to increase housing stock by 300 units in 2024/25, which are on track for delivery at this early stage of the year but will be closely monitored as the year progres ses. The budgets are based on a void rate of 1.35%, with any material variation from this level feeding into rental projections as appropriate. 40. The HRA Operating Costs Budget is £37.9m and at Month 5 is forecast to budget, with these budgets being based on supporting the Council’s current housing stock as at 1 April 2024, with growth added in line with the commissioning plan’s increase in stock numbers throughout the year. With these budgets being linked to the servicing o f the Council’s housing stock , these budgets are forecast to breakeven at Month 5 with the commissioning plan being in line with the Council’s budget strategy. This area will remain under review throughout the year, with growth in these budgets to be deplo yed as and when new homes are brought online. Inflation was also added to these budgets in the Council’s budget strategy, with early indications suggesting the budgeted uplift is sufficient to meet inflationary demands on the service. 41. The detail behind the service delivery of the blocks included in table 7 are as follows: Cabinet – 10 October 2024 (Part 1 Public) i. Operational Assets budget funds the services provided for repairs and maintenance, void repairs, compliance and inspections. ii. The Director of Housing budget includes tenancy management and tenants’ services. The budgets include utility costs, and these will continue to be monitored given the volatility of the electricity and gas markets in recent times. iii. The Other Service Areas bu dget includes the Careline contract, HRA specific ICT costs and the revenue regeneration costs. iv. The Contribution to Shared Services budget include s the development and risk contingency, overheads and corporate and democratic core charges, and the bad debt provision. 42. The MTFF savings target is £ 0.5m with this saving expected to be delivered by virtue of the Council’s general fund savings against support services, leading to a reduction in the recharge to the HRA for these services. 43. As at Month 5 the capital programme financing budget of £ 42.8m is forecast to breakeven. This budget forecast includes £2 6.7m (depreciation and revenue contributions) to fund the HRA capital programme, the position also includes £1 6.1m for repayments of loans and interest on borrowing, this position will be closely monitored throughout the year with clear linkages to the commissioning plan. Cabinet – 10 October 2024 (Part 1 Public) Treasury Management Update as at 30 August 2024 Table 10: Outstanding Deposits Period Actual (£m) Actual (%) Movement from Month 2 (£m) Call Accounts and MMF’s* Up to 3 Month Fixed-Term Deposits 19.90 49.8% (1.7) 5.10 12.8% (2.9) Total 25.00 62.5% (4.6) Strategic Pooled Funds 15.00 37.5% - Total 40.00 100.0% (4.6) Average Investment Balances May 2024 62.21 (13.0) *Money Market Funds 44. Deposits are held with UK institutions, all of which hold a minimum A - Fitch (or lowest equivalent) long-term credit rating and AAA rated Money Market Funds (MMFs). UK deposits are currently held in NatWest Bank plc and the DMADF. There is als o an allocation to Strategic Pooled Funds. 45. The average rate of return on day -to-day operational treasury balances since the beginning of the new financial year is 5.18%. As part of the Council’s investment strategy for 2024/25, the Council continues to hold a total of £15m in three long-dated strategic pooled funds (£5m in each). The strategic pooled funds have a long-term investment horizon with dividends being distributed periodically. When including projected dividend income on these strategic pooled funds, the overall rate of return decreases to 4.99% based on the previous six months income average. With the high market interest rates there has been a lag in terms of dividend yield whilst the underlying assets mature and are refinanced, however over the last year income on these funds has been increasing. As the fair value of these strategic pooled funds are currently lower than the sum initially invested it is not feasible to disinvest at this time. 46. The Council aims to minimise its exposure to bail-in risk by utilising bail-in exempt instruments and institutions whenever possible. However, due to the significant amount held in instant access facilities, which is needed to manage daily cashflow, it is not possible to fully protect Council funds from bai l-in risk. At the end of August, 80% of the Council’s day -to-day operational treasury investments had exposure to bail -in risk compared to a March benchmark average of 62% in the Local Authority sector (70% benchmark average for London and metropolitan boroughs). This exposure fluctuates during the month as DMADF deposits, which are not exposed to bail in risk, were generally higher over the month compared to the balance held with the DMADF at the end of the month. 47. Liquidity was maintained by placing surp lus funds in instant access accounts and making short-term deposits, including overnight deposits, in the DMADF. Cash flow was managed by ensuring maturities of any short-term deposits with the DMADF were matched to outflows. Average investments over the month (including strategic pooled funds) were £62.21m. Cabinet – 10 October 2024 (Part 1 Public) Table 11: Outstanding Debt General Fund HRA Total Average Interest Rate (Total) £m £m £m % PWLB Long Term 71.6 199.0 270.6 3.40% Market 15.0 33.0 48.0 4.11% Temporary Borrowing: Local Authorities 80.0 0.0 80.0 5.17% PWLB 0.0 20.0 20.0 5.07% 166.6 252.0 418.6 3.90% Monthly movement -5.0 5.0 0.0 -0.02% 48. During August 2024, a £5m PWLB Long Term loan was secured, taking advantage of the concessionary rate available for financing eligible HRA projects included in the HRA capital programme. Within the General Fund a £5m Local authority loan was repaid. It is anticipated new borrowing will be required shortly to maintain liquidity and finance further HRA capital expenditure. 49. PWLB rates initially dipped and then rose back in August, with rates at the end of the month close to those at the beginning of the month. Cabinet – 10 October 2024 (Part 1 Public) PART B: FINANCIAL RECOMMENDATIONS That the Cabinet: a. Agrees the rebasing proposal to process a budget virement and credit the corporate centre with £14.1m to the support Service Operating Budgets. Reasons for recommendation 50. Recommendation 2a asks cabinet to agree a budget virement following a rebasing exercise that the Council has carried out, with the output of this work identifying that service operating budgets are facing a £14 .1m pressure associated with demand outstripping the budgeted increase along with savings that can no longer be delivered due to changes in service delivery models.

Text extracted automatically from the PDF, so layout, tables and images are not shown. Open the original PDF on LB Hillingdon’s website.

Relevant Select Committee
Expiry date for any scrutiny call-in / date decision can be implemented (if no call-in)
Officer(s) to action
Directorate
Classification
13. Public Preview of matters to be considered in private PDF 309 KB
RESOLVED: That Cabinet note the reports to be considered later in private and Part 2 of the Cabinet agenda and comment on them as appropriate for public information purposes. Reasons for decision The Leader of the Council introduced the report which provided a public summary of the matters to be discussed in the private part of the Cabinet meeting later, increasing the Council’s transparency. One report was highlighted which related to issuing the NHS a license to occupy a wing of the Civic Centre. The Leader explained that this arrangement was expected to be financially beneficial for the Council and would further strengthen the existing partnership with the NHS, particularly on safeguarding arrangements. Alternative options considered and rejected These were set out in the public Cabinet report. Relevant Select Committee Expiry date for any scrutiny call-in / date decision can be implemented (if no call-in) This matter is not for call-in, as noting only. Officer(s) to action Mark Braddock Directorate Central Services Classification Public - The report and any background papers relating to this decision by the Cabinet are available to view on the Council's website or by visiting the Civic Centre, Uxbridge.
📄 Public Preview of matters to be considered in private PDF 309 KB
Read the text of this document (3 pages)
Cabinet report – 10 October 2024 (Part 1 Public) PUBLIC PREVIEW: MATTERS TO BE CONSIDERED LATER IN PRIVATE Cabinet Member(s) As appropriate Cabinet Portfolio(s) As appropriate Officer Contact(s) Mark Braddock – Democratic Services Papers with report None HEADLINES Summary A report to Cabinet to provide maximum transparency to residents on the private matters to be considered later in Part 2 of the Cabinet meeting and agenda. This will enable Cabinet Members to openly discuss such matters generally in public, and via the Council’s live broadcast of the meeting, without prejudicing their later consideration in private. Putting our Residents First Delivering on the Council Strategy 2022-2026 This report supports our ambition for residents / the Council of: An efficient, well-run, digital-enabled council working with partners to deliver services to improve the lives of all our residents This report supports our commitments to residents of: A Digital-Enabled, Modern, Well-Run Council Financial Cost As set out in the report. Relevant Select Committee As set out in this report under each item – however, this item is not for scrutiny call-in as it is information only. Ward(s) As set out in the report RECOMMENDATION That Cabinet note the reports to be considered later in private and Part 2 of the Cabinet agenda and comment on them as appropriate for public information purposes. Cabinet report – 10 October 2024 (Part 1 Public) Reasons for recommendation Why are certain reports considered in private? As a transparent, democratic organisation, the Council’s Cabinet will consider matters in public on Part 1 of this Cabinet agenda. However, there will inevitably be some reports that will need to be considered in private. T hese would generally relate to contracts , property transactions or commercially sensitive information , for example, tender bids from commercial organisations , which if made public, could prejudice the Council’s ability secure value -for-money for resident taxpayers. This information is also called ‘exempt’ information and is considered in Part 2 of any Cabinet agenda by applying the relevant section of the Part 1 of Schedule 12 (A) to the Local Government Act 1972 (as amended), in that the report contains certain information and that the public interest in withholding that information outweighs the public interest in disclosing it. How can the public find out more about the private reports? To ensure maximum transparency when the Cabinet considers such private reports: 1) They are first given advance notice on the Cabinet’s Forward Plan in summary form setting out the reason why they will be considered in private . The Forward Plan is a public document setting out all the expected decisions the Cabinet will make over the coming year, except those that are urgent, and is available on the Council’s website to view; 2) This report provides a fuller public preview of the matters to be discussed in Part 2 of this Cabinet meeting and gives an opportunity for Cabinet Members t o highlight issues of significance within and for public information purposes, without prejudicing their later fuller consideration in private. It also sets out the recommendations in general terms that are being proposed for a decision on. 3) Consideration of this report will also be broadcast live on the Council’s YouTube channel: Hillingdon London, and available for viewing afterwards, for wider democratic engagement. 4) After these private reports are considered in Part 2 of this Cabinet meeting, Cabinet’s full decisions on them will then be published on the Council’s website the day after the Cabinet meeting, along with the decisions on the other matters already considered in public. Alternative options considered Cabinet could resolve to release any private report into the public domain in extraordinary or highly exceptional cases , where it considers the public interest in disclosing the information outweighs the public interest in withholding it. However, to ensure greater transparency on all private matters considered, this public preview item is advised as the most suitable way forward. Legal comments Such private matters are considered in accordance with Local Government Act 1972 (as amended) Access to Information provisions and also The Local Authorities (Executive Arrangements) (Meetings and Access to Information) (England) Regulations 2012. This report enables such matters to be discussed in public as far as is possible under the relevant legislation. Cabinet report – 10 October 2024 (Part 1 Public) SUPPORTING INFORMATION ITEM 14 – CIVIC CENTRE TRANSFORMATION: NHS LICENCE TO OCCUPY AT THE CIVIC CENTRE, UXBRIDGE Relevant Cabinet Portfolio(s) Property, Highways and Transport Relevant Ward(s) Uxbridge Relevant Select Committee Corporate Resources & Infrastructure Information This report progresses the Civic Centre Transformation and a proposal to grant the NHS a Licence to Occupy at the Civic Centre in Uxbridge and utilise floor space not required for Council service delivery. This will deliver more joined-up local public services at the Civic Centre to better meet residents' needs, generate an annual income for the Council and enable the NHS to move towards a new operating model locally. ITEM 15 – DISPOSAL OF FOUNTAINS MILL, 81 HIGH STREET, UXBRIDGE Relevant Cabinet Portfolio(s) Property, Highways and Transport Relevant Ward(s) Uxbridge Relevant Select Committee Corporate Resources & Infrastructure Information This report considers the disposal of Fountains Mill, 81 High Street, Uxbridge, following its closure as a Young People’s Centre and Cabinet’s decision to implement a new delivery model for youth services. ITEM 16 – DISPOSAL OF GARAGE SITE, HILTON CLOSE, UXBRIDGE Relevant Cabinet Portfolio(s) Property, Highways and Transport Relevant Ward(s) Uxbridge Relevant Select Committee Corporate Resources & Infrastructure Information This report considers the disposal of a garage site at Hilton Close, Uxbridge for residential development. The site is currently under-utilised, with garages that need repair and prone to occurrences of anti-social behaviour and fly-tipping.

Text extracted automatically from the PDF, so layout, tables and images are not shown. Open the original PDF on LB Hillingdon’s website.

Relevant Select Committee
Expiry date for any scrutiny call-in / date decision can be implemented (if no call-in)
Officer(s) to action
Directorate
Classification
14. Civic Centre Transformation: NHS Licence to Occupy at the Civic Centre, Uxbridge
RESOLVED: That the Cabinet : 1. Authorises a Licence to Occupy to the NHS of the 2 South Quadrant at the Civic Centre on the terms set out in this report, and as shown on the plan at Appendix 1. 2. Delegates all future decisions regarding the implementation of this matter to the Corporate Director of Place, in conjunction with the Cabinet Member for Property Highways and Transport Reasons for decision The Cabinet Member for Property, Highways and Transport introduced a report, which Cabinet agreed, for a Licence to Occupy to the NHS for office space at the Civic Centre, Uxbridge as part of the Civic Centre transformation and plans for more joined up local public services. The Leader of the Council thanked the Chief Executive for his efforts in securing this. Alternative options considered and rejected Alternative options considered by Cabinet were set out in the confidential report. Relevant Select Committee Corporate Resources & Infrastructure Expiry date for any scrutiny call-in / date decision can be implemented (if no call-in) Cabinet’s decisions on this matter can be called in by a majority of the select committee by 5pm, Friday 18 October 2024. If not called-in, Cabinet’s decisions can then be implemented. Officer(s) to action Gary Penticost Directorate Place Directorate Classification Private - Whilst the Cabinet's decisions above are always made public, the officer report relating to this matter is not because it was considered in the private part of the meeting and contained information relating to the financial or business affairs of any particular person (including the Authority holding that information) and the public interest in withholding the information outweighed the public interest in disclosing it in accordance with Section 100(A) and paragraph 3 of Part 1 of Schedule 12 (A) to the Local Government Act 1972 (as amended).
Relevant Select Committee
Expiry date for any scrutiny call-in / date decision can be implemented (if no call-in)
Officer(s) to action
Directorate
Classification
15. Disposal of Fountains Mill, High Street, Uxbridge
RESOLVED: That the Cabinet: 1) Declares that following the closure of the Fountains Mill, 81 High Street, Uxbridge UB8 1JR as a Young People’s Centre, the site is now surplus to requirements; the Property is shown edged red on Plan A below. 2) Authorises the unconditional sale of the Property Fountains Mill, 81 High Street, Uxbridge UB8 1JR on the open market on the terms and conditions as detailed in this report. 3) Delegates all other necessary decisions regarding the sale and disposal to the Corporate Director of Place, in conjunction with the Cabinet Member for Property, Highways and Transport. Reasons for decision The Cabinet Member for Property, Highways and Transport introduced a report, which Cabinet agreed, on the disposal and sale of Fountains Mill in Uxbridge, a former young people’s centre, as the site was now surplus to requirements. Alternative options considered and rejected Alternative options for the site were considered by Cabinet, as set out in the confidential report. Relevant Select Committee Corporate Resources & Infrastructure Expiry date for any scrutiny call-in / date decision can be implemented (if no call-in) Cabinet’s decisions on this matter can be called in by a majority of the select committee by 5pm, Friday 18 October 2024. If not called-in, Cabinet’s decisions can then be implemented. Officer(s) to action James Raven Directorate Place Classification Private - Whilst the Cabinet's decisions above are always made public, the officer report relating to this matter is not because it was considered in the private part of the meeting and contained information relating to the financial or business affairs of any particular person (including the Authority holding that information) and the public interest in withholding the information outweighed the public interest in disclosing it in accordance with Section 100(A) and paragraph 3 of Part 1 of Schedule 12 (A) to the Local Government Act 1972 (as amended).
Relevant Select Committee
Expiry date for any scrutiny call-in / date decision can be implemented (if no call-in)
Officer(s) to action
Directorate
Classification
16. Disposal of garage site and land at Hilton Close, Uxbridge
RESOLVED: That the Cabinet: 1) Declare the garage site at Hilton Close, Uxbridge, UB8 2QJ as surplus to requirements; the Property is shown edged red in Appendix A. 2) Note that a planning application for 2x three-bedroom dwellings has been approved at Planning Committee, subject to a Section 106 legal agreement and conditions. 3) Authorise the disposal of the garage site at Hilton Close with the method of disposal delegated to the Corporate Director of Place, in conjunction with the Cabinet Member for Property, Highways and Transport. 4) Delegate authority to the Corporate Director of Place, in conjunction with the Cabinet Member for Property, Highways and Transport, to make any further necessary decisions with regard to the implementation of Cabinet’s decisions. Reasons for decision The Cabinet Member for Property, Highways and Transport introduced a report, which Cabinet agreed, on the disposal and sale of a garage site at Hilton Close, Uxbridge that was under-utilised and prone to anti-social behaviour, with the Leader of the Council also welcoming plans for its conversion to residential use. Alternative options considered and rejected Alternative options for the site were considered by Cabinet, as set out in the confidential report. Relevant Select Committee Corporate Resources & Infrastructure Expiry date for any scrutiny call-in / date decision can be implemented (if no call-in) Cabinet’s decisions on this matter can be called in by a majority of the select committee by 5pm, Friday 18 October 2024. If not called-in, Cabinet’s decisions can then be implemented. Officer(s) to action Tom Prevezer Directorate Place Directorate Classification Private - Whilst the Cabinet's decisions above are always made public, the officer report relating to this matter is not because it was considered in the private part of the meeting and contained information relating to the financial or business affairs of any particular person (including the Authority holding that information) and the public interest in withholding the information outweighed the public interest in disclosing it in accordance with Section 100(A) and paragraph 3 of Part 1 of Schedule 12 (A) to the Local Government Act 1972 (as amended).
Relevant Select Committee
Expiry date for any scrutiny call-in / date decision can be implemented (if no call-in)
Officer(s) to action
Directorate
Classification
17. Any other items the Chairman agrees are relevant or urgent
No other items were considered. The meeting closed at 19:38pm Internal Use only* Implementation of decisions & scrutiny call-in When can these decisions be implemented by officers? Officers can implement Cabinet’s decisions in these minutes only from the expiry of the scrutiny call-in period, unless otherwise stated in the minutes above, which is: 5pm, Friday 18 October 2024 However, this is subject to the decision not being called in by Councillors on the relevant Select Committee. Upon receipt of a valid call-in request, Democratic Services will immediately advise the relevant officer(s) and the Cabinet decision must then be put on hold. Councillor scrutiny call-in of these decisions Councillors on the relevant Select Committee shown in these minutes for the relevant decision made may request to call-in that decision. The call-in request must be before the expiry of the scrutiny call-in period above. Councillors should use the Scrutiny Call-in App (link below) on their devices to initiate any call-in request. Further advice can be sought from Democratic Services if required: Scrutiny Call-In - Power Apps (secure) Notice These decisions have been taken under The Local Authorities (Executive Arrangements) (Meetings and Access to Information) (England) Regulations 2012. This Cabinet meeting was also broadcast live on the Council’s YouTube channel here for wider resident engagement. Please note that these minutes and decisions are the definitive record of proceedings by the Council of this meeting. If you would like further information about the decisions of the Cabinet, please contact the Council below: democratic@hillingdon.gov.uk Democratic Services: 01895 250636 Media enquiries: 01895 250403
Internal Use only*
When can these decisions be implemented by officers?
Councillor scrutiny call-in of these decisions
Notice
Page Updated: